Mitel SX-200 Technician's Handbook/Service Manual
Comments
Description
CX/CXi ControllerTECHNICIAN’S HANDBOOK Release 4.0 SX-200 ICP CX Technician’s Handbook NOTICE The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mitel Networks™ Corporation (MITEL®). The information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by Mitel or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. Mitel and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes. No part of this document can be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means - electronic or mechanical - for any purpose without written permission from Mitel Networks Corporation. MITEL, SX-200, LIGHTWARE, SUPERSET, MiTAI are trademarks of Mitel Networks Corporation. HYPERTERMINAL is a trademark of Hilgraeve Inc. VT100 is a trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation. All other product names specified in this document are trademarks of their corresponding owners. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Document # 51009228 Release 4.0 October 2006 ® ™ Trademark of Mitel Networks Corporation ©Copyright 2006, Mitel Networks Corporation All rights reserved ii Table of Contents Chapter 1 : Introduction About this Handbook ............................................................................................3 Purpose of this handbook ................................................................................3 Who this handbook is written for ......................................................................3 Where you can find more information ..............................................................4 Contacting Mitel ...............................................................................................6 Symbols used in this handbook .......................................................................7 Important safety instructions ............................................................................7 About the SX-200® ICP CX/CXi ............................................................................8 System packages.............................................................................................8 System configurations......................................................................................9 DSP configurations ........................................................................................11 Supported Peripherals ........................................................................................13 Default Database Configuration ..........................................................................14 Telephone related ..........................................................................................14 Voice mail related...........................................................................................15 Trunk related ..................................................................................................15 System related ...............................................................................................15 Chapter 2 : Basic Installation Before You Begin ................................................................................................19 Quick Installation ................................................................................................19 SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Hardware ............................................................................21 Hardware Ports and Connectors....................................................................21 Controller Components ..................................................................................22 Identify the Required Components.................................................................23 Installation Checklist ......................................................................................24 Basic Installation Overview .................................................................................27 Installing the SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Controller ......................................................28 Installing Optional Controller Hardware ..............................................................29 Precautions ....................................................................................................29 Removing the cover .......................................................................................30 Install the Analog Option Board (AOB) ..........................................................32 Installing optional DSP module(s) ..................................................................35 Installing an optional T1/E1 Combo module ..................................................36 Installing the optional Quad CIM Module(s) ...................................................38 Installing an optional system hard drive .........................................................39 Installing an optional Application Processor Card..........................................42 Installing an APC hard drive...........................................................................45 Installing the Stratum clock ............................................................................47 iii SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Installing Controller Software Using an External CompactFlash Card (Optional Initial Install) ........................................................................................ 48 Installing APC Software ...................................................................................... 50 Wall or Rack Mounting ....................................................................................... 51 Wall mounting the controller .......................................................................... 51 Rack mounting the controller ......................................................................... 52 Installing an ASU II ............................................................................................. 53 Installing an External Layer 2 Switch for Increased IP Connections (CX/CXi) ... 55 Powering IP phones in an expanded system................................................. 55 Layer 2 switch programming.......................................................................... 56 CDE programming ......................................................................................... 56 Connecting the Phones and Lines ..................................................................... 57 IP Phones ...................................................................................................... 57 ONS/CLASS and LS/CLASS ports ................................................................ 59 Adding a PKM .................................................................................................... 60 Requirements ................................................................................................ 60 CDE programming ......................................................................................... 60 Installation ..................................................................................................... 60 Connecting Music on Hold, Paging and Door Phone/Door Opener ................... 61 Music on Hold (MOH) interface ..................................................................... 61 Paging ........................................................................................................... 61 Door Phone/Door Opener.............................................................................. 63 Connecting a Night Bell and Alarm Device ........................................................ 64 CDE programming for a Night Bell ................................................................ 64 CDE programming for an Alarm Device ........................................................ 64 Setting up an FTP Server on a Maintenance PC ............................................... 65 CDE Programming......................................................................................... 65 FTP Server Setup .......................................................................................... 65 System Health Check ......................................................................................... 66 Chapter 3 : Basic Programming Programming Overview ...................................................................................... 69 Preparing to Enter Customer Data ..................................................................... 70 PC Requirements .......................................................................................... 70 Serial Connection to the Controller................................................................ 70 Secure Telnet Connection to the Controller................................................... 71 Web Interface Connection to the Controller................................................... 72 Port Usage..................................................................................................... 73 Enabling MOSS Options .................................................................................... 74 System Options to Avoid .................................................................................... 75 iv Table of Contents Programming the Customer Data Entry (CDE) Forms ........................................75 Programming Features for each Phone ..............................................................76 Before you begin ............................................................................................76 Programming Embedded Voice Mail ..................................................................82 CDE Programming for Embedded Voice Mail................................................82 Voice Mail Forms ...........................................................................................83 Setting up RADs.............................................................................................85 Setting up Record a Call ................................................................................87 Using the Administrator’s Mailbox..................................................................88 Testing Voice Mail Operation .........................................................................92 Programming Phonebook ...................................................................................93 Programming a Printer Port ................................................................................94 Programming Stations/Sets Automatically ..........................................................95 Deleting a Device and All Dependent Resources ...............................................97 Deleting a range of devices and dependent resources..................................97 Programming a Single Line Voice Station ..........................................................98 Programming a Multi-Line Set ............................................................................99 Programming a T1/E1 Trunk .............................................................................100 Programming a PRI Trunk ................................................................................101 Programming Analog Trunks ............................................................................ 106 Non Dial-In Trunks ....................................................................................... 106 Dial-in Trunks ...............................................................................................107 DISA Trunks.................................................................................................108 Programming T1 and PRI Trunks as DISA Trunks ......................................109 Programming ANI/DNIS on an Incoming Trunk ...........................................110 CLASS Trunks .............................................................................................113 Running the Line Quality Test for LS Trunks ...............................................114 Programming IP Sockets for Hotel/ Motel terminals and ACD Monitor .............115 Programming Voice mail with PMS Integration .................................................117 Requirements...............................................................................................117 SX-200 ICP Programming............................................................................118 Setting up the Ether232 ...............................................................................118 Programming the PMS Interface on the SX-200 ICP ........................................119 Requirements...............................................................................................119 SX-200 ICP Programming............................................................................119 Programming SpectraLink Wireless Telephones ..............................................123 Requirements...............................................................................................123 Programming................................................................................................123 Programming Call Forwarding - External ..........................................................128 Feature Limitations ...........................................................................................129 CDE Cross Reference ......................................................................................132 v SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Chapter 4 : Advanced Installation and Programming Overview .......................................................................................................... 137 Networking Capabilities of the SX-200 ICP ...................................................... 138 Planning your Installation ................................................................................. 139 IP Networking ................................................................................................... 140 Requirements for IP Networking - CX.......................................................... 140 Virtual LANs (VLANs) .................................................................................. 141 Requirements for IP Networking - CXi......................................................... 150 Default Controller IP Addresses .................................................................. 152 Implementing a Voice-Only Network ........................................................... 156 Implementing a Voice and Data Network .................................................... 157 IP Network Configuration Procedures ......................................................... 159 Networking Mitel IP-PBXs ................................................................................ 171 SX-200 ICP Programming ........................................................................... 172 Uniform Numbering Plan ............................................................................. 174 Chapter 5 : Routine Maintenance Is the system healthy? ...................................................................................... 177 System health checklist ............................................................................... 177 Checking the System ....................................................................................... 178 Installing FRUs ................................................................................................. 179 Precautions.................................................................................................. 179 Powering the Controller Up or Down ........................................................... 179 System Reset .............................................................................................. 180 System Shutdown........................................................................................ 180 Re-initializing the Controller......................................................................... 181 Replacing the Hard Drive or CompactFlash ..................................................... 182 Replacing the Analog Main Board (AMB) ................................................... 183 Other FRUs ................................................................................................. 184 Performing Backups ......................................................................................... 185 Backing up a database ................................................................................ 185 Restoring a database .................................................................................. 186 Installing an alternate database................................................................... 187 Upgrading the System Software ....................................................................... 188 Upgrading from the external CompactFlash card ........................................ 189 Upgrading by FTP ....................................................................................... 191 Replacing IP Phones ........................................................................................ 192 Restarting IP Phones ....................................................................................... 193 Measuring LS Trunks ....................................................................................... 194 Running the Line Quality Test ..................................................................... 195 vi Table of Contents Running the Distortion Test..........................................................................196 Running the Echo Test.................................................................................196 Maintenance Commands ..................................................................................197 Maintenance Port Characteristics ................................................................197 Telnet Requirements....................................................................................197 Entering Command Sequences ...................................................................197 Logging In ....................................................................................................198 Logging Out..................................................................................................199 Switching between Maintenance and CDE ..................................................199 Displaying the Card Configuration ...............................................................199 Showing the System Identity........................................................................199 System Commands......................................................................................200 Report Commands .......................................................................................203 Traffic Measurement Commands.................................................................205 Log Commands............................................................................................206 Diagnostic Function Commands ..................................................................207 Backing up Log and Trap Files using Kermit ....................................................208 Sending Logs and other System Files to an E-mail Address or FTP Server ....209 Retrieving Logs and other System Files using Kermit ......................................210 Maintenance Tips .............................................................................................210 Chapter 6 : Basic Troubleshooting and Repair About this Chapter ............................................................................................213 Troubleshooting Tools ......................................................................................214 Before you Contact Technical Support .............................................................215 General Troubleshooting Steps ........................................................................216 Using the Phone Debug Option ...................................................................216 Checking the Status LEDs ................................................................................217 Troubleshooting Phones ...................................................................................220 Troubleshooting Analog Trunks ........................................................................222 Basic Troubleshooting..................................................................................222 Troubleshooting Signaling Problems ...........................................................223 Troubleshooting T1 Trunks (D4 DS-1) ..............................................................226 Synchronization............................................................................................226 Signaling Types............................................................................................227 Test/Verify (T1) ............................................................................................227 Troubleshooting Voice Mail ...............................................................................230 SX-200 ICP Property Management System Interface ......................................232 Property Management System Messages ...................................................232 SX-200 ICP and PMS Cannot Communicate...............................................235 Testing the PMS Interface of the PBX .........................................................235 vii ........................................................ 329 Appendix D : Folio Views (E-Docs) Tips .................................................................................................................................... 251 Troubleshooting Phone Audio Quality ................... 242 Troubleshooting IP Phone Registration ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 259 Appendix A : Default Database Values .......................... 258 Troubleshooting System Boot Failure ........................................... 256 CDE Check List .............................. 253 Troubleshooting IP Trunks ............................................................................................................... 256 IP Check List ................... 242 Connectivity problems ................ 240 Troubleshooting IP Phone Connectivity ........................... 319 Appendix C : System Cabling ......................................................................... 243 IP Phone Analyzer ........................................... 240 Check List ............................................................................................. 261 Appendix B : Part Numbers ........... 239 General Network Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 335 Index viii .............................................................................SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Chapter 7 : Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair About this Chapter .................................................................................................................................. 242 Using a network analyzer to debug ...................... Chapter 1 Introduction . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 2 . The course has two parts: basic and advanced. 3 . SX-200 ICP Basic Installation and Maintenance Course You need to take the Basic I & M course if you are installing the SX-200 ICP as a voice system only. You must complete the Basic I & M course before attending the advanced course.Introduction About this Handbook Purpose of this handbook This handbook provides • an overview of the system capabilities • installation steps • programming procedures • maintenance procedures • troubleshooting information Who this handbook is written for This handbook is for a qualified technician who has successfully completed the SX-200® ICP Installation and Maintenance Course. This means that you are using the default settings for IP and you are not planning on implementing Virtual LANs (VLANs). The basic course is available in self-study format and you must have completed your LIGHTWARE™ 19 RELEASE 3.2 certification. SX-200 ICP Advanced Installation and Maintenance Course You MUST complete the Advanced I & M course if you are planning to • connect a PC to the PC port on the IP Phones (enable System Option 131) • connect the SX-200 ICP in an existing LAN (Local Area Network) • use an external DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server • implement VLANs (Virtual LANs) • implement IP (Internet Protocol) Trunking • network to a 3300 ICP via IP trunk or QSIG The advanced course is available in a leader-led format. exe to install the Technical Documentation and Folio Viewer. outstanding issues.html file to locate the required guides. go to the appropriate Language subdirectory. Use the index. You can also obtain the latest Release Notes from Mitel® OnLine at www.mitel.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Where you can find more information The SX-200 ICP documentation set includes the following components: • • Printed documents - Technician’s Handbook - Safety Instructions Documents supplied on the SX-200 ICP software CD-ROM - SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation in Folio (NFO) format. Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive. bug fixes. the application used to view the documentation. which describe software changes. and hardware compatibility considerations for the new software release.com. To access user guides and other documentation. Technical Training Materials - SX-200 ICP Basic I & M Course - SX-200 ICP Advanced I & M Course Release Notes Every software release is accompanied by Release Notes. Note that you must be a registered user to access Mitel OnLine. Read the Release Notes before you begin a software upgrade. and Hotel/Motel Front Desk User Guides - Technical Bulletins (TBs) and Release Notes (RNs) Accessing Documentation on the software CD-ROM 1. 4. The Release Notes are included on the system software CD-ROM. Double-click Setup. Voice Mail. - Technician’s Handbook - Safety Instructions - Telephone. 4 . 2. Navigate to the Documentation folder. 3. Obtain the latest TBs from Mitel OnLine. Note: You must be a registered user to access Mitel Online.Introduction Technical Bulletins Technical Bulletins (TBs) are issued by Mitel Technical Support to address frequently asked questions regarding software and hardware problems. Access Product and Technical Documentation 1. and Installation Guides) OR Knowledge Base (Release Notes and Technical Bulletins). Navigate to Product Documentation (Technical Documents. To download a document: • Right-click on the name of the document and select Save Target As OR • When viewing a PDF document.mitel. Accessing Mitel Online You can access Mitel Online from the www. The database is accessed through Mitel Online. click the disk icon. User Guides. View or Download a Document To view a document: • Click on the name of the document. 2.com Web site. 5 . Mitel Knowledge Base The Mitel Knowledge Base is a searchable database of problem-solving information on the SX-200 ICP and other Mitel products. Login to Mitel OnLine. so you MUST keep a proper record of it. Before attempting the software upgrade.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Create Telephone User Guides with Manual Maker 1.com Contacting Mitel Order Desk You can reach the Order Desk at 1-800-796-4835.techweb. This password is required during the upgrade procedure. Helpful websites For definitions of technical terms • http://www.com).whatis. Repair Department You must get a Return of Merchandise Authorization (RMA) form from the Repairs Department before sending equipment back to Mitel Network Corporation.networktroubleshooting. 4. Follow the instructions on the screen to register and use Manual Maker.com For networking information • http://www. Click Manual Maker. You can reach the Repairs Department at 1-888-222-6483. Navigate to Product Documentation. 2.practicallynetworked. call Mitel Customer Service during normal business hours. Accessing Your Mitel Options Password You must obtain your Mitel Options Password through Mitel Online (www.com • http://www.mitel. to confirm a current password or to purchase new options and receive a new password.com/encyclopedia • http://www. 3. 6 . Login to Mitel OnLine. A new password is issued to you if you are purchasing new options. 7 . Symbols used in this handbook Indicates a hazardous situation which. could result in damage to the equipment. You can reach Technical Support at 1-800-561-0860 or 1-613-592-2122.Mitel Dealers Please contact Mitel Technical Support if you require technical assistance. See the system Safety Instructions that are shipped with the system for complete safety information.Introduction Technical Support . if not avoided. if not avoided. Identifies an important note or a useful tip. please collect the required information listed in “Before You Contact Technical Support” on page 91 before calling Mitel Technical Support. Indicates a situation which. If you cannot resolve the problem by using the Troubleshooting chapter. Important safety instructions Failure to follow all instructions may result in improper equipment operation and/or risk of electrical shock. could result in injury or death. and a powered 16-port Layer 2 switch. one T1 or PRI link. the CXi includes an Internet gateway with firewall. The Basic System package does not include IP Phones. 12 LS/CLASS circuits. eight ONS/CLASS circuits. and the productivity-enhancing applications and networking efficiency of IP. up to 3 ASU IIs (with ONS/LS combo cards) and 16 IP trunks for private networking. The CX provides a 10/100/1G LAN interface port and a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. System packages The CX/CXi controller is sold alone or as part of the Basic System package that includes the components shown in the table below. the SX-200 ICP CX/CXi supports up to 100 IP phones. the ease of use and cost effectiveness of a key system. Tailored for small enterprises.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook About the SX-200 ICP CX/CXi The Mitel SX-200 Integrated Communications Platform (ICP) provides the reliability and comprehensive features of a PBX. In addition to these features. Table 1: Basic System Package Components Component LS/CLASS circuits 6 ONS circuits 4 Voice mail ports 4 DSPs 1 Dual DSP Module Licenses IP Phone Voice Mailbox TDM ACD Agent IP Channel 16 16 44 None None Software Options 8 Quantity/Description Feature Level 6 ONS CLASS Functionally 1 Digital Link Voice Mail Softkey . Larger capacity media is strongly advised for systems with more than 16 lines or above average usage of voice mail or Record a Call. It can be reconfigured by modifying the default database or by installing one of the alternate databases supplied on the software CD-ROM. The basic configuration is expandable through the purchase of additional components. For more information about alternate databases.Dual DSP MMC and/or T1/E1 Combo module which includes one DSP -Quad CIM MMC Purchase modules Notes: 1.Introduction System configurations The controller is configured at the factory as a square key telephone system (KTS). 9 . including DSP resources. those obtained elsewhere are not supported. Table 2: SX-200 ICP System CX/CXi Configuration Basic Configuration Expanded Configuration How Expanded 6 LS/CLASS circuits 12 Add Analog Options Board 4 ONS/CLASS circuits 8 Add Analog Options Board 16 IP Phone licenses 100 IP Phone licenses and 16 IP trunks Purchase additional licenses Add Layer 2 swtich(es) 4 voice mail ports 16 ports Purchase Options and DSP resources (incremental) 16 voice mailbox licenses 748 Purchase additional licenses (incremental) Approximately 11 hours of voice mail message storage Up to 450 hours of voice mail storage Install internal hard drive Three 3-party conferences 10 3-party Conferences (30 conferees) Purchase DSP resources. 2. Only Mitel-provided hard drives and CompactFlash cards should be installed. see page 187. Dual DSP on motherboard . See Appendix B for part numbers. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Figure 1: Basic SX-200 ICP System (CXi controller shown) 10 . 729 channels 64 IP phones 24 ONS phones 12 LS/CLASS trunks 24 T1 or 23 PRI ccts Base + Dual DSP (4 total) 10 three-party conf. 16 voice mail ports 0 G.729 channels 80 IP phones 100 ONS phones 12 LS/CLASS trunks 24 T1 or 23 PRI ccts Base + Quad DSP (6 total) 10 three-party conf. The DSP Configuration Option (Form 4.729 channels 40 IP phones 8 ONS phones 12 LS/CLASS trunks 0 T1 ccts Base + T1/E1 Combo + Dual DSP (5 total) 10 three-party conf.729 channels 80 IP phones 56 ONS phones 36 LS/CLASS trunks 0 T1 (Page 1 of 2) 11 . 16 voice mail ports 8 G. 16 voice mail ports 8 G.729 channels 24 IP phones 8 ONS phones 12 LS/CLASS trunks 0 T1 ccts Base + T1/E1 Combo (3 total) 10 three-party conf.Introduction DSP configurations The table below lists some DSP requirements for the system. The requirements are guidelines only. Option 132) to use with the CX/CXi is BUSINESS 1 as shown in Table 3: Table 3: DSP Configurations DSP Configuration Base System (2 total) Without Compression With Compression 3 three-party conf. 16 voice mail ports 0 G. the actual number of DSPs needed depends on the intended use of the system. 16 voice mail ports 0 G. 16 voice mail ports 0 G. 4 voice mail ports 8 G. 4 voice mail ports 0 G.729 channels 80 IP phones 100 ONS phones 36 LS/CLASS trunks 0 T1 10 three-party conf.729 channels 80 IP phones 100 ONS phones 12 LS/CLASS trunks 24 T1 or 23 PRI ccts 10 three-party conf.729 channels 40 IP phones 40 ONS phones 16 LS/CLASS trunks 0 T1 ccts 3 three-party conf. 4. The number of conference. voice mail. The default value is 0. 16 voice mail ports 16 G. The option is purchasable in multiples of 8 to a maximum of 16. 12 . by adding 8 compression resources to a system with 4 DSPs total. the maximum number of three-party conferences drops to 3 and the maximum number of voice mail ports drops to 4. and compression resources is fixed by the purchased option and the number of DSP devices available. By installing an Analog Option Board (AOB). Number of Compression Resources) controls the number of G.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 3: DSP Configurations (continued) DSP Configuration Base + T1/E1 Combo + Quad DSP (7 total) Without Compression 10 three-party conf. 3.729 channels 100 IP phones 100 ONS phones 16 LS/CLASS trunks 24 T1 or 23 PRI ccts With Compression 10 three-party conf.The G. capacity doubles to 8 ONS and 12 LS circuits.729 channels 100 IP phones 100 ONS phones 16 LS/CLASS trunks 24 T1 or 23 PRI ccts (Page 2 of 2) Notes: 1. The AOB does not require extra DSP resources. The controller supports the G.729a audio codec for 8/13 kbps provides a good reduction in bandwidth with only minor loss in voice quality.711 and G. For example. The base CX/CXi contains an Analog Main Board (AMB) that supports 4 ONS and 6 LS circuits. - The G. 2. Compression enables more devices to share the available bandwidth. Compression alters the number of resources available for the system.711 PCM audio codec for 56/64 kbps generally provides the best voice quality and is comparable to TDM-type connections.729a codecs available to IP devices in the system. . A hard drive is strongly recommended for systems that have more than eight voice mail ports or when Record a Call is frequently used. The quantity entered must exactly match the quantity on the MOSS sheet. - A purchasable MOSS option (Option 120.729a audio codecs. the other values are adjustable. 16 voice mail ports 0 G. The following peripherals are supported: Mitel IP Phones Conference Units PKMs 5201 5303 5412 5207 5310 5212 Misc ONS/CLASS phone Headset SIM 2/AIM 5215 5220 5224 5330 5340 Note: The SX-200 ICP CXi (Release 2. The Dual Mode phones look the same as the original 5215 and 5220 phones.0 or higher. and minimum 512 MB flash. 13 .1 or higher) and CX (Release 4.Introduction Supported Peripherals Except for ONS telephones and headsets. The Dual Mode phones are identified as 5215 or 5220 “Dual Port. all devices listed are Mitel parts.0 or higher. • 5330 and 5340 IP Phones require SX-200 ICP Release 4. Check the label on the underside of the phone to determine which type it is.0 and higher) also support the Dual Mode (or DPLite) 5215 and 5220 IP phones. or hard drive.” Notes: • 5212 and 5224 IP Phones require SX-200 ICP Release 3. See the SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation for part numbers. You will also be able to receive fax and modem calls. see page 187. but will have to program ARS to make external calls from ONS devices. They are for IP Phones.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Default Database Configuration The CDE Forms are factory-set with default values that make it easier and faster to program the system. or modem) and make extension-to-extension calls without doing any programming. fax. Alternate databases are provided on the SX-200 ICP software CD and on the Mitel Online website. 14 . For more information. and IP trunks. The default database includes the following: Telephone related • 3-digit extension numbers that start at extension 100 • Ports on the Controller - 6 LS CLASS - 4 ONS (extensions 200 to 203) • 7 default classes of service (COS 1 – 7). The defaults allow you to install the SX-200 ICP in a square KTS (key telephone system) configuration with up to 16 IP phones and four analog terminals (phone. LS/CLASS.) • default key programming on the sets for a 6-line square system • default ring cadences • all phones assigned to paging group 1 • the handsfree microphone is not automatically turned on when receiving a page (auto-latched). ONS. Attendant Console. Subattendant. Voice Mail. (The subattendant COS and Attendant Console COS are used by the SX-200 ICP MX only. 1. no dial 9 for trunk access System related • default system options • default feature access codes • the default music port (located on the analog mainboard) is ON • the default paging port (located on the analog mainboard) is ON • the night bell extension is 340 • SMDR/CDE Print default ON to IP socket 61328 • default DHCP settings and a SX-200 ICP Controller default IP address (192.2) to match (factory-set). Note: See Appendix A for a list of default values in the programming forms. 15 .168. Trunk related • trunks in form 14 are non-dial-in to the CO line keys • LS trunk circuit descriptor defaulted as CLASS • six LS trunks programmed to keys on IP Phones • no ARS.Introduction Voice mail related • 4 voice mail ports • 16 voice mail mailboxes numbered the same as the first 16 IP phones • Hunt Group for Voice mail ports with pilot number 300 • - COS 6 and - extension numbers 301 to 316 reserved for voice mail port extensions system-wide Call Forward No Answer to voice mail for all calls. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 16 . Chapter 2 Basic Installation . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 18 . See “Installation Checklist” on page 24 for a list of materials and tools required to complete the installation. Systems installed by technicians lacking certification are ineligible to receive technical support from Mitel. To install a basic system: 1. 3. Mount the controller. - Connect the LS CLASS lines and any ONS phones to the line ports on the back of the controller using standard 4-conductor cables with RJ-11 connectors.mitel. Connect the hardware: - For the CXi. see. or the Engineering Guidelines document on the Mitel Edocs website (http://edocs. For more information.com). complete the installation by enabling the options in Form 04. depending on set type. see “” on page 57. Quick Installation You can quickly install the system if it does not require any purchasable MOSS Options or optional controller hardware. external power sources are required. If you are adding MOSS Options. For detailed planning information. connect to an (optional) external switch. CAUTION: Integrating the SX-200 ICP CX/CXi into an existing data network requires Advanced certification. System Options/System Timers. 19 . Connect the ground lug at the back of the controller to ground. For detailed information on power provisioning. If more PKMs are installed. For the CX. “Enabling MOSS Options” on page 74. The CXi provides power for up to 16 phones and up to four PKMs. especially when integrating the system into an existing data network.Basic Installation Before You Begin A successful installation of the SX-200 ICP CX/CXi depends on careful planning. Appendix B of the Handbook provides a summary of the Guidelines. connect the IP phones to the Layer 2 switch ports using CAT 5 cable. 2. see the Engineering Guidelines in the Documentation folder on the SX-200 ICP software CD-ROM. 4. Wait while the controller boots up. Power up the controller. - The boot sequence is finished when the Major Alarm LED is the only flashing LED and the IP phones display “Use SuperKey to send PIN. 6.” - All phones connected to the controller are now functional. Verify that the system is working. see pages 61-64 for installation details.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook - Connect a Music on Hold source. 20 . Enter the IP Set Registration PIN numbers on the IP phones (default *** + extension number). 5. and any other optional devices to the back of the controller. - The Alarms LEDs on the controller flash and the IP Phones display IP addresses. 7. see “System Health Check” on page 66. Pager. Night Bells. Basic Installation SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Hardware Hardware Ports and Connectors Figure 2: CXi Controller Front Panel Figure 3: CX Controller Front Panel 21 . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Figure 4: CX and CXi Controller Rear Panel Controller Components Figure 5: Controller Components 22 . database.3af LAN ports (CXi only) • 2 USB 1. Dual DSP MMC or Quad DSP MMC Provides more resources for conferencing. 4 ONS/CLASS • 2 PFT (Power Fail Transfer) circuits • MOH (Music On Hold) port to connect an external audio source • Loudspeaker port to connect to an external paging system • Dry contacts for Alarm.1 ports for future use • Onboard Real-Time Clock • 512 MB internal Compact Flash for system software. (Page 1 of 2) 23 . a DSP. Door Opener Relay and Auxiliary Ringer • RS232 port for Maintenance • 10/100 WAN port for Internet connectivity • 10/100/1G LAN port for connecting to 3rd-party Ethernet switches • 16 10/100 802. T1/E1 Combo Module Provides a T1 or PRI link. and a Stratum 4 clock.Basic Installation Identify the Required Components The range of possible system configurations is determined by the type and number of controller components included. Table 4: System Components System components Basic Controller Capabilities • 6 LS/CLASS. ASU II Provides 16 ONS/CLASS circuits or 12 ONS/4 LS combination. Stratum 3 clock module For digital trunks. and voice mail storage Optional components: Analog Option Board Provides 6 additional LS/CLASS and 4 ONS/ CLASS circuits. voice mail and other applications. 0 will not install the 5330/5340 firmware load on systems using 256 MB CompactFlash. System Hardware and software An SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Controller Optional hardware (see the previous table) Release 4. 24 . APC Hard Drive Required for Application Processor Card.0 software IP phones Note: Release 4. (Page 2 of 2) Installation Checklist Tools Static strap Phillips screwdriver (#1 and #2) Use proper fitting screwdrivers to prevent damaging components and fasteners. To use the full feature set of this phone with the SX-200 ICP. Quad CIM Module Four ports that provide connectivity to the ASU II for the CX/CXi. (Optional) Mitel-supplied CompactFlash memory card for on-site software installation and upgrades. CompactFlash card 256 MB.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 4: System Components (continued) System components Capabilities Application Processor Card (APC) Allows the system to host the Mitel Managed Application Server (MAS).0 without increasing storage media. for on-site software installation upgrades. Flash-based systems that do not plan to use the 5330/40 phones can upgrade to Release 4. you need a 512 MB CompactFlash or an internal hard drive. 5 with service pack 2.Basic Installation Cables and connectors Category 5 (CAT5) cable for all LAN devices (IP phones and computers) Note: Category 3 (CAT3) cable can be used for certain installations. PC requirements Windows® NT/98/2000/ME/XP PC or laptop Internet Explorer version 5. and uploading maintenance logs Secure Telnet client that supports SSL/TLS (Mitel Telnet client recommended) (Optional) CompactFlash Reader with Read/Write capability Line requirements LS/CLASS lines ONS/CLASS lines T1 lines (requires a T1/E1 Combo Module) PRI lines (requires a T1/E1 Combo Module) 25 . Telecom. CAT3 or better cable for any analog phones connected to the system RJ11 cable and connectors for LS lines and ONS phones A power cable for the SX-200 ICP Controller (supplied) Cable plugs must meet FCC Rules part 68 sub part F for dimensions and registration. database backups. Use of non-conforming plugs can cause intermittent connections.mitel. For more information. see the Engineering Guidelines document on the Mitel eDocss website http://edocs. especially when connected to the PC port on an IP phone) a serial cable to connect a PC to the SX-200 ICP Controller FTP Server—used for software upgrades. Network Interface Card: Full Duplex 10/100M (100M recommended. or version 6 (recommended) for client-side rendering and 128 bit encryption (required for access to Mitel Online).com. 13.12.11. or if connecting to the Internet through the LAN interface.192.168.168.1 .255 192.1 .1 .12.13.10.168. DNS server information) (Optional) SMTP server IP address for forwarding voice mail to e-mail and for e-mail notification of 911 calls and system alarms (Optional) IMAP Server IP address for forwarding voice mail to e-mail (Optional) Router if using IP trunking.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook LAN requirements Completed pre-installation questionnaire A subnet (see page 153 for default address) Customer data network information (for example.192.11.192. IP Address Requirements You need IP addresses for • The SX-200 ICP controller if not using the default • Each IP phone (a range of IP addresses assigned by the DHCP Server or statically assigned) • A router or gateway (if using) Important: The SX-200 ICP Controller uses the following reserved IP addresses: 192.192. tape player etc.10.1 .255 Ensure no other devices on the network use IP addresses within these ranges.168.168.168. Other Mitel IP phones Feature codes and extension number plans A list of customer-purchased options An uninterruptible power supply (recommended) (Optional) Music on Hold source (radio.) (Optional) External paging amplifiers and speakers (Optional) Auxiliary ringer (Night Bells) 26 .168.255 192.168.255 192. Basic Installation (Optional) Door Phone/Opener (Optional) Alarm device to signal system alarms (Optional) Mitel Managed Application Server software on Applications Processor Card (APC) and APC hard drive. (Optional) SMTP e-mail server and clients for forwarding voice mail to e-mail and for e-mail notification of 911 calls and system alarms. (Optional) External Layer 2 switch(es) for system expansion plus power source for attached IP phones. Door Phone/Opener. and Alarm Device (Optional) Install Programmable Key Modules Install an FTP Server on the Maintenance PC Verify the system 27 . Paging.) (Optional) Install Music on Hold. Basic Installation Overview Install optional controller hardware Install controller (Optional) Install an external Layer 2 switch to expand system capacity on the CX and beyond 16 ports on the CXi. Auxiliary Ringer. Connect the phones and lines (Optional) Load software on an external CompactFlash Card (strongly recommended if current software is not the most recent version. Install optional controller hardware according to the instructions on the pages indicated. or place it on a desk or shelf. Connect the ground stud on the rear panel of the controller to a hardwired ground using 18 AWG (0. 1.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Installing the SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Controller The SX-200 ICP system is shipped with the system software and a default database installed. see page 51. The wire must have green or yellow insulation. Connect a PC to the Maintenance port on the controller. power up the controller.75mm 2/) gauge wire. Crimp the wire to the ground source. For mounting instructions. 3. see page 70. etc. Analog Option Board.) are field-installed. The optional components (DSP modules. 28 . Mount the controller on the wall. 5. in a rack. Analog Option Board: page 32 DSP Module: page 35 T1/E1 Combo Module: page 36 Quad Copper Interface Module: page 38 System Hard Drive: page 39 Application Processor Card: page 42 APC Hard Drive: page 45 Stratum Clock Module: page 47 2. 4. If you are NOT installing software or optional hardware in the controller. Observe the following precautions when working on the system. particularly when handling PCB cards or using test equipment to measure voltages. • Conductive packages (antistatic packaging) should be grounded prior to opening them to remove the contents. Place suspected faulty cards in conductive packages to prevent further possible damage to the cards. • Always wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling printed circuit cards. These cards are identified with appropriate warnings on their faceplates. 29 . and similarly grounded prior to placing a card in the package. prior to removing the card and inserting it into the equipment.Basic Installation Installing Optional Controller Hardware • Analog Option Board • T1/E1 Combo Module • Stratum Clock Module • Dual DSP Option Modules • Application Processor Card • Quad CIM Module • APC hard drive • System hard drive Precautions WARNING: INSTRUCTIONS MUST BE FOLLOWED EXPLICITLY WHEN THEY INVOLVE THE PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY OF THE UNIT. • When installing or replacing PCB cards turn power off. but maintain the ground connections to the equipment (see Note below). When removing a new card from its package. touch the package to the cabinet frame first to release any static voltage buildup. Handle PCB cards only by the edges and avoid contact with any exposed electrical connections. Power must be OFF when inserting or removing cards. 2. 5. 4. 30 . Remove the controller from the rack or wall and place it on a suitable work area (if applicable). Lift the cover vertically (NOT at an angle) to avoid component damage. Lift the cover upward to remove it (). Removing the cover To remove the SX-200 ICP Controller cover: 1. Grip the handle on the plastic trim plate and pull back about 1/2” until the cover catches. 3. do NOT lift the back off using the handle. Loosen the captive screw at the back panel of the controller (). Unplug the power cord from the controller and disconnect all cables. CAUTION: Use proper fitting Phillips screwdrivers (#1 or #2) to prevent damaging components and fasteners. Once the cover of the CX/CXi has been slid back.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Cards that are not correctly packed in antistatic packaging when returned will not be covered by any warranty. 5. Reinstall the controller on the wall or in the rack (if applicable). 4. Slide the cover toward the front of the controller as far as it will go. and then lower the cover to seat it. Reconnect all cables. Tighten the screw on the back panel. 31 .Basic Installation To replace the cover: 1. 3. Turn the controller until the front panel is facing forward. Align the pins inside the cover with the corresponding slots on the controller. 6. 2. Unplug the power cord from the controller. Remove the blanking panel from the back of the controller. Note: AMB and AOB must be compatible: AMB Version: must have AOB Version: 1 1 2 2 3 2 1. For AOB and AMB part numbers. refer to “Part Numbers” on page 319 32 . Remove the controller cover (see page 30). then the AMB must also be replaced and the software must be upgraded to release 3. 3.0 or greater.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Install the Analog Option Board (AOB) If installing version 2 of the AOB. The AOB version 2 kit includes a new power cable. 2. Lower the AOB into place and attach it with the supplied screws (). Place the AOB on a flat surface. 6. To attach the flex cable. lift up on the tabs at the end of the connector to loosen it. 33 . insert the cable label side down. Insert the replacement faceplate into the back of the controller and attach it with screws (). and then press down on the tabs to tighten connector (). 5. Attach the flex and power cables. 7.Basic Installation 4. insert the cable. 9. and then press down to tighten (). Reconnect the power cord to the controller. 34 . Connect the other end of the flex cable and power cable where indicated in the following figure.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 8. 10. Replace the cover. The horizontal flex cable connector is hinged: flip up to loosen it. Four more can be added using a Quad DSP in Slot 3. Unplug the power cord from the controller. 35 . For information on determining DSP requirements.Basic Installation Installing optional DSP module(s) The basic SX-200 ICP CX/CXi has two DSPs built into the motherboard. Insert the DSP module in Module Slot 3. 4. 6. Remove the DSP module from its packaging. 5. Secure the Dual DSP module to the controller using the screws provided with the module. Two more can be added by installing a Dual DSP Module in Module Slot 3. Replace the cover.) 3. To install the optional DSP Module: 1. 2. Remove the top cover (see page 30. see “DSP configurations” on page 11. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Installing an optional T1/E1 Combo module The T1/E1 Combo MMC combines T1/D4 or PRI trunking and DSP functionality in a single card.) 3. 4. Insert the T1/E1 Combo Module into Module Slot 1 or 2 on the Main Board connector. 6. Follow the instructions below to install either card type. Connect from the T1 line from the service provider to the RJ45 connector on the T1/E1 Combo Module. To install a T1/E1 Combo Module: 1. It also includes a Stratum 4 clock and installs in Module Slot 1 or 2. Replace the cover. Note: Replacement T1/E1 combo cards may have two RJ45 ports. See Table on page 37 for connector pinouts. 5.The second port is not functional for the SX-200 controller. 2. Remove the cover (see page 30. Unplug the power cord from the controller. Attach the screws. 36 . Program the module in CDE. for instructions. T1/E1 Combo Module Tip/Ring Assignments NT/LT Settings Pin Signal NT (Default) LT 1 -- Rx Ring Tx Ring 2 -- Rx Tip Tx Tip 3 N/C -- -- 4 -- Tx Ring Rx Ring 5 -- Tx Tip Rx Tip 6 N/C -- -- 7 N/C -- -- 8 N/C -- -- 37 .Basic Installation 7. see page 100. For CIM Port Allocation see Appendix C on page 329. Insert the Quad CIM into Module slot 1 or 2 on the Main Board connector. The system can support up to two Quad CIM Modules installed in Module slots 1 and 2. the optional Quad CIM module has four ports. 38 .0.0. Attach the screws. Remove the top cover and the front panel. 3. ASUs could only be connected to the onboard CIMs. 2. In Release 4. the first three of which provide connectivity to ASUs using Category 5 UTP copper cabling.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Installing the optional Quad CIM Module(s) Prior to Release 4. Unplug the power cord from the controller. Replace the front panel and the top cover. 5. 4. To install a Quad CIM Module: 1. Skip this step if the system is new and has no database changes to preserve. for instructions. To install an optional system hard drive: 1. Use Mitel-supplied hard drives only. see page 185.Basic Installation Installing an optional system hard drive If your controller uses an internal 256 or 512 MB CompactFlash for software and database storage. Notes: 1. 6. Remove the cover (see page 30. those obtained elsewhere are not supported.) 39 . To replace faulty cards or drives. As a precaution. use the media replacement procedure on page 182. perform a full database backup. For instructions. power down the controller. Use this procedure to upgrade systems only. Establish a serial connection to the Maintenance port on the controller. 5. The hard drive is available as FRU from Mitel (see Appendix C on page 339 for part numbers). Use the System > Restart > Shutdown command in Maintenance to stop the system. 3. see page 70. you can increase capacity for voice mail messages and recorded calls from approximately 11 hours to over 400 hours by replacing the card with a system hard drive. 4. remove it. 2. When prompted on the PC. A hard drive is strongly recommended for systems that have more than eight voice mail ports or when Record a Call is frequently used. 2. If an external CompactFlash card is inserted in the controller. a. The cables are keyed for proper connection. Set the jumpers on the drive to the Master setting.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 7. Connect the power and IDE cables to the corresponding connectors on the hard drive and main board (). To install the hard drive. Note: Connect the system hard drive IDE cable to the main board connector labeled MPC8270 HARDDRIVE. Lower the drive onto the bracket (). Keep it on hand. d. b. Remove the internal CompactFlash card. c. 8. 40 . Secure the drive to the sides of the bracket with the four screws provided (). 15. 12. When prompted. press return four times to log in to CDE/Maintenance. 13. Restore power to the controller. Verify that the phones are working and that calls can be made. 41 . 10. 11. Insert the internal CompactFlash card previously removed into the external card slot. 14.Basic Installation 9. Re-establish a serial connection to the controller and wait while the new media is formatted and the contents of the CompactFlash card copied to it. Remove the CompactFlash card from the external slot. Replace the cover. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Installing an optional Application Processor Card The optional Application Processor Card (APC) is a CPU on a Compact PCI card. To install an optional APC: 1. Place the APC on the main board connectors. If a Stratum Clock module is installed. Remove the cover from the controller (see page 30). 2. 3. remove it. Unplug the power cord from the controller. It hosts the Managed Application Server (MAS) software. 4. 42 . The connectors are spaced irregularly to assist in alignment. You should hear and feel the connectors seating themselves. CAUTION: To ensure that the APC is seated securely.Basic Installation 5. one at a time. To seat the connectors. Repeat for the other side of the APC next to the fan. 43 . 6. Once the APC is properly installed. the four corners of the APC will rest against the standoffs located at each corner of the APC. Prepare the heat spreader for installation by removing the protective strips from the adhesive heat pads. press down on the APC over each of the four connectors. grasp the main board with your fingertips and press down firmly on the middle of one side of the APC with your thumbs as shown. 10. 44 . and lower the heat spreader onto the APC. Replace the Stratum Clock module (if removed). 8.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 7. Replace the controller cover. Log in to CDE and enable system option 83 (Internet Gateway) in Form 04. Do not over-tighten 9. Place the four screws (supplied) in the heat spreader. Reconnect the power cord to the controller. Tighten the screws in an alternating pattern until they are snug. 12. 11. Install the APC Hard Drive. Align the cutout on the heat spreader above the memory modules on the APC. 13. 1. Remove the cover from the controller (see page 30). See the manufacturer’s documentation for the required jumper settings. then you must also install the APC hard drive to support the Managed Application Server (MAS) operating system and applications. The power and IDE cables can remain connected. Note: The hard drive must be configured to operate as a Master.Basic Installation Installing an APC hard drive If you are installing the optional Application Processor Card. 5. If a System hard drive is already installed in the upper bracket position. Lower the APC hard drive into the upper bracket position. 3. Remove the screws connecting the bracket to the back of the controller. then slide the bracket forward and remove it. Secure the hard drive(s) to the bracket with the screws provided. To install an APC hard drive: Unplug the power cord from the controller. unscrew it from the bracket and move it to the lower bracket position. 2. 4. 45 . Connect the APC hard drive IDE cable to the main board connector labeled ETX HARDDRIVE. 9. Note: Connect the System hard drive IDE cable to the main board connector labeled MPC8270 HARDDRIVE. The cables are keyed for proper connection. 10. 8. Replace the controller cover. Restore power to the controller. Slide the bracket back into the chassis. 46 . To install the APC software.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 6. see page 50. 7. Connect the power and IDE cables to the corresponding connectors on the hard drive(s) and main board. then fasten the screws connecting the bracket to the back of the controller. 4. 5.Basic Installation Installing the Stratum clock 1. 3. log into Maintenance and use the System > Show > Identity command. Gently seat the Clock Module onto the Main Board. 6. Remove the top cover and front panel. To check whether the system recognizes the Stratum clock card. 47 . Attach the screws. Unplug the power cord from the controller. Replace the top cover and front panel. It should show the clock as ST3. 2. Specify the drive letter of the CompactFlash Reader/Writer. • are upgrading the system software on site • require a language other than the default English for voice mail prompts or a second language for bilingual voice mail operation • are replacing the internal CompactFlash card or installing a system hard drive on systems currently equipped with internal CompactFlash. 3. 5. 1. DO NOT partition the card and DO NOT copy files to it before proceeding with the software installation. • are re-initializing the controller Note: The “Initial” power-up and the reset in this procedure will each take 5 to 10 minutes. Note: The additional languages enable the embedded voice mail system to operate with bilingual prompts. 6.The default is English and is not selectable. see page 182.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Installing Controller Software Using an External CompactFlash Card (Optional Initial Install) The SX-200 ICP is shipped from the factory with the system software and a default database installed. 4. To install software using an external CompactFlash card: Important: Use only Mitel-supplied CompactFlash cards. Bilingual prompts is a purchasable MOSS option. 2. Select Format to format the CompactFlash card. specify FAT as the file system. For replacement instructions. Select a database. Select “Initial [CompactFlash Card] Installation”. Launch the SX-200 ICP Installation program on the supplied CD-ROM. 48 . Note: When formatting the CompactFlash card. and then click Next. Select the voice mail language(s) that you want to install. then click Next. Perform this procedure only if you. and then click Next. 8. 12. the system will detect it and attempt an upgrade or installation when it reboots. Click Finish to complete the installation. Both processes take the system out of service. IMPORTANT: Rebooting a working system with a database that has different IP addressing information than the database it is replacing will force the IP Phones to reboot. and then runs the install utility. then back up. Note: Wait until the computer completes writing to the CompactFlash card before removing it. 11. Click Next to begin installing the software on the CompactFlash card. always remove the external card once the system is up and running. Remove the CompactFlash card from the controller when the LED adjacent to the card slot turns green. When installation is complete. The phones take 10 to 15 minutes to return to service once the system is up and running. To ensure completion. Log in to CDE and enable MOSS sheet options (if any) in Form 04. the system automatically reboots. Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the system is rebooting. and then use Windows Explorer to confirm that files are present. 9. The system boots from the CompactFlash card. eject the card. Wait for the LED adjacent to the card slot to turn green before removing the card. 49 . IMPORTANT: If the card was removed and reinserted (or replaced by another card). in fact. If in doubt. DO NOT click STOP before EJECT. they have not.Basic Installation 7. Note: Some CompactFlash readers have problems with cards larger than 128M: the PC reports that all files have been copied to the card when. Insert the CompactFlash card into the slot on the front of the controller. Press the RESET button on the front of the controller or power it down. 10. re-insert it. To prevent unnecessary loss of service. Insert the MAS software CD into a portable CD-ROM drive attached to a USB connector located on the front panel of the SX-200 ICP. the Managed Application Server (MAS) software is already installed. From MTCE. (The default is installer/1000. enter a username and password to log in to the secure telnet port. refer to the Managed Application Server Installation and Administration Guide available at Mitel OnLine.168. When you purchase the APC and its hard drive. press ENTER to proceed. open a second secure telnet client and connect to port 2000 in order to access an MTCE session on the SX-200 ICP. If nothing appears (prompt or installation script) check the physical connections (APC and main board. the APC is attempting to boot from the hard drive. 50 . contact Mitel Product Support for assistance. • Enter open <controller-IP address> 2005 (For example. If LILO appears. To install MAS software: 1. open 192. 5. the APC has booted normally. and CD-ROM drive and USB port). Launch a secure telnet client to access the installation script: • Start the secure telnet client. 4.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Installing APC Software You will need this procedure only if you have to replace the Application Processor Card (APC) hard drive. For more information about MAS configuration. reboot the APC by entering SYSTEM > RE_START > RESET_APC > ENTER. Power down the SX-200 ICP. Power up the SX-200 ICP. Note: If the installation script fails to appear after pressing Enter. 2. If a boot: prompt appears.2.) • Press Enter. Follow the on-screen instructions to configure the MAS operating system.25 2005) • When prompted. 3. c. Mitel is not responsible for units damaged as a result of improper wall mounting. CAUTION: Make sure the wall material is capable of supporting the weight of the unit. then screw them into the holes on the bottom of the controller. To wall mount the controller: 1. Assemble the two supplied screws and washers. Orient the bracket over the two holes as shown below. Insert a screw into the hole on the slot on the right side of the bracket. 5. Wall mounting the controller Required parts and tools: • Wall mount bracket (supplied) • Two #10 screws and washers (supplied) • Two self-tapping screws • Drill and screwdriver(s) . 3. Insert a screw into the hole on the left side of the bracket.25" (28. Turn the controller upside down. Mount the bracket onto the plywood backer board as follows: a. d. 51 .58 cm) apart into the backer board. DO NOT mount the bracket directly onto drywall (sheetrock).and rack-mountable. Secure the backer board to the wall studs. 4. 2. Pre-drill two pilot holes spaced 11. Locate the two holes on the bottom of the Controller as shown in the figure below. b.Basic Installation Wall or Rack Mounting The SX-200 ICP controller is wall. It is recommended that you mount the supplied bracket onto a backer board of 3/4" plywood that is securely fastened to the wall studs. Attach the brackets to the rack using the supplied screws. Rack mounting the controller Use the Rack Mount Kit (Part Number: 57006640) to rack mount the controller. Slide the controller into the brackets. 2. Do not tighten the screws. CAUTION: When installing the system in an enclosed rack.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 6. Hang the controller onto the bracket as shown below. Secure the controller by tightening the screws. you MUST provide adequate ventilation to ensure that the maximum ambient temperature inside the rack does not exceed 40°C/104°F. refer to the system’s ratings label. 1. CAUTION: Ensure that a hazardous condition does not result from any uneven mechanical loading. When addressing this concern. 3. 52 . you should consider the connection of the equipment to the power supply circuit and the effect that overloading of circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring. CAUTION: When using the system in a rack. Figure 6: ASU II Front View Figure 7: ASU II Rear View 53 . Note: For this release. the Quad CIM module is used for ASU II support only (no bay functionality). There is no need to power down the controller to make the connection.Basic Installation Installing an ASU II Up to three ASU II units can be connected to the controller via Quad CIM. In Form 53 (Bay Location Assignment) - Assign a bay number to the CIM ports used to connect the ASU II to the controller. See Appendix C for Tip and Ring assignments. 3. For ONS devices. 4. 6. 4. complete the remaining CDE programming for the cards.Dial-In Trunks. Complete telephony cabling for the ASU II. See “Programming a Single Line Voice Station” on page 98. Connect power to the ASU II. 5. - Configure the card(s) in slot 1 and 2 only. 3. In Form 01 (System Configuration) - Program the bays assigned in Form 53 as node type ASU BAY. 54 . Program the ASU II in CDE. Mount the ASU II. Program LS trunk devices in CDE Form 14 . CDE Programming 1. Connect a cross-over Category 5 cable with RJ-45 connector to the CIM port on the ASU II and a free CIM port on the controller. Note: The ASU II can be located up to 30 meters (100 feet) away from the SX-200 ICP 2.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook To install an ASU II: 1.Non-Dial-In Trunks or CDE Form 15 . 2. Wait for the CIM LEDs to turn on indicating that the CIM link is synchronized. Switches for voice-only networks do not require VLAN capability. by a 24VDC adapter or 48-volt power brick (one for each phone). connect a second switch to the first to expand to 100 IP devices (the system maximum). Use VLAN-capable switches if installing the controller on a voice and data network. 55 .Basic Installation Installing an External Layer 2 Switch for Increased IP Connections (CX/CXi) To increase IP connection capacity. or by a multi-port Ethernet Inline Power Module (such as the PowerDsine 24PT Inline Power Unit). If required. connect a customer-supplied Layer 2 switch to the 10/100/1G LAN port. Figure 8: Expanded System (CXi controller shown) Powering IP phones in an expanded system The IP phones require power that can be provided by the Layer 2 switch. enable VLAN tagging on the 10/100/1G LAN port (port 17). Note: Power backup to the IP Phones. CDE programming For voice and data networks. Do the same to the second VLAN-capable switch (if using). program the switch to send and receive 802. See Appendix B for part numbers.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook All can be ordered from Mitel. they are NOT included with the system or phones. . Figure 9: Power Brick Connections for 5200 Series IP Phones Layer 2 switch programming If a VLAN-capable switch is connected to the 10/100/1G port. DO NOT plug it in to the connector (if available) designed for a PC or other Ethernet devices (Layer 2 port). the SX-200 ICP. and to treat packets with priority value 6 as highest priority. and the Ethernet switches is required to maintain service during a power failure. Subform 03 (L2 Switch) - 56 Enable VLAN tagging on port 17. • In Form 47. CAUTION: Ensure that the powered cable from the inline power adapter is installed in the proper connector on the IP Phone.1 p/Q tagged packets on the programmed Voice VLAN. (The type of phone and its MAC address is automatically registered with the controller in Form 09). To register these phones.Basic Installation Connecting the Phones and Lines IP Phones 1. Wait while the IP phone boots. enter the IP Set Registration PIN access code (default.3af-compliant devices according to the following general rules: • Up to 16 IP Phones are supported. Using the IP phone's dial pad.117) or a number previously programmed in CDE.0 will not install the 5330/5340 firmware load on systems using 256 MB CompactFlash. you need a 512 MB CompactFlash or an internal hard drive. Press Superkey (or Hold for 5201 and 5207 IP phones). 4. Note: You MUST use a default IP Phone extension number (102 . Note: Release 4. first delete the line appearances in Form 09. Flash-based systems that do not plan to use this phone can upgrade to Release 4. Power over Ethernet Guidelines for Internal Layer 2 Switch (CXi only) The CXi controller’s Layer 2 switch can provide 120 Watts of power to 802. After booting. Plug the RJ45 connectors from the IP phones into the Layer 2 switch ports on the front of the CXi controller (or the external Layer 2 switch for the CX). Note: 5215 or 5201 IP phones will fail to register on a system that has a default database because of the line appearances programmed on keys 8 and 10—keys that exist on the 5207 but not on the 5215 or 5201.” On 5201 IP phones. 3. 2. 57 .0 without hardware changes. ***) followed by the IP Phone extension number. the MW lamp is lit. To use extension numbers 198 and 199. The phone is now ready for use. first delete the devices assigned to them in Form 09. To use the full feature set of this phone with the SX-200 ICP. the display on the phone shows “USE Superkey TO SEND PIN. or follow the phone replacement procedure on the next page to delete all key programming. 7 5235 6. Power Consumption Table 5: Power Consumption 58 Device Consumption (W) 5201 2.7 5340 5. Only one PKM can be attached to a set. • Class 1.0 5212 4. • Port 1 has the highest priority.7 5224 4. Unclassified (Class 0) devices are budgeted 7. power will be turned off to the ports. and 3 devices receive 4. and 13 Watts.8 PKM 1.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook • Up to four PKMs (PKM12 or PKM48) are supported on Dual Mode IP Phones. If the power budget is exceeded. 7. • Conference units require an AC adapter. until less than 120 Watts is being consumed. respectively. port 16 the lowest. but can receive up to 13 Watts depending on need. Multiple PKMs on a set require an AC adapter. starting with port 16 and ending with port 1.5 Watts by the PoE subsystem.7 . 2.2 5330 4. the trunks connect to ONS circuits 1/13/3 and 1/13/4 on the AMB and circuits 1/13/19 and 1/13/20 on the AOB respectively. Refer to the following table for circuit assignments and default numbering for ONS phones. see “Running the Line Quality Test for LS Trunks” on page 114. ONS ports must not be used to connect to off premise phones.Basic Installation ONS/CLASS and LS/CLASS ports Connect the LS CLASS trunks and any ONS phones to the line ports on the back of the controller using standard 4-conductor cables with RJ-11 connectors. use the Line Quality Test to program the audio configuration settings. For more information. 59 . Tip and Ring correspond to pins 3 and 4 of the RJ11 connector respectively. After connecting the LS trunks. ONS ports are not designed with the necessary safety protection for off premise connections. 3. ONS/CLASS ports do not support high-voltage messagewaiting lamps. Table 6: ONS & LS Circuit Assignments Default DN/Line Number Analog Main Board PLID Default DN/Line Number ONS 1 1/13/3 200 ONS 1 1/13/19 -- ONS 2 1/13/4 201 ONS 2 1/13/20 -- ONS 3 1/13/5 202 ONS 3 1/13/21 -- ONS 4 1/13/6 203 ONS 4 1/13/22 -- LS 1 1/13/7 1 LS 1 1/13/13 LS 2 1/13/8 2 LS 2 1/13/14 LS 3 1/13/9 3 LS 3 1/13/15 LS 4 1/13/10 4 LS 4 1/13/16 LS 5 1/13/11 5 LS 5 1/13/17 LS 6 1/13/12 6 LS 6 1/13/18 Circuit Analog Option Board PLID Circuit -- Notes: 1. Trunks circuits located at 1/13/7 and 1/13/8 on the AMB and 1/13/13 and 1/13/14 on the AOB are System Fail Transfer (SFT) trunks. 2. In the event of a system or power failure. 4. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Adding a PKM The 5220 or 5224 IP Phone supports a single 5412 PKM and up to two 5448 PKMs. Note: The 5448 PKM, and 5412 PKM are the only programmable key modules approved by Mitel for connection to Mitel telephones. Requirements For all dual mode phones, the PKM must be Rev B7 or higher. The host phone requires a 5422 PKM Interface Module and a power source. The internal Layer 2 switch on the CXi can supply power for up to 16 phones and four PKMs (for details, see “” on page 57). If more PKMs are installed, other power sources (such as 24-volt adapters) are required. For CX requirements, refer to the external Layer 2 Switch manufacturer’s documentation. PKMs and power adapters can be ordered from Mitel. See Appendix B for part numbers. CDE programming Associate the PKM with the attached phone in Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments. Installation See the installation instructions included with the PKMs or on the Mitel Edocs website. 60 Basic Installation Connecting Music on Hold, Paging and Door Phone/Door Opener Music on Hold (MOH) interface The mini (1/8" - 3.5 mm) stereo jack on the back panel of the SX-200 ICP controller provides an interface to an external music source (radio, CD player, etc.) for Music on Hold. Input signals must be in the range of 10 to 100 mVrms. Any DC voltage applied to the input must be less than 50 VDC. Note: Powering down the SX-200 ICP redirects the MOH source to the paging output. To stop the music from being heard over the pager, power down both the MOH source and paging amplifier before powering down the SX-200 ICP. CDE Programming MOH requires no CDE programming in the default database. If a different database is used, assign Music-on-Hold to PLID N/13/29/1 where N is the IP Bay number (default 1) in Form 18. Paging The controller provides a dedicated paging circuit for the connection of customer-provided paging equipment. A second circuit is provided on the Analog Option Board. The paging equipment connects to the Page connectors on the back of the controller. See Table 7 on page 62 for connector pinouts. 61 SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 7: MOH, Pager, Generic Relay Pinouts Port Bay/Slot/Circuit Pins Signal Music on Hold 1/13/29/1 N/A mini stereo jack (1/8" - 3.5 mm) Pager Relay 1 (AMB) 1/13/30/2 Pager Relay 2 (AOB) 1/13/31/2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Normally Closed Common Ring Tip Normally Open Generic Relay 1 (AMB) Generic Relay 2 1/13/30/3 1/13/30/4 Generic Relay 1 (AOB) Generic Relay 2 1/13/31/3 1/13/31/4 1 2 3 4 5 6 Relay 2 Normally Closed Relay 2 Common Relay 1 Common Relay 1 Normally Open Relay 2 Normally Open Relay 1 Normally Closed CDE Programming The default database has programming for single zone (Zone 1) paging, which any station can access by dialing *12. No additional programming is required. If using a different database, complete the following programming: 1. In Form 18 (Miscellaneous System Ports), program a paging device. 2. Enable COS Option 303 (Paging Zone 1 Access) in the Class of Service of each extension that requires access to the paging equipment. 62 Basic Installation Door Phone/Door Opener Customer-provided door phone units (up to four) can be connected to ONS ports to provide two-way communication between an entryway and designated extensions. Door entry is controlled by the general-use relays in the controller—two on the AMB and two on the AOB. Each relay connects to an electric lock that is operated by key presses at the designated extension(s). See Table 7, “MOH, Pager, Generic Relay Pinouts,” on page 62 for connector pinouts. The relay contacts are rated at 90mA @60 Vac or Vdc peak and are normally open. CDE Programming 1. In Form 18, assign an extension number to a Door Relay. 2. In Form 09, enter the Door Relay extension number from Form 18 into the ASSOC field of the ONS door phone. Assign the door phone a Name (e.g., Door Phone) to identify it on the door answerer’s display. 3. In Form 19, assign the door phone to its own tenant group and program Station Dial 0 Routing to direct calls from the door phone to an answering position. 4. (Optional) Program an Open Door feature key to the door answering phones. 5. Set COS Option 115 in the door phone’s COS to ring the door answerer the required length of time (default - 30 seconds). 63 SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Connecting a Night Bell and Alarm Device Night bells and devices such as lamps used to signal Critical alarms connect to the general-use relays via connectors on the back of the controller. See Table 7 on page 62 for connector pinouts. The night bell and alarm device each require an independent power supply. The contacts are rated at 90mA @60 Vac or Vdc peak. Connection of the bell or alarm device must be through an auxiliary relay if the total current requirement exceeds the relay contact ratings. All equipment (bell, power supply, etc.) are customer-supplied. CDE programming for a Night Bell The default database contains the required CDE programming for Night Bell operation If using a different database, complete the following programming: 1. In Form 18 (Miscellaneous System Ports), assign an extension number to the night bell extension (default 340) at bay/slot/circuit/ subcircuit 01/13/29/01. 2. In Form 14 (Non-Dial in Trunks), assign the night bell extension as night answer point. 3. In Form 17 (Hunt Groups), assign the night bell as a member of a ring group, if desired. CDE programming for an Alarm Device • 64 In Form 18 (Miscellaneous System Ports), assign Major Alarm to bay/slot/circuit/subcircuit 1/13/29/2. Basic Installation Setting up an FTP Server on a Maintenance PC An FTP server is required to back up all configuration data and voice mail messages in the controller. The server is also used to download new software to the controller through its built-in FTP client and to upload Maintenance logs. Any FTP server application designed for the Windows environment will work. Windows 2000 and XP have one built into them. Others can be downloaded for free from the Internet. Server setup varies by vendor; the basic steps are provided below. For specific instructions, see the vendor’s documentation. The PC hosting the FTP server must connect to the controller through a TCP/IP (LAN) connection. Connecting through the serial Maintenance port on the controller will not work. CDE Programming • In Form 04, System Options/System Timers - • Enable Option 109, Remote Software Download. In Form 47, System IP, Subform 01 - Enter the IP address of the FTP server and the user name and password from Step 2 of the FTP server setup procedure. For information on upgrading the controller software via FTP, see page 188. For information on backing up and restoring the controller database via FTP, see page 185. Note: If future attempts to connect to the FTP server fail, check the IP address of the PC to see if it has changed. Follow the steps above to reprogram the system with the new address. FTP Server Setup 1. Create a directory (or directories) on the PC to hold the files you will transfer to and from the controller—example, C:\FTPdir\backups C:\FTPdir\software C:\FTPdir\logs Note: Ensure that the folders are writable. 65 SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 2. In the server application, - Create a User for password-protected logins or allow Anonymous (no password required) logins. The default database is programmed to allow Anonymous logins. The default user name is FTP. - Set up the paths to the directories you created in step 1. - Enable read/write access to directories. 3. If required, restart the server. Note: To verify that the FTP Server works, log into it from the PC. Go to the CMD prompt (DOS) and enter ftp < IP Address of the FTP Server >. Look for the message “Anonymous user logged in” or a prompt to enter a user name. System Health Check Complete the following procedure to verify that the system is working properly. 1. Press Superkey followed by the prime line/intercom key (bottom key, or bottom-right key when the phone has two rows of personal keys). The extension number appears in the phone display. Record the extension numbers. 2. Verify that you can make calls between the IP phones. 3. If an analog phone is connected to an ONS port (extensions 201 to 203) on the controller, verify that you can call it from an IP phone. 4. Place a call into the system and verify that the call rings all IP phones as they should with the default key system configuration. 5. Verify that you can place an external call from the IP phones. Note: If you are not using the default database, you must program ARS to access an outside line. 6. If you cannot perform all of the above tasks, check your cable connections. If the problem persists, see Basic Troubleshooting and Repair (p. 211). 7. Proceed to Chapter 3, Basic Programming. 66 Chapter 3 Basic Programming SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 68 Basic Programming Programming Overview This chapter provides the key procedures to follow when programming the system. Refer to the SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation for comprehensive and detailed programming information. The key steps to programming the system are Prepare to enter customer data Enable your purchased MOSS options Program the features for each phone Program embedded voice mail Program Phonebook Program analog trunks Run the Line Quality test Optional programming Program a printer port Program single line / multi-line sets Program the PMS Interface Program Call Forwarding - External 69 SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Preparing to Enter Customer Data You can use a desktop or laptop computer to program the controller on-site or from a remote location. PC Requirements • Windows 98, NT, 2000 Professional, ME or XP • for serial connections, a VT100™ emulator such as HyperTerminal™ • for remote or LAN-based connections, a secure Telnet client that supports SSL/TLS (Mitel Telnet client version 1.0.0.1 or later recommended), or a web browser (Internet Explorer 6 or Mozilla Firefox) to access the SX-200 ICP Web Interface • a Network Interface Card (NIC) The PC can connect to the controller via a serial connection to the Maintenance port or via a secure Telnet connection to port 2000. Serial Connection to the Controller 1. Connect an RS-232 straight DTE serial cable between the controller's Maintenance port and the PC's serial port. 2. Program the PC's serial port (from the communication program) with the following settings: Baud Rate: 9600 or 19200 Stop Bits: 1 Data Bits: 8 Flow Control: None Parity: None 3. Verify the connection as follows: In the VT100 emulator or other communications program, press RETURN several times. While the maintenance session is active, do not disconnect the serial cable or attempt to open another maintenance session with a Telnet connection. Doing so will cause an error message stating that CDE is currently in use. 70 Basic Programming Secure Telnet Connection to the Controller Telnet is a terminal emulation program for TCP/IP networks such as the Internet. To enable a Telnet connection between a PC and the controller, the PC must be equipped with a secure Telnet client that supports SSL/TLS. The Mitel Telnet client is recommended. With the controller connected to the LAN and the PC connected to the LAN or Internet: 1. Install and then launch the secure Telnet client. 2. Enter the hostname or IP address of the controller, and port 2000. For example, to open a connection with the Mitel Telnet client, enter: open 192.168.1.2 2000 The IP address in the example is the default; use Form 47 to check or change it. 3. Log in to SSL/TLS with login name ‘installer’ and default password ‘1000.’ 4. Select a Terminal Type. 5. Select an Application. 6. Log in to the application with username ‘installer; maint1; maint2; supervisor; or attendant’ and default password ‘1000.’ While the maintenance session is active, do not disconnect the Ethernet cable or attempt to open another maintenance session with a serial connection. Doing so will cause an error message stating that CDE is currently in use. 71 SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Web Interface Connection to the Controller A web browser can be used to connect to the SX-200 ICP from the LAN and manage the system using the embedded SX-200 ICP Web Interface. Before using the SX-200 ICP Web Interface, configure the management PC as follows: • disable your web browser's pop-up blocker software • install Sun Java plugin version 1.5 or later With the controller connected to the LAN and the PC connected to the LAN or Internet: 1. Launch the web browser (IE 6.x or Mozilla Firefox). 2. Enter http://<controller IP or hostname> For example, http://192.168.1.2 The IP address in the example is the default; use Form 47 to check or change it. 3. Log in to the SX-200 ICP Web Interface with login name ‘installer’ and default password ‘1000.’ A CDE session will open. While the session is active, do not disconnect the Ethernet cable or attempt to open another maintenance session with a serial connection. Doing so will cause an error message stating that CDE is currently in use. 72 Basic Programming Port Usage If the SX-200 ICP is operating behind a firewall. you may need to open the following ports. Table 8: Port Usage for IP Trunks Function Transport Port AMC Communications TCP 22 DNS UDP 53 DHCP Server UDP 67 DHCP Client UDP 68 TFTP UDP 69 HTTP TCP 80 HTTPS TCP 443 IP trunk signalling TCP 1066 Secure IP trunk signalling TCP 1067 Telnet to CDE/MTCE TCP 2000 Telnet to 6000 MAS TCP 2005 IMAT TCP 6543 MiNet Server TCP 6800 VM CMPS Server TCP 6830 MiNet Client TCP 6900 MiTAI™ TCP 8000 MiTAI (SSL) TCP 8001 Phone Rx B1 UDP 9000 Phone Rx B2 UDP 9002 E2T IP UDP 50000 to 50127 User Defined (Hotel PMS/Call Log) TCP 61320 to 61328 73 . Conflicts are resolved by entering the correct password. a system reset is not required. Enter the Mitel Options password to activate the purchased options. Select Confirm if prompted to reset the controller. To enable MOSS options: 1. go into Maintenance and revise Alarm Thresholds to prevent unnecessary alarms. 74 . After the system resets. such as additional voice mailboxes or additional IP set licenses.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Enabling MOSS Options MOSS options provide additional functionality or capacity to the system. Program any other required options. 6. Attempts to enable unpurchased options causes the system to respond with PASSWORD/OPTIONS CONFLICT -."ENTER" TO RE-EDIT. Enabling the options using the above procedure clears the alarm. 2. . The password must be the password that is printed on the MOSS sheet. The system warns if changing an option requires a reset. Notes: 1. A MOSS alarm message in the CDE forms header indicates that the System ID and Password do not match the database (occurs when a database from another system is installed in the controller). If this is a new system and you have purchased options. 5. 3. 3. Press ENTER MOC and enter the Mitel Options Code printed on the MOSS Sheet that is included with the system software package. 4. you must enable them. The reset is automatic and occurs when the change is confirmed."QUIT" TO EXIT -. Select Form 04. 2. If you require a four-digit plan.Basic Programming System Options to Avoid Certain options in Form 04 could cause unexpected behaviors in system operation if changed from their factory-set (default) values. The default database configures the system to operate as a square key system with six trunk appearances per phone. 9 (90 ms) 71 Slot 10 FIM Capacity (2 or 3 Bays) 2 Programming the Customer Data Entry (CDE) Forms The CDE Forms are factory-set with default values that make programming the system faster and easier. 17. see “Installing an alternate database” on page 187.. Table 9: System Options to Avoid Option # Option Name Default 60 Tone Plan NA 68 SX-200 ICP DSP DTMF Receiver Channels (0. or modem) and place extension-to-extension calls without doing any programming. but will have to program ARS to make external calls from ONS devices. 9 (90 ms) 70 DTMF OFF Timer (5-15 in 10 ms increments).. either reprogram Forms 9. You will also be able to receive fax and modem calls. and 50 or install the four-digit database available on Mitel Online. Note: The default numbering plan uses three-digit extension numbers. The defaults allow you to install the system and connect up to 16 IP phones (CXi) plus two analog terminals (phone. fax. For more information.7) 7 69 DTMF ON Timer (5-15 in 10 ms increments). 75 . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Programming Features for each Phone Before you begin • Ensure that the phone-related MOSS options are specified in CDE Form 04. System Options. The table below shows the codes to enter when programming features that are not selectable via SUPERKEY. Appendix C has a list of the features and the phones that support them. The figures on page 78 show the key numbers required for programming features via CDE. Table 10: Feature Codes Code Feature Key Code Feature 00 Speedcall (See Note) 14 Night Answer 01 Forward All 15 Forward Call 02 Account Code 18 Release 03 Do Not Disturb 19 Single Flash 04 Auto Answer 20 Double Flash 05 Music 21 Headset Mode 06 Direct Page 22 Handset Mute 07 PA Paging 23 Call Park 08 Pickup 24 System Park 09 Campon (I Will Wait) 25 Forward Always 10 Callback 26 Forward Busy 11 Swap (Trade Calls) 27 Forward No Answer (Page 1 of 2) 76 . • Enable COS options for features that are COS dependent. To program features for IP phones: • Program the appropriate features for each phone either from the phones (using Superkey or Settings key) or in the Expand Set Subform for Form 09. enter the Program Feature Key access code. Note: After dialing 00. • Press a programmable key. dial the number to be stored. (Page 2 of 2) 77 . • Enter the feature code listed above. • Press SPEAKER or CANCEL.Basic Programming Table 10: Feature Codes (continued) Code Feature Key 12 Privacy Release 13 Override (Intrude) Code 28 Feature Forward Busy/No Answer To program features using Feature codes: • Using the phone dialpad. The programmable keys on 5207 (not shown) and 5220 IP Phones are numbered as follows 78 .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook The programmable keys on 5215 IP Phones are numbered as follows: Note: Key 1 is reserved for the phone’s prime directory number. Basic Programming The programmable keys on 5212 and 5330 (not shown) IP Phones are numbered as follows 79 . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook The programmable keys on 5224 and 5340 (not shown) IP Phones are numbered as follows The keys on the 5448 PKM are numbered as follows: 80 . Basic Programming The keys on the 5412 PKM are numbered as follows: 81 . 22 (included in SX-200 ICP Releases 2.0 and 2.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Programming Embedded Voice Mail Note: Embedded voice mail Release 6. 82 .1) supports notification on every new message regardless of whether or not notification for previous messages has already been answered. which the system deletes after 15 days. The defaults are as follows: • Voice Mail mailboxes are assigned with the same extension numbers as the first 20 IP phones (extension 100 to 119) • Hunt Group for Voice Mail ports with pilot number 300 - COS 6 and - extension 301 to 316 for voice mail ports • System-wide Call Forward No Answer to voice mail. Voice mail programming that is NOT provided in the default database includes: • Auto Attendant Setup (including greetings) • Bilingual Prompting • Mailbox Greetings and Names • Distribution Lists • RAD Setup • Record a Call • PMS Integration • Unified Messaging (Voice mail forwarding to e-mail) Note: The default password for mailboxes is 1111. CDE Programming for Embedded Voice Mail The default database includes most of the programming required for a fully operational voice mail system. for internal and external calls • Maximum number of saved messages per mailbox is 10. This feature is normally deactivated by default and may only be enabled or disabled by accessing the Administrator's mailbox. Voice Mail Forms Use the following CDE forms to complete the voice mail programming: Table 11: Voice Mail Options Form 49 Options Used to set the following system-wide parameters: • Default Prompt Language • Alternate Prompt Language and Language Change Number (for bilingual operation) • Fax Destination Number • Message Notification • Digital Pager Callback Number • Auto Attendant Transfer to Any Extension • Auto Attendant Transfer Restrictions • Directory Voice Prompt for First/Last Name • Generate Account Codes in SMDR (for Message Notification Calls • Personal Contact Numbers • Synchronize Business Open/Closed Greetings with System Day/Night mode • Business Hours • Length of Mailbox numbers • Length of passcodes • PMS Protocol (for PMS integration) • RAD Greeting Setup • SMTP/IMAP Server Addresses (required for Unified Messaging) (Page 1 of 2) 83 .Basic Programming See “CDE Programming for Embedded Voice Mail” in the Technical Reference for programming requirements when not using the default database. time. date. information-only. If System Options 107 (Lodging). Form 50 is used to customize mailbox following initial setup.standard) • Routing for Multi-Level Auto Attendant and Personal Contacts • Operation Extension • Language • Play Message Envelope? (priority. transfer-only. 51 Used to set up distribution lists of system-wide use. (Page 2 of 2) 84 . record a name for identification purposes. Note: For each list created. guest.) • Message Notification • Forward of Voice Mail to E-mail using SMTP or IMAP (Unified Messaging . the mailboxes created will be GUEST instead of EXTENSION type mailboxes. etc.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 11: Voice Mail Options (continued) Form 50 Options Used to add and delete mailboxes and to customize the following mailbox settings: • Mailbox type (extension. 108 (Property Management System) or 124 (Voice Mail Property Management System) are enabled. and caller ID) • Maximum Message Storage • Delete Saved Messages • Set Password • Personal Contacts and Menus (for Multi-Level Auto Attendant Note: Mailbox creation and setup can be done automatically for each new extension added in Form 09 by enabling Option 277 in the extension's Class of Service (Form 03). the third last port and so on. • determine how the customer intends to use the RADs. to administer the voice mail system by telephone. • map the expected call flow to determine how many messages are required and the order of play. the second last port will be attempted and if that port is busy. • verify that sufficient voice mail ports and DSP resources are available. at least one non-RAD port is required to record RAD greetings. It is recommended that at least two or three ports be left free for message notification dependant upon system usage. and for message notification by pager. - Press 1 to record a greeting.) - Press 8 to select the RAD Greetings menu. Embedded voice mail will attempt to use the last programmed voice mail port that is available for message notification. When configuring voice mail ports. - Select RAD greeting number to record (1. Record RAD greetings - Access the System Administrator's mailbox (see Using the Administrator’s Mailbox. page 88. Form 04. Embedded voice mail will continue in this fashion until it finds a free port but message notification will not function properly on a port assigned to RAD. see DSP configurations. 2. • script the messages and say them several times to ascertain how much time they take. However.Basic Programming Setting up RADs Before you begin. 85 . If the last port is not available. To program RADs: 1.200). System Options/System Timers - Enable System Option 134. ensure that some of the last ports are not configured as RAD ports to avoid any potential conflicts with message notification. Recorded Announcement Devices. Note: All embedded voice mail ports can operate as dedicated RAD ports. page 11. The port remains unavailable until DND is disabled. - Set the RAD Greeting set (number 10-39) as programmed in form 49. Note: Verify that disconnect supervision is provided by the CO. . Note: Leave fields for unneeded greetings blank. - Set each RAD hunt group type to RECORDING. 6. Leave the hunting method set to CIRCULAR. the port is placed into DND state making it unavailable to answer calls. speaking clearly into a handset (do not use a handsfree or speaker phone). RAD Setup subform - Assign greeting sets to the RAD ports and specify how often the sets play.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook If the selected RAD greeting already exists. 3. you will hear it along with prompts to accept. COS Define. the Recording Failure to Hangup Timer starts. COS Define - 86 Put RAD ports in a COS of their own. Recording Hunt Group Options subform of Form 17 - Give the RAD hunt group a name — for example. - Set the Message Length timer to the duration of the RAD greeting set (Greeting 1 + Greeting 2 + Greeting 3. Note: When the Message Length timer expires. - Record the greeting. Form 17. review or re-record it. - Follow the voice prompts to record each additional greeting set. 5.. Greeting 1. Form 49 (Voice Mail Options). 4.) multiplied by the amount of times the set repeats plus three seconds. If the RAD port is still off-hook when this timer expires. with only COS option 223 (Flash Disable) enabled. The Recording Failure to Hangup Timer is Option 404 in Form 03. Form 03. Hunt Groups - Select unused voice mail ports and assign them to their own hunt group.. Attendant Tone Signalling Not required Not required Option 229. none would be available for voice mail. Record a Call: Save Recording on Hang up Not required Optional 4. otherwise. default code *41) if sharing Record a Call ports with voice mail messages. 87 . Record a Call: Start Recording Automatically Not required Optional Option 270. 3. Call Rerouting Table - Enter the voice mail hunt group as the Record a Call Voice mail Destination For This Tenant. Hunt Groups - (Optional) Assign voice mail ports for exclusive use by Record a Call to their own hunt group. Form 03. Set the group type to STN/SET. Form 19. COS Options - Set the following COS options COS Option COS of Voice Mail Ports used for RAC COS of Phones using RAC Option 119. 6. Note: The number entered must be less than the number of available voice mail ports. - In the Recording Hunt Group Options subform. Option 87. 2. Form 04. Form 17. Voice Mail Port Enable Not required Option 268. Form 02. Program a feature key for Record a Call on phones that require it. Note: Dedicating voice mail ports to Record a Call is NOT advisable for basic systems that have only four such ports. Feature Access Codes: - Choose an access code for Send Message (feature number 41. Record a Call in Voice mail Enable Enable Option 269. 5.Basic Programming Setting up Record a Call 1. enter the maximum number of ports allowed for Record a Call use. System Options - Enable Record a Call. (Note that users are still prompted to begin a new installation when they enter the Manager Passcode. mailbox management. Default passcodes are as follows: Passcode Length Passcode Type 3 4 5 6 Administrator 864 8642 86420 864200 Manager 648 6483 64830 648300 Important: The Manager passcode should be given to the person who performs the day-to-day task.) To protect system security. such as adding mailboxes and changing greetings. however. • Administrator Passcode: Allows the user to perform all the manager functions plus changing the Administrator passcode and passcode length. it is convenient for certain functions such as adding mailboxes and editing mailbox settings. Programming by phone cannot completely replace CDE programming. but get the response “Invalid Selection” when they attempt to do so. and defaulting the voice mail database. The Manager passcode provides limited access to the database. 88 . thereby reducing the likelihood of novice users causing serious disruptions to the system. change the passcodes at first login and keep them confidential. The passcode used to log into the Administrator's Mailbox determines which functions can be accessed: • Manager Passcode: Allows the user to perform all the system administration. and maintenance functions except changing the Administrator passcode or passcode length.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 7. Using the Administrator’s Mailbox The Administrator's Mailbox allows you to do some voice mail programming using a telephone. Mailboxes - Program a mailbox for each extension that requires use of Record a Call. Form 50. ) 6. Note: To prevent confusion between dialing a mailbox that starts with 9 and dialing 9 for the Directory. Follow the voice prompts for instructions. enter the system administrator mailbox number: default 999 (or 9999 in four-digit systems). 89 . If no other digits are entered during these four seconds. 3.Basic Programming Accessing the Administrator's Mailbox Follow these steps to log in to the administrator's mailbox. Press * when you hear the greeting. From any internal DTMF telephone. 1. 2. When prompted for a passcode enter the Administrator's passcode or the Manager's passcode. lift the handset and obtain dial tone. The system answers and plays the usual greeting. the user is transferred to the Directory. an inter-digit timer of 4 seconds is started when the first digit entered is 9. use the menu map on the following page for reference. You are now logged in to the system administrator's mailbox. Dial the voice mail hunt group number (default is 300). (See above for defaults. When prompted for a mailbox number. 5. 4. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Figure 10: Administrator Mailbox Menu 90 . enter the Technician's passcode (default is 9731).Basic Programming Voice Mail Notification On Every New Message To activate voice mail notification on every new message (which can only be performed using the telephone user interface): 1. 91 . enter the Technician's passcode (default is 9731) instead of using either the Administrator’s passcode or the Manager's passcode. 4. Enter 20301 to enable notification on every new message. Access the System Administrator's mailbox. 2. 3. 3. Press 9. When prompted for a passcode. Enter 20302 to disable notification on every new message. To deactivate voice mail notification on every new message (the default setting): 1. 4. Access the System Administrator's mailbox. Press 9. 2. When prompted for a passcode. 10. press 0 and verify that the system transfers the call to the “dial 0” destination programmed in Form 19. Note: Once a message has been deleted. Verify the number of rings allowed before the system answers. press *0 and verify that the system transfers the call to the “dial 0” destination. Call the business using an outside line. Call the business using an outside line or cell phone. Call to several extensions directly (not through auto attendant) to verify that the calls are forwarded to the correct mailbox. 8. 6. When the system answers. 4. Leave a message at an extension to verify that the messaging waiting indicator (light) comes on. (Optional) Leave a message at an extension and verify that the message is forwarded to the user's e-mail account. (Optional) Call the voice mail hunt group from a fax terminal and verify that the Auto Attendant answers and transfers the call to the fax extension. Call the business using several outside lines. Verify that you hear the company open or closed greeting (as appropriate) and that the message is clear and understandable. When the auto attendant answers. 2. Call the voice mail hunt group using an internal line. 9. Verify the number of rings allowed before answer. Verify that you do not hear the company greeting. it cannot be recovered. Verify that you do not hear the company greeting. 3. (Optional) Call an extension that has message notification enabled and verify that it is working correctly. 7. Note: ONS/CLASS lines do not support high-voltage message-waiting lamps.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Testing Voice Mail Operation Perform the following tests to verify that voice mail is working properly. 92 . 5. Call the voice mail hunt group using an internal line. 1. System Options/System Timers - Enable System Option 128. if the option is set to LAST NAME. Only mailboxes with names are listed in the Phonebook. Phonebook. 6. 4. Mailboxes - Enter a NAME for each mailbox owner. 3. you may want Phonebook searching by last name. Call Rerouting Table - Program the voice mail hunt group number to the “Phonebook Number For This Tenant” field. 93 . In this case. Note: Phonebook and Speak@Ease (Option 85) cannot both be enabled. Note: The option must be purchased (listed on MOSS sheet).Basic Programming Programming Phonebook 1. (Optional) Form 02. *65) 5. Feature Access Codes - Enter the access code for Feature 65 to allow single line phones to access the Phonebook. you may want to enter the name in Form 9 as first name. Note: Phonebook searches will only work if the first and last name entered in Form 50 are in the order specified by the Directory Voice Prompt option in Form 49. Form 50. Form 49. Form 04. set “Directory Voice Prompt” in Form 49 to LAST NAME. enter “Tom Jones” as the device name in Form 09 Tom Jones. 2. For example. However. Form 09. then the name “Tom Jones” should be entered as Jones Tom in Form 50. All types of phones can also use the access code. last name (Tom Jones) because it looks better on the called party's display. and then name the mailbox in Form 50 “Jones Tom. Voice mail Options - Set the Directory Voice Prompt option to search the Phonebook by first or last name. (Default. And at the same time.” Only one space is permitted between the first and last name. Desktop Device Assignments - Program a Phonebook feature key on phones that do not have softkeys. Form 19. 3. Extension number. COR. Form 34. Form 12. 2. follow the procedure below to program a printer port. 1. If you are using a different database. COS. . Directed I/O - 94 Define the printout type to output. Data Descriptor - Define a circuit descriptor to match the characteristics of the device type.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Programming a Printer Port Data for the functions listed below can be output through an IP socket in the controller to a telnet-enabled application for printing. Form 11. The default circuit descriptor number 1 works for most applications. Table 12: • SMDR • ACD Real Time Events • CDE Data Print • ACD Agent Summary • Maintenance Logs • ACD Group Summary • Traffic Measurement • Hotel/Motel Audit • IP Traffic Measurement • Hotel/Motel Wakeup • PMS • Hotel/Motel DID Audit The default database sends SMDR and CDE Data Print output to IP socket 61328. and circuit descriptor number. Data Assignment - - Program a SOCKET type data device to an available PLID in the following range: PLID Port PLID Port 1/13/20 1/13/21 1/13/22 1/13/23 1/13/24 61320 61321 61322 61323 61324 1/13/25 1/13/26 1/13/27 1/13/28 61325 61326 61327 61328 Assign a Tenant. Press Auto Program. The system prompts for an extension number to assign to the first auto-programmed extension. 100. where - B is the Bay number (1-8) - S is the slot number (1-8) - CC is the cct number (01-12). Enter a starting extension number. 4. 95 . The number is incremented by one for each subsequent extension—for example. 2. Access Form 09. Conflicts with existing extension numbers result in an error message and a prompt to press the CONTINUE or ABORT softkey. Desktop Device Assignments.Basic Programming Programming Stations/Sets Automatically The AUTO PROGRAM function in Form 09. 101. Circuit address format “BSCC”. Auto-programming will not proceed to the next BAY/SLT/CCT until a valid extension number has been found for the current position. Connect the sets. 102. The system prompts for a starting extension number. checks for unprogrammed circuits in the system and programs them as follows: • Extension numbers are automatically assigned according to a Bay. 3. Slot. Desktop Device Assignments. • • Other parameters assigned to ONS devices: - COS = 2 - COR = 1 - Tenant = 1 Other parameters assigned to IP sets: - COS = 1 - COR = 4 - Tenant = 1 To automatically program all connected sets 1. If a circuit cannot be programmed because an extension number has already been assigned to that circuit.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Note: The maximum length of extension numbers is five. 96 . a warning is displayed. It is recommended that the length be equal to the “Length of Mailbox Numbers” in Form 49. The system displays all of the devices that have been programmed. the system automatically programs all unprogrammed circuits. Press ABORT to cancel the procedure or press CONTINUE to skip the device and resume programming the other devices in the range. After verifying that the unprogrammed sets are physically connected. to take advantage of automatic mailbox creation. The system prompts you to choose whether or not you want to receive warnings as devices are deleted. press CANCEL. Enter valid Bay.. deletes a device and all of its dependent resources including • All line keys that are programmed on a deleted set or PKM module • All line and feature keys that are programmed on PKM modules • The associated PKM modules • Any other line appearances and BLFs of the deleted set. Press CANCEL to abort. To proceed with the deletion of the range of devices and all dependent resources. The system prompts you once again to confirm the deletion of the range. Enter valid Bay. 3. 6. press CONFIRM. Any devices that were deleted prior to pressing the ABORT key will remain deleted. 4.Basic Programming Deleting a Device and All Dependent Resources The DELETE softkey in Form 09 (Desktop Device Assignments). 2. Press CANCEL to abort the deletion of the specific device and continue with the next device. To abort. press CONFRIM. the system displays “deleting all keys. If you chose to receive warnings each time a device is deleted.. Slot and Circuit numbers for the first device and press the ENTER softkey.“ for each device in the range. allows block deletion of devices and all dependent resources. To receive a warning prior to deleting each device and its dependent resources. To abort the deletion of a range of devices at any time during the procedure. Slot and Circuit numbers for the last device and press the ENTER softkey. To delete all devices and dependent resources without warning. press CONFIRM. To proceed. press ABORT. press YES. 97 . 5. A warning message appears if any of the above exists. To delete a range of devices and all dependent resources: 1. Deleting a range of devices and dependent resources The RANGE DELETE softkey in Form 09 (Desktop Device Assignments). Press RANGE DELETE. press NO. To continue. - Each tenant requires its own Call Rerouting Table. COR. 5. ARS: COR Group Definition - Create a COR group that includes the COR number which you will assign to the station. Form 09. COS. Form 19. - This COR group restricts the external calls dialed from the station. Form 20. Form 03. 7. 2. Form 01. 98 . Form 30. Device Interconnection Table (optional) - Set the required interconnect restrictions (for example. to restrict connections between specific device types). See Table 6 on page 59 for circuits locations. If you are starting with a blank database. follow the steps below to program a single line voice station: 1. Tenant Interconnection Table (optional) - Set the required interconnect restrictions (for example. 6. Form 05. System Configuration - Program an ONS line card. The Analog Option Board adds four more. and name (optional) for each bay/slot/circuit (set type remains STATION). Ensure that the system is provisioned with a sufficient number of DSP/DTMF receivers. COS Define (optional) - Create a unique class of service (COS) if required. Desktop Device Assignments - Assign an extension number. Call Rerouting Table (optional) - Program the action that the system will take to handle the caller’s call violations. to restrict connections between specific tenants).SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Programming a Single Line Voice Station The default database for a basic system has programming for four ONS/CLASS circuits. 3. 4. extension number. 2. Call Rerouting Table (optional) - Program the action that the system will take to handle the caller’s call violations. to restrict connections between specific tenants). Form 09. Form 05. Form 03. 7. Form 01. 3. System Configuration - Program a line cards if not already programmed. follow the steps below to program a multi-line set: 1. - Each tenant requires its own Call Rerouting Table. If you are starting with a blank database. Device Interconnection Table (optional) - Set the required interconnect restrictions (for example. ARS: COR Group Definition - Create a COR group that includes the COR number which you will assign to the station. COR. 5. to restrict connections between specific device types). and name (optional) for each bay/slot/circuit. COS. See page 281 for circuits locations. Tenant Interconnection Table (optional) - Set the required interconnect restrictions (for example. Form 19. or use an existing COS. - This COR group restricts the external calls that the station user can dial. - Complete the Expand Set subform for key types and options. Desktop Device Assignments - Assign set type.Basic Programming Programming a Multi-Line Set The default database for a basic SX-200 ICP CX/CXi has programming for sixteen multi-line IP phones. extension numbers and other defaults. or use an existing COR. Form 20. 4. Form 30. COS Define (optional) - Create a unique class of service (COS) if required. 6. 99 . Note: A trunk must be programmed in form 14 or 15 before it the will show as installed in Form 1. Bay Location Assignment - Assign the module a bay number. and/or 15. 10. Forms 22. Limited Wait for Dial Tone. Limited Wait for Dial Tone. Form 53. Form 03.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Programming a T1/E1 Trunk 1. 7. - Specify options for specific trunk circuits. Trunk Circuit Descriptors - Specify options for the T1 trunk types. System Configuration - Program a T1 Trunk Card in Slot 2 (MMC 1) or 6 (MMC 2). COS Define - Enable COS Option 802. Form 13. and Option 96. 23 and 26 - Complete the ARS programming required to access the T1 trunks. T1 Link Assignment - Select a T1 link descriptor for the T1 link. 6. T1 Link Descriptors - Specify options for the T1 link descriptors. 9. 11. System Options and Timers - Program Option 48. Trunk Groups - 100 Put the trunks in a trunk group. 2. Non-dial-in Trunks. Form 01. 8. Form 44. 3. Dial-in Trunks. Form 16. 5. . Form 43. Forms 14. Number of Links (0-8). CO’s are the first choice for a sync source. Network Sync - Enter the links according to their Bay/Slot/Circuit in the order that you want them to be used as the network sync source. 4. Form 04. Typically. Form 42. Extended Record 701 – No Dial Tone 702 – SMDR .Overwrite Buffer. Note: COS Level 7 in the default database has all COS options required by ISDN trunks enabled except for Option 246 (SMDR . Form 1. Note: Reset the system after updating Form 53. - Enable the following COS options for the ISDN Trunks: 246 – SMDR. (Required if option 806 SMDRRecord Incoming Calls enabled) 801 – Incoming Trunk Call Rotary 802 – Limited Wait for Dial Tone 811 – ANI/DNIS Trunk 814 – SMDR . System Configuration - Program the trunk card as T1 ISDN for the slots specified in the following table.Extended Record).Basic Programming Programming a PRI Trunk 1. 2. Class of Service (COS) - Create a separate COS for ISDN trunks. 101 . Bay Location Assignment - Assign the T1/E1 Combo module a bay number. Form 03.Record ANI/DNIS Tip: Ensure that COS Option 800 (ANI Applies) is NOT enabled in the class of service of the ISDN trunks. Module Location Slot MMC1 MMC2 2 6 3. Form 53. To receive CLID or DDI digits. For example. 2. Notes: 1. Form 13. - Set the DTMF option to NO. - Set the Incoming Start Type to WINK. 3. Limited Wait for Dial Tone if ISDN trunks are present. and 95 are not available with embedded PRI. Required if option 806 SMDR – Record Incoming Calls enabled 4. Form 04. Purchase and program the correct Number of Links (option 96). the following COS options must be set: Table 13: Extension COS Options for Systems with embedded PRI COS Option Notes Setting 236 – Outgoing Trunk Callback Disable 237 – Outgoing Trunk Campon Disable 502 – Display ANI/DNIS Information and possibly 613 – Display ANI information only Enable 503 – Enable Calling Name Display Enable 702 – SMDR Overwrite Buffer Enable Must have 502 enabled for 613 to function. 91. Options 86. changing the number of links in option 96 requires a reset. 92. - Set the Outgoing Start Type to WINK.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook - For extensions (sets and stations). and if required. Form 13. Options Subform 102 - Set the Debounce Timer to 100 milliseconds. 94. 4. . purchase and enable Remote LAN Access (option 93). A system reset may be required after some options are programmed. System Options/System Timers - Assign a one to five second value to System Option 48. the PRI trunk must be a non-DISA trunk that is programmed with a T1 E&M trunk circuit descriptor. Trunk Circuit Descriptors - Assign a T1 trunk circuit descriptor. (Program them in reverse order to prevent contention with incoming calls from the CO.) - Add a name to the Trunk Group for future reference. Form 15. - Enable SMDR (outgoing only) if required. Form 16. Trunk Groups - Locate an empty Trunk Group and add the PRI trunks (trunk numbers programmed in Form 15) to the Trunk Group. - Set Group Type to Terminal (recommended) or Circular. Search for the correct Bay/Slot/Circuit and enter the following for each trunk: - COS number – see previous requirements - COR number (if required) - Tenant number – unless site has tenanting set to 1 - N – number of incoming DID digits – usually 4 - M – number of digits to absorb – usually 0 - X – digits to be inserted (up to 2 digits) or Feature Access Code 67 (Digit Translation Table Access) programmed on Form 02 - CDN – Circuit Descriptor Number - Trunk Number – Enter a trunk number (1-200) 6. 103 .Basic Programming 5. Dial-In Trunks • PRI trunks are Dial-In Trunks and are not normally used in a Non-Dial-in configuration. 398.5 dB) 0 dB Line Length (max 132. –22. Form 43.255 min) 30 RTS timer – after alarm 10 (0 – 300 sec) Embedded PRI Protocol DMS100 Embedded PRI Protocol Variant None Embedded PRI Network/User User Embedded PRI Unknown Numbering Plan Disabled Embedded PRI Bearer Capability Voice Speech Embedded PRI CLIR Voice Allow Embedded PRI Invert D Channel No 8. AMI&ZCS. T1 Link Descriptor - Create a Link Descriptor for the PRI trunks using the recommended settings in the following table: Table 14: T1 Link Descriptor Values for PRI trunks Descriptor Value Alarm debounce timer (300 –3200 ms) 2500 Line Coding (AMI.132 Framing (D4 or ESF) ESF Slip rate – maintenance limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs 255 Slip rate – service limit 7000 (0 – 9000) /24 hrs Slip rate – network sync limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs 7 BER – maintenance limit ( 10**-n . -7. T1 Link Assignment - 104 Assign the ISDN trunk T1 Link Descriptor to the slot(s) specified in Form 1.533 or 655) 0 .5.5.5. Form 42.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 7.6 )) / hour 4 BER – service limit ( 10**-n .4.255 min) 30 RTS timer – net slip limit exceeded (1. (Module should now show as installed. B8ZS) B8ZS Line Build Out (0. n = (3.) .4. n = (3. 265. -15.6 )) / hour 3 Framing losses – maintenance limit 255 Framing losses – service limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs (0 – 9000) /24 hrs 9000 RTS timer – service limit exceeded (1. Form 44. make sure that Form 22. Modified Digit Table - DID Calling Party Number to the network interacts with the current SX-200 ICP system networking functionality and ignores programmed node-IDs in the T1/E1 Combo module. default O/G. the definition of characters are: *4 000 *6 *4 *04 No SMDR for further modified digits Call-by-Call digits. The following table shows how Analog Networking and Call-by-Call information co-exist in the Modified Digit Table. ARS: Modified Digit Table. 10. contains an entry with CPN enabled for embedded PRI.Basic Programming 9. make the PRI trunk the clock source. The Node ID Information Element (“*8”) for Analog Networking. Complete ARS programming in CDE. The extension must belong to a block of DID numbers purchased from the Network provider. Form 22. Entry Quantity to Delete Digits to be Inserted Comments 01 1 *4000*6*4*04 ISDN CxC and DID In the “Digits to be Inserted” field. 105 . clid) Send caller ID (DID to network) Start SMDR again for further modified digits Inserts Caller's Name (for calls over ISDN Trunks) 11. if programmed in the Modified Digit Table. (speech. Entries for offboard PRI cards and NSUs should have CPN disabled. CO’s are the first choice for a sync source. Typically. T1 Network Sync - Enter the links according to their Bay/Slot/Circuit in the order that you want them to be used as the network sync source. will be ignored by the module. Note: If Calling Party Number (CPN) substitution is programmed. When using both PRI and TI trunks. If *6 is programmed in the digit modification table the DID calling extension number is sent to the module and can be sent to the network as the calling party. N2. Night Service 1 and 2 modes. - Assign a Circuit Descriptor Number (links this form to Form 13). Non-Dial-in Trunks - Assign COS and Tenant. - Assign a Trunk Name if desired. 5. 3. 4. Programming a range of Non Dial-in Trunks The RANGE PRGRM softkey allows block programming of trunks on the same card. Trunk Groups - Assign to a trunk group if outgoing. CDN The TK NAME and COMMENTS fields are left blank. TEN. This name appears on the set displays for incoming and outgoing calls. N1. System Configuration - Program a trunk card that meets the trunk type requirements. see page 296 for the settings. Form 13. Form 14. Form 16. Class of Service - Assign trunk options only. DAY. - Assign a Trunk Number in the range 1 to 200. - Assign the directory number or an abbreviated dial number which incoming calls will ring for Day Service.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Programming Analog Trunks Non Dial-In Trunks 1. A circuit descriptor for the LS/CLASS trunks is already programmed in the default database. Form 03. Form 01. 106 . 2. Trunk Circuit Descriptor - Create a trunk circuit descriptor that corresponds to the type of trunk that you are programming. The following fields are copied from the first trunk in the range: COS. You must program the first trunk in the range and then press RANGE PRGM to copy the values to the range of trunks that you specify. Slot and Circuit numbers for the first trunk and press the ENTER softkey. To program a range of trunks: 1. Form 15. Trunk Circuit Descriptor - Create a trunk circuit descriptor that corresponds to the type of trunk that you are programming. 2. Form 03. 6. The system displays: FROM BAY: SLOT: CIRCUIT:. CDN fields. Dial-in Trunks 1. 4.Basic Programming The trunk numbers are assigned in sequence. 3. Press RANGE PRGRM. Dial-in Trunks - Assign COS. Form 01. and Tenant. Enter valid Bay. Enter valid Bay. DAY. The system displays: TO BAY: SLOT: CIRCUIT:. Enter values for the COS. The trunk number sequence is incremented each time a trunk is skipped. If there are trunks that are already programmed within that range. beginning with the first trunk in the range. System Configuration - Program a trunk card that meets the trunk type requirements. 107 . The trunk numbers restart at 1 if necessary. Class of Service - Assign trunk options only. An error message is displayed if there are no more free trunk numbers. TEN. If the trunk number is incremented to a value that is already used. those trunks are skipped. 7. COR. Note: Assign a separate COS for the Dial-In Trunk. Slot and Circuit numbers for the last trunk and press the ENTER softkey. 5. The system copies the values from the first trunk to all the trunks specified in the range. 2. Form 13. the sequence continues to increment until a free number is found. 4. 3. Program the first trunk in the range. N1. N2. Note: Assign a separate COS for the Dial-In Trunk. Dial-In Trunks (In Form 15. - Column X defines the digits to insert. Do not insert 0 as a blank. 2. COR. Programming a range of Dial-in Trunks Follow the instructions on page 106 for range programming Non Dial-in Trunks. - Column M lists the number of digits to absorb. enter n (a whole number). Trunk Groups - Assign to a trunk group if outgoing.To insert digits. System Configuration - Program a trunk card that meets the trunk type requirements. To absorb no incoming digits. To absorb n digits. 3. To insert no digits. Note: If this digit is 0. the system treats this as a DID trunk. IMPORTANT: Changing the N field of a working system from 0 to any other digit or vice versa removes the trunks from the trunk group. Form 16. Form 15.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook - Column N lists the number of expected digits. This name appears on phone displays for incoming and outgoing calls.) - Assign COS. and Tenant. DISA Trunks 1. set to 0. 5. Form 01. the system treats this as a Tie trunk. - Assign a Trunk Name if desired. Form 03. Class of Service - Assign trunk options only. the CLASS trunk becomes a DISA trunk. leave blank. 108 - Column N: set to 0 - Column M: set to 0 . If this digit is not 0. enter the actual digits. Specify a time for Option 54 (DISA Answer Timer). 2. 109 . Recommended Options for System Security Form 03: Enable Option 808 (Special DISA).start interconnection rules apply and the restrictions on-loop start CO trunks applies. then loop. Programming T1 and PRI Trunks as DISA Trunks 1.Enhanced Answering Position (provides answer supervision to telco when the SX-200 ICP provides it dial tone). Feature Access Codes - Program Feature Number 19 (Direct Inward System Access) with a number that is within the DID range. Form 02. Telephone . 3. Form 04: Enable Option 5 (Verified Account Codes) and specify the account code length (Option 55). The set displays this name for incoming and outgoing calls. Note: If the DISA trunk is a loop-start CO trunk. Form 33: Enter appropriate DISA access codes.Basic Programming - Column X: leave blank - Assign a Trunk Name if desired. Form 03. Program the trunk(s) as T1 E&M. COS Define - Enable COS Option 606. Intercept reason (FROM xxx DND) and Forwarding Information (FWD FROM xxxx) take priority over DNIS. MCI sends the ANI digits without delimiters. ANI/DNIS is available only to incoming trunks with trunk descriptor “T1-E&M” and “T1-DID/TIE”. ANI.Display ANI/DNIS Information = ENABLE - COS Option 613 . In the Trunk Circuit Descriptor parameters set - DTMF to ENABLED - Incoming Start Type to Wink - Wink Timer to 100-350 for MCI and 140-290 for US SPRINT - Debounce Timer to 100 ms or greater. 2.Display ANI Information Only = ENABLE/DISABLE. 110 . 3. DNIS (Dialed Number Identification Service) . DNIS. or none (standard trunk label display). Notes: 1.SMDR Extended Record (for SMDR to report the ANI and DNIS digits). Create an ANI/DNIS trunk by creating a separate COS. DNIS digits on a dial-in trunk are used to route that trunk call. Only MCI and US Sprint Standards are supported.Limited Wait for Dial Tone - COS Option 811 .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Programming ANI/DNIS on an Incoming Trunk ANI (Automatic Number Identification) . which accept DTMF signaling and have the wink timer active. Tenant Name and Calling Line ID take priority over ANI information (immediately following the word TRUNK).ANI/DNIS Trunk - COS Option 246 . Sprint delimits the DNIS and ANI digits with asterisks. 1. To define which information will be displayed on the sets. and no further digits will be expected. 2. Enable the following options in the trunk's Class Of Service: - COS Option 802 .the local carrier sends the digits dialed by the calling party to the PBX.the local carrier sends the phone number of the calling party to the PBX. both. select the required following COS options: - COS Option 502 . Display ANI/DNIS = YES (enable) COS Option 613 . you will see the ANI instead. Note: If a name is received on the incoming trunk in the scenario where you would see the DNIS in the ringing state.Display ANI only = YES (enable) Phone display during ringing Phone display after answer ANI and DNIS sent ANI ANI ANI sent ANI ANI DNIS sent Trunk Number or Label Trunk Number or Label Neither sent Trunk Number or Label Trunk Number or Label 111 .Basic Programming The following tables identify displays during each call state according to digits sent by the trunk and COS options selected for the display set.Display ANI only = NO (disable) Phone display during ringing Phone display after answer ANI and DNIS sent DNIS ANI ANI sent ANI ANI DNIS sent DNIS DNIS Neither sent Trunk Number or Label Trunk Number or Label Table 16: ANI/DNIS Digits on Phone Display (COS Option 502 Enabled and COS Option 613 Enabled) COS Option 502.Display ANI/DNIS = YES (enable) COS Option 613 . Table 15: ANI/DNIS Digits on Phone Display (COS Option 502 Enabled and COS Option 613 Disabled) COS Option 502 . Table 17: ANI/DNIS for ACD Agents COS 502 COS 613 COS 654 Path Name Talking State Ringing State Enabled Enabled Disabled None ANI ANI Enabled Disabled Disabled None DNIS ANI Disabled Disabled Disabled None Path Number Trunk Name Disabled Enabled Disabled None Path Number Trunk Name Disabled Disabled Enabled None Path Number Path Number Disabled Enabled Enabled None Path Number Path Number Enabled Enabled Enabled None ANI Path Number Enabled Disabled Enabled None DNIS Path Number Enabled Enabled Disabled Yes Path Name ANI Enabled Disabled Disabled Yes Path Name ANI Disabled Disabled Disabled Yes Path Name Calling Trunk Name Disabled Enabled Disabled Yes Path Name Calling Trunk Name Disabled Disabled Enabled Yes Path Name Calling Path Name Disabled Enabled Enabled Yes Path Name Calling Path Name Enabled Enabled Enabled Yes Path Name Path Name Enabled Disabled Enabled Yes Path Name Path Name 112 .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook The following table describes the set display for logged in ACD Agents with the delivery of ANI/DNIS digits on the incoming trunks. - Program the option “CLASS Trunk” in the circuit descriptor options subform.Overwrite Buffer). enable COS Option 503 (Display CLASS Name) in the class of service for the phone. 4. enable COS Option 806 (SMDR-Record Incoming Calls) and COS Option 814 (SMDR-Record ANI/DNIS/CLASS). In Form 15 the CLASS trunk becomes a DISA trunk. Class of Service. Form 14. Enable COS Option 702 (SMDR . 113 . Form 01. Class of Service.Basic Programming CLASS Trunks 1. Enable COS Option 613 . enable COS Option 246 (SMDR-Extended Record) and COS Option 814 (SMDR-Record ANI/DNIS/CLASS). Assign a separate COS for the trunk. Define for trunks. - To have CLASS name reported in the SMDR records. 5. - To have Calling Line ID digits reported in the SMDR records. enable COS Option 502 (Display ANI/DNIS/CLASS Information) in the class of service for the phone. 3. Non-Dial-In Trunks or Form 15. - To display CLASS name before Calling Line ID digits on phones with 2-line displays. Trunk Circuit Descriptor - Assign the trunk the ASU CLASS circuit descriptor. Dial-in Trunks - Program the CLASS trunks.Display ANI Information Only if required. Form 03. Form 13. System Configuration - Program the ASU Trunk card. - To display Calling Line ID digits on a Mitel IP Phone. Define for Mitel IP Phones. 2. Form 03. 3. 1. When the test is complete. Refer to the logs to determine the actual settings for AUTO. Press DIAGNOSTICS LS_MEASURE select LINE_QUALITY (for one trunk) or BATCH_QUAL (for all trunks) Respond to the prompts to run the test. Switch to MTCE. Sample setup (trunk 6 provides milliwatt tone): Trunk # 1 2 3 4 5 6 Tel # 1111001 1111002 1111003 1111004 1111005 1111006 Milliwatt 6 6 6 6 6 1 Note: If the local CO provides a milliwatt tone number. do not configure the loopback setup described above. To view the logs. 2. Instead. LENGTH and IMPEDANCE are programmed automatically in Form 13 (Audio Configuration subform). enter the milliwatt tone number in Form 13 (Trunk Circuit Descriptors) and run the Line Quality test.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Running the Line Quality Test for LS Trunks Run the Line Quality test to measure and program optimum audio configuration settings (line length and impedance) for AMB CLASS circuits. 114 . Form 13 (Audio Configuration subform) - Program the trunks so that one trunk provides milliwatt tone for all other trunks in a loopback setup when the test is performed. press DIAGNOSTICS > LS_MEASURE > TEST_RESULTS > ENTER. Note: LENGTH and IMPEDANCE must be set to AUTO in order to be programmed automatically when the test is run. COS Define - Select the COS number. Match the CDN values to those of the selected Terminal.Data SMDR . such as the Precidia Technologies Ether232 or iPocket232 (available from the vendor or its resellers). must use an RS232-to-IP serial port converter. Form 03. Form 11. and that require bi-directional data. to connect to the SX-200 ICP.Basic Programming Programming IP Sockets for Hotel/ Motel terminals and ACD Monitor Note: Hotel/Motel front desk terminals. - Select the SEL. Data Circuit Descriptor - Select a Circuit Descriptor (CDN). Form 29. 3. - Enable the following COS Options: 901 . and Stop Bits = 1. Option Subform. Data Assignment - Program a SOCKET type data device to an available PLID in the following range: PLID 1/13/20 1/13/21 1/13/22 1/13/23 1/13/24 Port 61320 61321 61322 61323 61324 PLID 1/13/25 1/13/26 1/13/27 1/13/28 Port 61325 61326 61327 61328 115 .DTRX Complete Message Text 906 . Character Length = 8. All Baud Rates = 9600. Form 12.Message Sending (for PMS only) 2. DTE Profile - Select a DTE profile number. ACD Monitors and other applications that are not IP-enabled. - Enable: DTRX Echoplex. Editing. 1.Does Not Apply 259 . You will use this profile number in Form 12.DTRX Herald 904 . Parity = None. and Edit Character = 127. Data Assignment. 4. For example. Verify that the device and SX-200 ICP are communicating. not 6830 as the table shows. If they are not communicating. If they are communicating. Program the RS232-to-IP serial port converter with the settings in Table 18 on page 117. 7. Note: For Remote Port. COR. and the circuit descriptor number programmed in Form 11.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook - In the Data Terminal Equipment profile (DTE) field. COS. - Assign a Tenant. Connect the Hotel/Motel terminal or ACD Monitor computer to the Layer 2 switch using the RS232-to-IP serial port converter. 6. enter the port number programmed in Form 12. Extension number. Use the same CDN you used in Form 11. 116 . 5. you will see an exchange of ENQ (Enquire) and ACK (Acknowledge) commands at the device. see page 235 for troubleshooting information. enter the DTE number you used in Form 29. The serial port settings to use are as follows: Table 18: RS232-to-IP Serial Port Converter Settings Setting Value Protocol Telnet (cln) Port Setting 9600 bps 8n1 [no] Connection Control Net-Linked Terminal Type vt100 Local Port 0 Remote IP SX-200 ICP RTC IP Address Remote Port 6830 Fallback IP 0. • A Hyatt Encore or HIS compatible PMS.0 Fallback Port 0 117 .Basic Programming Programming Voice mail with PMS Integration Requirements • MOSS Option 124.0. Programming for the Precidia programming is provided below.0. Subnet Mask and Gateway IP address) to use depend on the LAN configuration. Follow the instructions supplied with the converter to program its Ethernet and serial port settings. Voice mail Property Management System. • An RS232-to-IP serial port converter. such as the Precidia Technologies Ether232 or iPocket232 (available from the vendor or its resellers). is required to connect the customer's PMS computer to the Layer 2 switch. The Ethernet settings (converter IP address. Hyatt Encore or HIS. 5. 9. Connect cables (power. System Options/System Timers - Enable Option 124. Set the remote IP address. Ensure that all remaining entries are set to zero. Form 49. 118 . 2. 11.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook SX-200 ICP Programming 1. Note: Enabling Option 124 requires a system reset. Configure the Serial Port for the Ether232 with the settings in Table 18. Voice mail Option - Select the PMS Protocol. Start a terminal program on the PC (such as Hyperterminal) and set the configuration to 9600-8-N-1. Setting up the Ether232 1. Unplug the PC from the Ether232 and connect the PMS computer in its place. 10. This is the IP address of the SX-200 ICP. 2. Assign the Ether232 a valid IP Address with Subnet Mask and Gateway IP Address. Set the remote IP port to 6830. 6. 8. Press and hold the Configure button on back panel of the Ether232 for several seconds until the Ether232 configuration menu appears on the terminal. 3. Press any key to establish communication with the SX-200 ICP. 4. Note: The serial cable connecting the PC to the Ether232 must be a Null Modem (RS232-Crossover) cable. Ethernet from Layer 2 switch to Ether232. Save the configuration. Voice mail Property Management System. Form 04. 7. If they are not 0 set them to 0. or straight-through cable for iPocket232). and serial from PC to Ether232. • An RS232-to-IP serial port converter. System Options - Program the following: System Options / Timers Status 04 Message Waiting and Message Register Clear Print ENABLE 11 Automatic Wake-Up ENABLE 13 Automatic Wake-Up Print ENABLE 32 Outgoing Call Restriction ENABLE 27 Room Status Audit DISABLE 33 Room Status DISABLE 34 Auto Room Status Conversion / Wake Up Print DISABLE 108 . parity. 2. SX-200 ICP Programming 1.Basic Programming Programming the PMS Interface on the SX-200 ICP Requirements • Purchase MOSS Option 108. Determine the customer’s PMS communications protocol requirements: baud rate. Form 04. Property Management System.Voice Mail Property Management System ENABLE 119 . • Lodgistix PMS software package (or a package that follows the same protocol). such as the Precidia Technologies Ether232 or iPocket232 (available from the vendor or its resellers).Property Management System ENABLE 124 . for PMS applications requiring serial connectivity to the SX-200 ICP. IP-enabled applications can connect via Telnet. character length and number of stop bits. Form 11. Option Name Value Session Inactivity Disconnect Timer 0 Guard Timer 2 Minimum Baud Rate match customer’s PMS Default Baud Rate match customer’s PMS Maximum Baud Rate match customer’s PMS Always use Default Baud Rate when called YES DTR Off Disconnect Timer 5 DTR to CTS Delay Timer 100 DTR Forced High YES RTS Forced High YES DSR Is held High when device is Idle YES CTS Is held High when device is Idle YES Originate a DTRX Call with Low .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 3.High transition of DTR NO Action taken if the Idle DTE has DTR Low (Auto-Answer) REFUSE ASYNC: Keyboard Origination Allowed (Auto Baud) DISABLE ASYNC: ADL Auto Baud DISABLE ASYNC: Flow Control XON/XOFF ASYNC: Break Key Function Transparent ASYNC: PBX Attention Character 0 ASYNC: Parity match customer’s PMS ASYNC: Character Length match customer’s PMS ASYNC: Number Of Stop Bits match customer’s PMS DS2100: Operating Mode ASYNCHRONOUS 120 . - Select the Circuit Descriptor Options. Circuit Descriptor - Program to match the protocol. EXT NUM From Form 12 PRINTOUT PRINTOUT TYPE PMS AUTOPRINT GUARANTEED NO 6. Form 03.Basic Programming 4. Directed I/O: program the PMS. N1. COS. 5.see step 6) ENABLE 244 Room Status Applies DISABLE 608 SUPERSET™ Status Display DISABLE 7. Extension number. The “Station Dial 0" answer point for all tenants must be a Console LDN or Subattendant LDN. Form 34. Class of Service Define - Program the following table: Device Room Phones COS Option Status 202 Alarm Call ENABLE 220 Do Not Disturb ENABLE 232 Message Waiting SETUP Lamp ENABLE 703 Message Register Applies ENABLE 239 Priority Dial 0 (optional . Form 12 . To allow the customer’s PMS to set message waiting. and circuit descriptor number. and N2 use “Priority Dial 0" as an alternate method. and Night 2 answer points to the same LDN. 121 . Form 19.Data Assignment - Program a SOCKET type data device to one of these PLIDs: PLID 1/13/20 1/13/21 1/13/22 1/13/23 1/13/24 - Port 61320 61321 61322 61323 61324 PLID 1/13/25 1/13/26 1/13/27 1/13/28 Port 61325 61326 61327 61328 Assign a Tenant. you must program Day. Night 1. [ Tenant ___ ] Type Of Call Station Dial 0 Routing - Day Same LDN N1 Same LDN N2 Same LDN If you require different “Dial 0" answer points for Day. COR. Call Rerouting - Program “Station Dial 0" routing. you will see an exchange of ENQ (Enquire) and ACK (Acknowledge) commands at the customer’s PMS computer if it is communicating with the SX-200 ICP. see page 235 for troubleshooting information. For serially-connected PMS computers. - Connect the PMS computer to the Layer 2 switch using the RS232-to-IP serial port converter.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 8. not 6830 as the table shows. Note: For Remote Port. program the converter with the settings in Table 18 on page 117 . 122 . If they are not communicating. 9. Do one of the following: - Start a Telnet session on the PMS computer to the IP address of the SX-200 ICP and the socket port number programmed in Form 12. Verify that the customer’s PMS computer communicates with the SX-200 ICP. Then. enter the port number programmed in Form 12. 1. SVP server IP address. Common Options subform. DHCP Server Identifier (default is MITEL IP PHONE) • 151.2) • 130.2) • 129. SX-200 ICP (RTC) IP address (default is 192.1 or later software and one IP device license per Netlink phone.1) • 66. • Assign a Class of Service to each telephone in Form 09. Note: Software for the SpectraLink telephones is provided on the SX-200 ICP system software CD. SpectraLink firmware TFTP server IP address (default is 192. • (Optional) Associate the SpectraLink Wireless phone with the user's desk phone.168.1.Basic Programming Programming SpectraLink Wireless Telephones Requirements • SX-200 ICP Release 2. Default Gateway IP address (default is 192.11b wireless access points and SpectraLink Voice Priority Server (SVP). program the following options: • 3.168. DHCP Options. Programming SX-200 ICP • In CDE Form 47. • (Optional) Assign features and line appearances to keys on the phones.1. • A properly configured and operational wireless LAN—includes compatible 802. • Register the telephones with the SX-200 ICP either in CDE Form 09 (Desktop Device Assignments) or from the telephones by entering the IP Set PIN Registration code and the desired directory number.168. 123 . IP Networking. See Phone Twinning for programming instructions. Example: ESS ID -> Static Entry -> 123456 License Management Ensure that selected license setting allows for TFTP Server IP Address Input. it will not be displayed when re-accessing that Key Information menu. Settings not explicitly configured should be left at their default values. Example: License Mgmt -> Set Current -> Type 014 Security Ensure that selected security matches Access Point Security Settings. For detailed instructions. Example: Security -> WEP -> Authentication -> Open System Security -> WEP -> WEP On/Off -> WEP On Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Default Key -> 1 Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Key Length -> 40-Bit Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Key #1 -> 1111111111 Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Key #2 -> 2222222222 Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Key #3 -> 3333333333 Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Key #4 -> 4444444444 Security -> WEP -> Rotation Secret -> 1 NOTE: Please be aware that once a WEP Key has been entered.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook SpectraLink Devices and Access Points The following table summarizes the programming requirements for SpectraLink and other associated third-party devices. Notes: 1. The menus and options in the examples may vary slightly depending on the version of software in the device or the device type. CAREFULLY enter the required Key to prevent typos. See also the documentation supplied with the Access Points selected for the installation. (Page 1 of 4) 124 . refer to the SpectraLink documentation on the SX-200 ICP software CD. 2. Table 19: SpectraLink Installation Checklist NetLink Telephones Parameter Requirement ESS ID Ensure that ESSID matches Access Point ESSID. 0.Basic Programming Table 19: SpectraLink Installation Checklist (continued) NetLink Telephones (cont’d) Parameter Requirement IP Addresses Ensure that the defined IP addresses match the host Access Point subnet settings using either Static or DHCP configuration.0. Example: Static settings IP Addresses -> Static IP -> Phone IP -> 192.192.0.1 128 (TFTP Server IP Address) . Example: IP Address . as well as the desired Net_ID (ESS ID).IP Address .168.0.ASCII String .192.15 129 (RTC IP Address) .0.192.0.168.0.IP Address .168.168.168.0.IP Address .168.168.168. are configured correctly.192.200 Net_ID (ESS) .20 Access Point (Symbol) ESS ID & IP Addresses Ensure that the correct IP settings for the Access Point.192.20 IP Addresses -> Static IP -> RTC IP Addr -> 192.1 DNS IP Address .255.201 (Page 2 of 4) 125 .0.192.15 130 (DHCP Server Identifier) .168.0.168.IP Address .168.MITEL IP PHONE 151 (SVP Server) .1 IP Addresses -> Static IP -> Subnet Mask -> 255.123456 Additional DNS .0.000 IP Addresses -> Static IP -> SVP IP Addr -> 192.168.0.168.192.192.101 IP Addresses -> Static IP -> TFTP Server IP -> 192.15 IP Addresses -> Static IP -> Default Gateway -> 192.0.15 DHCP settings 003 (Default Gateway) .255.25 Gateway IP Address . 21 SVP-II Configuration -> Last Alias IP Address: -> 192.168.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 19: SpectraLink Installation Checklist (continued) Access Point (Symbol) (cont’d) Parameter Requirement Special Functions Ensure that the desired wireless security settings are defined correctly.24 SVP-II Configuration -> SVP-II Mode -> Netlink IP NOTE: Please ensure that the defined Alias IP Addresses Range does not overlap with any other device. located on the same subnet. including NetLink Wireless IP Phones. (Page 3 of 4) 126 .0. Example: Set Access Control List -> Address Type -> Individual -> Add-[F2] -> 08:00:0F:01:02:03 Netlink SVP Server SVP-II Configuration Ensure that the proper settings for the NetLink wireless phones SpectraLink Voice Priority management are entered correctly. Example: Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Pre-shared Key -> Enabled Configure Authentication and Encryption -> WEP -> 40 bit Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Configure WEP/KeyGuard -> Encryption Key ID -> 1 Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Configure WEP/KeyGuard -> WEP/KeyGuard Key Maintenance -> Key 1 -> 11111 11111 Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Configure WEP/KeyGuard -> WEP/KeyGuard Key Maintenance -> Key 2 -> 22222 22222 Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Configure WEP/KeyGuard -> WEP/KeyGuard Key Maintenance -> Key 3 -> 33333 33333 Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Configure WEP/KeyGuard -> WEP/KeyGuard Key Maintenance -> Key 4 -> 44444 44444 Set System Configuration Ensure that Access Control is enabled in order to make the wireless network more secure.168. Example: SVP-II Configuration -> Phones per Access Point -> 4 SVP-II Configuration -> SVP-II Master -> 192.0. Example: Set System Configuration -> Access Control -> Allowed Set Access Control List Ensure that devices allowed on the wireless network have their MAC Address entered correctly in the list.20 SVP-II Configuration -> First Alias IP Address: -> 192.168.0. Each subnet must have its own SVP server: (Page 4 of 4) 127 .0.168. Example: Network Configuration -> IP Address -> 192.20 Network Configuration -> Subnet Mask -> 255.1 IMPORTANT: Ensure that the Access Point(s) in use is/are on the same subnet as the SVP Server.000 Network Configuration -> Default Gateway -> 192.0.255.Basic Programming Table 19: SpectraLink Installation Checklist (continued) Netlink SVP Server (cont’d) Parameter Requirement Network Configuration Ensure that the correct IP Settings for the SVP Server are configured correctly.255.168. - Enable COS Option 208 (Call Forwarding External). Forced Entry . enabled. or a key system personal speedcall. Program a feature access code for Feature Access Code 03 (Call Forwarding . Toll Control does not apply to CO trunks which are externally call forwarded. Toll Control does not apply when forwarding to system abbreviated dial external numbers.External Call Forwarding . or system abbreviated dial number.All Calls). forwarding is ignored. Call Forward External. - Disable COS Option 200 (Account Code.External requires a receiver for dialing. system abbreviated dial number. Program the following COS options in the extension’s COS: - Enable COS Option 245 (Abbreviated Dialing Access). Note: Check for split forwarding COS 260 and COS 709. 1. If one is not available in Call Forward . For external call forwarding that involves two trunks. Note: On a Call Forward .External forwards calls to an external destination by using a personal speed call key. Form 30 (Device Interconnection Table) specifies which devices can be connected together. 4.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Programming Call Forwarding . Keep this in mind when transferring calls to a phone which is externally Call Forwarded.Always call. Call Forwarding .Busy or Call Forward . personal abbreviated dial number.Don’t Answer. 128 . The forwarding destination is the current stored speedcall key number. Toll Control applies to the calling party for Call Forwarding . verify that they can be connected together. Enable System Option 21 (Incoming to Outgoing Call Forward) for a trunk or party with a single party trunk on hold to forward externally. the caller is dropped or given reorder tone.External Calls) to allow call forwarding to system abbreviated dial numbers. the COS of the caller (trunk or extension) is checked. 2. Note: The device which is calling the destination that is an external call forward must have COS Option 208. If one is not available during a reroute. 3.External to personal speed call keys or to key system personal speedcalls. trunk group. but may be limits set by software. Table 20: Feature Limitations Feature Limitations Maximum number of simultaneous calls 90 Maximum number of Call Park keys 24 Maximum number of speech paths or channels used by any call 2 Maximum number of simultaneous consultations 5 Maximum number of System Park Orbits 25 Maximum number of Specific Park Orbits 25 Maximum number of Voice mail Ports 16 Maximum number of Voice mailboxes 748 Maximum number of simultaneous add-on (3-way) calls DSP configuration dependent Maximum number of simultaneous station-controlled conference calls DSP configuration dependent Maximum number of parties in conference at one time 5 Maximum number of calls that can simultaneously be camped on to a station. or hunt group 247 Maximum number of simultaneous callbacks that can be enabled 100 Maximum number of simultaneous call forwards that can be enabled 650 Maximum number of simultaneous “Dial 0” calls 48 Maximum number of simultaneously ringing ONS telephones 8 (Page 1 of 3) 129 . Most systems will reach practical operational limitations before these large numbers of devices are reached.Basic Programming Feature Limitations Note: The capacities in Table 20 are not true hardware limitations. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 20: Feature Limitations (continued) Feature Limitations Maximum number of messages queued in the system 750 Maximum number of hunt groups 99 Maximum number of ring groups 25 Maximum number of members per ring group 50 Maximum number of non-IP members per ring-all grp 32 Maximum number of callers queued for a ring group 20 Maximum number of hunt groups in ACD 99 Maximum number of ACD agents 50 Maximum number of active ACD agents 25 Maximum number of calls that can be simultaneously connected to Music-on-Hold unlimited Maximum number of stations in a station hunt group 50 Maximum number of stations in a call pickup group 50 Maximum number of dial call pickup groups 50 Maximum number of IP nodes that can be assigned 100 Maximum number of trunks assignable to night stations 36 Maximum number of trunks in a trunk group 50 Maximum number of trunk groups 50 Maximum number of calls that can override a given extension 1 Maximum Number of Night Bells 25 Maximum number of calls that can be waiting at console 200 Maximum number of abbreviated dial numbers 1000 Maximum number Speed Dial numbers programmed on all Mitel phones 2212 Maximum number of trunk buffers for SMDR 200 (Page 2 of 3) 130 . and stand alone datasets) Limitations 768 Maximum number of IP devices and other resources per system .IP phones 16 100 Compression channels 16 Maximum number of music sources 9 Maximum number of door relays 4 Maximum number of ASU IIs 3 Maximum number of LS / CLASS lines 12 Maximum number of T1 links 1 Maximum number of PRI links 1 Maximum Number of Page Groups 50 Maximum Number of Paging Zones 9 Maximum Number of Stations in a Page Group 32 Maximum Number of Line Appearances 32 (Page 3 of 3) 131 .IP trunks .Basic Programming Table 20: Feature Limitations (continued) Feature Maximum number of user devices (all sets. stations. trunks. Trunk Groups 14 .ARS: Route Lists C C C 23 . or device.System Options/System Timers 03 ..System configuration FORM C C C C A3 A4 C A1 C C A2 A5 A6 C C B1 B2 C .Non-Dial-In Trunks C A2 A2 A2 C A3 C C C C C C C C C C A6 B C C C C C C C C B C A2 A4 A3 B C C C C C C C C C C A2 A2 A1 C C A2 C C C A1 Legend: A Forms must have specific programming completed to perform the task.ARS: Modified Digit Table A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 C A1 A1 11 . Digits after the letters (A1..COS Define C C C C C C 25 .Pickup Groups A3 C A2 A3 A3 A2 C A2 C A1 B1 A3 B1 C C C 12 .ARS: Route Plans C A A1 A1 C C C C C C 24 . 132 13 .Miscellaneous System Ports 17 .Dial-In Trunks 16 .Call Rerouting Table 18 .Console Assignments 04 .Data Circuit Descriptor A1 A1 A1 A1 A4 A2 B1 B1 B1 B1 B A3 A5 B1 A4 C B1 06 .ARS: Day Zone Definition 20 .ARS: COR Group Definition C C C A8 C C C A7 C C C C C C A4 A5 A6 B C C C B C C A3 C C C C C C 19 .Desktop Device Assignments 08 .Tenant Interconnection Table ACD Compression Dataset DID Trunk DISA Dial In E&M “Tie Trk” Hotel IP Trunk ISDN Device Key System Modem MOH Multiline set Night Bell Non Dial In Trk Pager Phonebook Printer RAD RAD (EMEM) Single Line UCD Verified Acct.Hunt Groups 15 .Trunk Circuit Descriptors 10 . C Related to process.Tenant Night Switching Control A7 05 .Feature Access Codes DEVICE OR OPTION 01. B Forms have direct impact on device operation.Attendant LDN Assignments 07 . but not mandatory.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook CDE Cross Reference Voice mail (EMEM) B B A1 A1 C C A2 A2 A4 C C C B1 C C C C C C C C C C B A2 A2 C C A2 C C C C A3 A3 A3 A4 A3 A5 B B B C B A4 A2 21 . A2.) denote the required order of entry. 02 .ARS: Route Definition C C C C 22 .Data Assignment C 09 . Network Synchronization 43 . 27 . Voice mail (EMEM) 133 .Guest Rm SUPERSET KeysTemplate 36 .Device Interconnection Table 29 .CDE Data Print 31 .Bay Location Assignment 52 .DTE Profile 28 .Key System Toll Control 44 .Digit Translation Table 54 .Form Access Restriction Def’n.Voice Mail Options 48 .Calling Party Number 53 .Email 51 .System Abbreviated Dial Entry 30 .T1 Link Descriptors 39 .ACD Paths A5 A2 A3 A6 C C A1 C B A7 A8 C B2 C A9 B B1 A4 A2 C 55 .Mailboxes 49 .T1 Link Assignment 42 .Modem Assignment 35 .IP Networking 46 .ACD Agent Groups C 38 .C C C C C B B A6 C C A4 C C C C C C C B C C C 40 .Voice Mail Distribution 50 .Account Code Entry 32 .ARS: ARS Digits Basic Programming FORM B B A3 C C A A A A A A A A A A DEVICE OR OPTION ACD Compression Dataset DID Trunk DISA Dial In E&M “Tie Trk” Hotel IP Trunk ISDN Device Key System Modem MOH Multiline set Night Bell Non Dial In Trk Pager Phonebook Printer RAD RAD (EMEM) Single Line UCD Verified Acct.ACD Supervisors 41 .ARS: Maximum Dialed Digits 26 .Global Find Access Code 34 .Directed IO 33 .Voice Networking 47 .ACD Keys Template 37 . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 134 . Chapter 4 Advanced Installation and Programming . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 136 . For more information. see “SX-200 ICP Advanced Installation and Maintenance Course” on page 3.Advanced Installation and Programming Overview This chapter is for technicians who are installing the controller in an existing computer network or as a standalone IP networking for both voice and data. IMPORTANT: Do not attempt the procedures in this chapter until you have successfully completed the Mitel Advanced SX-200 ICP I & M Course. Topics covered: Networking Capabilities of the SX-200 ICP Planning your LAN Requirements for IP Networking Default Controller IP Addresses Implementing a Voice-Only Network Implementing a Voice and Data Network IP Network Configuration Procedures Networking Mitel IP-PBXs Programming Unified Messaging 137 . • a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server that automatically assigns LAN devices with IP addresses In addition to the above features. phantom power feed for IP Phones. • an Internet Gateway (the WAN interface) and firewall • Network Address Translation (NAT) capabilities 138 . Each port has dual speed capability. and VLAN tagging for voice packet priority.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Networking Capabilities of the SX-200 ICP The SX-200 CX ICP provides: • a 10/100/1G LAN interface that can connect to an external Layer 2 switch to provide additional ports. the SX-200 CXi ICP also provides: • a 16-port managed Layer 2 Ethernet Switch. and subnet mask required for the SX-200 ICP sub network? or Will you use an external DHCP server? Internal configuration questions How many IP phones are you connecting to the system? How many PCs are you connecting to the system? Are you connecting printers or file servers? How many? Will these PCs and other devices use the DHCP server in the SX-200 ICP controller? Are you providing internet access through the WAN port a Layer 2 switch port? External configuration questions What type of internet connection will you use? Dial-up.Advanced Installation and Programming Planning your Installation Adding PCs and data devices to a voice-only LAN or installing the SX-200 ICP into an existing data LAN requires careful planning. cable. gateway address. Completing the following pre-installation questionnaire will help you select and implement a network configuration that best suits the needs of your customer. xDSL. Tip: Refer to the Engineering Guidelines document on the SX-200 ICP software CD-ROM or on Mitel Online for more information on network planning and configuration. or other? Will you connect the system to an existing LAN? What type of authentication is required? Username Password PPP Security type Will you network with other SX-200 ICP or 3300 ICP systems? 139 . Question Answer Will you connect to a private network or virtual private network (VPN)? What are the IP addresses. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook IP Networking • For the SX-200 ICP CX Controller. see this page. 5220 and 5224) provide an inexpensive way to network a small number of PCs. • For the SX-200 ICP CXi Controller. PC (2nd) Port on IP Phone. COS Define - 140 Enable Option 280. . Form 03. Figure 11: Basic PC Network Enabling the (2nd) Port on IP Phones IMPORTANT: To ensure optimum network performance. Note: The option must be purchased (listed on the MOSS sheet). 2. PC (2nd) Port on IP Phone. Form 04. 5215. DO NOT connect servers to the 2nd port on IP phones.CX The dual-port IP Phones (5010. 5212. 5020. System Options/System Timers - Enable System Option 131. see page 150. 1. Requirements for IP Networking . Advanced Installation and Programming Virtual LANs (VLANs) This section shows examples of the three most common. converged voice and data networks for an SX-200 ICP. • Configuration 1: One DHCP Server per VLAN • Configuration 2: One External DHCP Server for Two VLANs • Configuration 3: Router on a Stick (one router interfacing multiple VLANs) Configuration 1: One DHCP server per VLAN Figure 12: VLAN Configuration 1 141 . 1 Opt.20. the ASCII data string in Option 125 would look like this: id:ipphone.0 255.255.10.20. 142 .10.10.20.0 Opt.1 20.20. DHCP Options 128 .20.255.20.1.0)” on page 147 for information on programming SX-200 ICP DHCP settings on a Windows 2000 DHCP server.20. 130 MITEL IP PHONE MITEL IP PHONE Opt.255.sw_tftp=20.20.10 to 20.20.mitel.20.100 Subnet 255.20.251 20. 129 20. See “Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server (prior to Release 4.20.1 20.10.com. 03 10.1.0 • Subnet Mask • Option 128 (TFTP Server IP address) • Option 03 (Router) • Option 129 (RTC IP) • Option 125 (ASCII configuration • Option 130 (IP Phone DHCP Server) string) (New for Release 4.10.l2p=6 For information on programming the controller IP address and DHCP settings. Table 21: DHCP Server Settings for Configuration 1 Example DHCP Server on VLAN 1 (IP: 10.20.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook DHCP Server Settings (Example) The following settings must be programmed in the DHCP server: • DHCP IP Address Range DHCP Options prior to Release 4. see page 146.2) Scope 1 Internal DHCP Server on Controller Scope 1 DHCP 10. 133 6 6 Setting NOTE: In Release 4.20.10 to 10.and non-Mitel-specific options.133 are replaced by Option 125 Ddefault for Mitel-specific options) and Option 43 (for Mitel.255.20.251 Opt.1 Opt.100 20.0.vlan=2.128 20.10.call_srv=20. 132 2 2 Opt.20.20.10.0) • Option 132 (VLAN ID) • Option 133 (Priority) Table 21 shows the DHCP settings programmed for this configuration.) In this example.20.10. Advanced Installation and Programming Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example) The following two tables show settings on a Cisco and an HP Layer 2 switch for the Configuration 1 example. Table 22: Cisco Layer 2 Switch Settings for All Configuration Examples Port Use Command A Access port for VLAN 1 None (by default. Note: These settings also apply for the other network configuration examples. all ports belong to VLAN 1) Access port for VLAN 2 L2switch(config-if)#switchport mode access L2switch(config-if)#switchport access vlan 2 Trunk port with Dot1q for IP Phone L2switch(config)#interface fast 0/5 L2switch(config-if)#switchport mode trunk L2switch(config-if)#switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q B C D E Table 23: HP Layer 2 Switch Settings for All Configuration Examples Port Use Command (on HP VLAN menu) A Access port for VLAN 1 VLAN 1 = untagged VLAN 2 = NO Access port for VLAN 2 VLAN 1 = NO VLAN 2 = untagged Trunk port VLAN 1 = untagged VLAN 2 = tagged B C D E 143 . The local phones and PCs on the SX-200 ICP LAN will then be able to receive IP addresses from the external server. you must use Form 47 to disable the controller’s built-in DHCP server.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Configuration 2: One external DHCP server for two VLANs Figure 13: VLAN Configuration 2 To configure the SX-200 ICP system to use an external DHCP server (for example. Windows NT server or Windows 2000 server) through the Layer 2 switch port.0 • Subnet Mask • Option 128 (TFTP Server IP address) • Option 03 (Router) • Option 129 (RTC IP) • Option 125 (ASCII configuration • Option 130 (IP Phone DHCP Server) string) (New for Release 4. DHCP Server Settings (Example) The following settings must be programmed in the DHCP server: • DHCP IP Address Range DHCP Options prior to Release 4.0) • Option 132 (VLAN ID) • Option 133 (Priority) 144 . 251 20.0)” on page 147 for information on programming SX-200 ICP DHCP settings on a Windows 2000 DHCP server.20.10.20.l2p=6 For information on programming the controller IP address and DHCP settings.10.0 Opt.20. 132 2 2 Opt.20.) In this example.0 255.20. DHCP Options 128 .100 Subnet 255.10.0.20.2) Setting Scope 1 Scope 2 DHCP 10.251 Opt. 130 MITEL IP PHONE MITEL IP PHONE Opt.20.1.20.1.20. Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example) See “Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)” on page 143.10 to 10.and non-Mitel-specific options.20.133 are replaced by Option 125 Ddefault for Mitel-specific options) and Option 43 (for Mitel.20.100 20.10 to 20.10.10.10.20.20.1 Opt. 128 20. the ASCII data string in Option 125 would look like this: id:ipphone.20.255. 129 20.call_srv=20.20.sw_tftp=20.mitel.255.255.1 20.10.vlan=2. See “Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server (prior to Release 4. 145 .Advanced Installation and Programming Table 24 shows the DHCP settings programmed for this configuration. Table 24: DHCP Server Settings for Configuration 2 & 3 Examples DHCP Server on VLAN 1 (IP: 10.1 Opt.20.1 20. see page 146. 133 6 6 NOTE: In Release 4.10.20.03 10.com.20.255. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Configuration 3: Router on a Stick Figure 14: VLAN Configuration 3 DHCP Server Settings (Example) See Table 24. See “Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server (prior to Release 4. “DHCP Server Settings for Configuration 2 & 3 Examples. Programming the controller IP address and DHCP settings The IP address of the SX-200 ICP and its DHCP settings are set at the factory. 146 .0)” on page 147 for information on programming SX-200 ICP DHCP settings on a Windows 2000 DHCP server.” on page 145. Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example) See “Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)” on page 143. Use the following procedure if you need to change them. press ENABLE to re-enable it. Subform 01 (SYSTEM IP) - Enter values for IP ADDRESS. Log in to the CDE application. In Form 47 (IP Networking). click Add. Press ENTER. 5. 4. See the SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation for information on values to use. and click DHCP. 3.Advanced Installation and Programming To change the controller’s IP address and DHCP settings: 1. 4. 3. 7. and other settings as required. Establish a serial connection to the Maintenance port on the SX-200 ICP Controller (see page 70 for instructions). The following items must be configured: • TFTP Server IP address (system IP address of the SX-200 ICP) • IP address of the RTC card • Mitel tag “MITEL IP PHONE” To modify a Windows 2000 DHCP Server: 1. then click Set Predefined Options. IP GATEWAY. Highlight the Server name and point to Action. On the Start menu. point to Programs. Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server (prior to Release 4. then Administrative Tools. 2. In the Option Type window. In Subform 02 (DHCP SERVER) - Enter the required values.0) You can modify a Windows 2000 DHCP server to support IP Phones. set the following: - Name: IP phone TFTP Server IP Address - Type: IP Address 147 . Reset the system (see page 180 for instructions). Press ENTER. A DHCP server must be configured to support the IP Phones for each subnet. 6. In the Predefined Options and Values window. - To disable the controller’s DHCP server. 2. IP NETMASK. press the DISABLE softkey. then click OK. If you are using VLANs. In the Predefined Options and Values window. do steps 13 to 18 and step 21 9. 7. click Add again. 10. 6. Note: The server will automatically convert the numeric value to Hex. - Value: System IP Address of SX-200 ICP Click OK. set the following: - Name: IP Phone DHCP Server Type: String Code: 130 Click OK.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook - Code: 128 Click OK. - Value: enter the system IP address of the SX-200 ICP. In the Predefined Options and Values window click Add again. 8. In the Predefined Options and Values window click Add again. - Value: enter a numeric value for the VLAN. set the following: - Name: RTC IP Address - Type: IP Address - Code: 129 Click OK. Value: MITEL IP PHONE. set the following: 148 - Name: Priority - Type: Hex LONG . Click OK. In the Option Type window. - Name: VLAN ID - Type: Hex LONG (32 bit word) - Code: 132 Click OK. 5. (Optional) In the Option Type window. If you are not using VLANs. In the Option Type window. do ALL of the following steps. Upgrade the SX-200 ICP to Release 4. In Action. Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server (Release 4. In the New Class dialog box. 6.0 and later) Note: Neither Windows 2000 nor Windows 2003 support DHCP options 124/125. then click Define Vendor Classes followed by Add. Right-click the server. Click OK. 7. In the General window. 14. 4. In the console tree. the old options may be removed to prevent future conflicts with standard use or with other vendors' use of these options.0. 8. After the upgrade. 3. 12. Type "ipphone. Note: Options 128-133 used in previous ICP releases are required to provide backward compatibility with IP sets that have yet to be upgraded with firmware that supports options 124/125 or 60/43. click Configure Options. Click OK. - Value: enter a value from 1 to 7. click the applicable DHCP server branch. Mitel recommends 0x6. To create Options 60/43 on a Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 DHCP server: 1. 9. 149 . Click OK and then click Close. Start DHCP Manager. 2. 11. Note: The server will automatically convert the numeric value to Hex. type "Mitel Vendor Class" or other name for the new option.Advanced Installation and Programming - Code: 133. Enter a null terminator (0x00) at the end of the hex string under Binary. Upgrade the IP Phone firmware. Highlight the Scope which contains the IP range for the IP Phones and select Scope Options.mitel.com" in the right side of the text box under ASCII. Click OK. select option 003 Router and enter the IP address of the default Gateway and then click Add. Options 60/43 must be used instead. 13. 5. .sw_tftp=<IP address>. 150 . 12.com.. select the Mitel Vendor Class from the Option class list.call_srv=<IP address>.l2p=<n> 15. 11.mitel. On the Action menu. In the Predefined Options and Values dialog box. • A system hostname • A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server within the Broadcast Domain.. modifying the ID string accordingly. Click OK. Name Data Type Code What to enter.CXi LAN Requirements These conditions must be met before the Layer 2 Switch can be connected to the LAN. In the Option Type dialog box. 16. 14.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 10. select 001 Mitel Option and the Option name and enter the Mitel Information Data string with the appropriate values for <IP address> and <N>: id:ipphone. or the internal Layer 2 switch of the CXi) - static IP addresses or DHCP-assigned addresses for IP phones (DHCP-assigned addressing is recommended).dscp=<N>. the APC.vlan=<N>. • A subnet with IP addresses reserved for the following: - the CXi system - the Layer 2 switch - the system gateway (a router on the LAN. Add the Mitel option to the DHCP scopes that require it. In the Predefined Options and Values dialog box. select Set Predefined Options. The conditions apply to all implementations (voice only. Requirements for IP Networking . Click OK. enter the following: Field Name.. Click Add. Mitel Option String 001 13. Both the CX and CXi include a DHCP server. and voice and data implementations). Advanced Installation and Programming • Optional: - a router or firewall on the same subnet as the CXi - up to two Layer 2 switches (unmanaged for a voice only implementation. the L2 switch of the CXi is the system gateway. PCs must have 10/100BaseTx Ethernet cards) Note: LAN traffic requires a system gateway. managed and VLAN-capable for a voice and data implementation) - SMTP server address to support e-mail forwarding - IMAP server address to support Standard Unified Messaging - DNS server address. external DHCP server information - one PC per IP phone (phones must be dual-port models. • Internet Gateway (WAN interface) IP address details. If the LAN port connects directly to a single subnet. The conditions do not apply if the Internet Gateway is left disconnected. program one of the following address assignment methods: Static address assignment - IP address - Subnet Mask - Default Gateway DHCP address assignment - Client name (as required by ISP) - Client ID or MAC address (as required by ISP) PPPoE address assignment - User name - Password 151 . • System option 83 (Internet Gateway) must be enabled in CDE Form 04. If the LAN port connects to a router leading to additional subnets. the router is the system gateway. WAN Requirements These conditions must be met before the Internet Gateway of the CXi can be connected to the Internet. Integrating the system into a data network probably requires changes to the CXi or to devices that are already deployed in order to prevent addressing conflicts. No changes to the defaults should be necessary when integrating the system into a voice-only network.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook • (Optional) Port Forwarding details—i. Default Controller IP Addresses The IP addressing information for the SX-200 ICP is set at the factory (see the illustration and tables below).. Figure 15: Default IP Addresses 152 . list of IP address and port number for services on internal network that are to be made available to external network.e. 192.1.1 (same as Layer 2) If there is only one subnetwork on the LAN.1. 153 . If there are multiple subnets. The Layer 2 Switch IP address must be on the same subnet as the System IP address.2 that provides call control functionality for IP phones. It can also support the optional APC.1 Layer 2 switch on LAN interface As above. Before connecting the CXi to the LAN. enter the IP address of the CXi's Layer 2 Switch. enter the IP address of the router connected to the local subnet. Also provides management access to the system. change one or both addresses.168. (May require programming the CXi with address in a new subnet.168. or the IP address of the APC (if installed). PPPoE. System IP Network location point 192. allowing connection to the Internet System Default gateway to Gateway IP other internal networks on the LAN. or static assignment. • Capable of VLAN prioritization • Default System Gateway IP address. confirm that the IP address for this interface does not conflict with an IP address assigned to another device on the LAN.1.168.) Layer 2 Switch IP • Provides 16 port 192.Advanced Installation and Programming Table 25: Network Interface Defaults Interface Name Internet Gateway Function Default • Provides access to DHCP client Internet through WAN interface • Provides NAT redirect and firewall functionality Programming Requirements This interface can receive its IP address by DHCP. If it does. Use System Option 83 in Form 04 to enable the Internet Gateway. 255.250 DHCP Options Option # Option Name Value 3 Router 192.1 125 Vendor Specific ASCII string.2 130 DHCP Server Identifier MITEL IP PHONE 132 VLAN ID 1 133 VLAN Priority 6 134 DiffServ Code Point 44 (upgrades) 46 (new installations) 154 .mitel.1.2 129 SX-200 ICP IP Address 192.168.1.100 192.255.0 128 IP Phone TFTP Server 192.001.1.000 192.000 255. Old options 128 133 are replaced by tags included in the configuration string: id:ipphone.168.168.168.001.com TFTP Server = sw_tftp SX-200 IP Addr = call srv VLAN ID = vlan VLAN Priority = l2p DHCP Options prior to Release 4.168.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook f Table 26: Internal DHCP Server Defaults Subnet IP Network Mask Range (Scope) 192.1.168. 155 .37.call_srv=10.dscp=46 4.mitel. If a separate Voice VLAN is required.10. Options 132 and 133 are required for voice and data implementations. If only one VLAN is required.11.com. use the Voice VLAN settings from Form 47 (IP Networking). If using an external DHCP server. disable the one in the CX/CXi and program the external one with the settings from the above table.37.189.vlan=1056.Advanced Installation and Programming Notes: 1.11.0 and later. VLAN tagging is controlled in Option 125 (or Option 43) data string using the “vlan” and “l2p” tags. Prior to Release 4.37. the default data string is as follows: id:ipphone.sw_tftp=10.l2p=6. For Release 4.0. 3. use the default settings. 2.190.189. Subform 01 (System IP).1 1. The internal DHCP server on the CX/CXi is enabled by default. For DHCP Option 125. connect a customer-supplied Layer 2 switch to the 10/100/1G LAN port. see page 55. To increase line size. If required. Follow the instructions for “Updating the System IP Information” on page 159 to confirm that the defaults are programmed.) 156 .3af) on the CXi. (For more information on system expansion. connect a second switch to the first to expand to expand system capacity to 64 lines.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Implementing a Voice-Only Network In a voice-only network. simply plug up to 16 IP phones into the internal Layer 2 switch ports (marked 10/100 802. IP telephony devices are the only devices connected to the controller’s network interfaces. Figure 16: Typical Voice-Only Network (CXi) Programming Requirements No changes to the controller’s default IP settings (Form 47) are required for a voice-only network. ) PCs are shown connected to the network two ways: direct to the Layer 2 switch and indirectly through a dual-port IP Phone. It uses the WAN interface to connect to the Internet. Figure 17 shows a typical voice-data network. such customers could use their existing DHCP server to service devices connected to the controller. Although not shown. A router plugged into a Layer 2 port on the controller provides an alternate path to the Internet for customers that already have Internet access on their data network. A single 48-port switch can also be used. (For more information on system expansion. The indirect method is discussed on page 170. Figure 17: Typical Voice and Data Network (CXi) 157 . (The server in the controller would be disabled since it’s not needed. see page 55.Advanced Installation and Programming Implementing a Voice and Data Network A voice and data network uses the controller’s network interfaces to provide services for IP phones and PCs plus a firewall-protected connection to the Internet.) The 10/100/1G LAN port in the illustration is connected to a pair of Layer 2 switches. Two 24-port switches daisy chained together expand the system to its maximum 64-port capacity. (This setup allows the VLAN-capable switches to provide the same VLAN prioritization services as the internal Layer 2 switch on the CXi. 5020. make sure to disable the DHCP server in the controller. See “Enabling the (2nd) Port on IP Phones” on page 170. For programming instructions. See “Using a Remote DHCP Server” on page 166. If another VLAN-capable switch is connected to the first. disable the one in the controller. program its uplink port to send and receive tagged packets on the Voice VLAN. For programming instructions. enable VLAN tagging on port 17. See “Using a Remote DHCP Server” on page 166.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Configuration Requirements Controller • Internet Gateway (WAN port) The address assignment must be specified (PPPoE. to allow for traffic between the local and remote subnets. or static). • DHCP Server The default address information and options may need changing if installing the controller on a network with multiple subnets. Also. Other network devices • Dual-port IP Phones (5010.) 158 . If using an external DHCP server. and to ensure quality of service for phone calls with VLAN prioritization. On the controller. DHCP client. see “Updating the System IP Information” on page 159. “Programming the Firewall on the Internet Gateway” on page 168 and “Programming Port Forwarding on the Internet Gateway” on page 169 • Layer 2 switch Updates may be required to prevent IP address conflicts. • External Layer 2 Switches If a VLAN-capable switch is connected to the 10/100/1G port. and make sure that it treats Voice VLAN packets with the highest priority. • External DHCP Server If using an external DHCP server. 5220 or 5224) Activation of the 2nd port requires System and Class of Service options. 5215. 5212. and the firewall programmed. program it with the same settings. make sure that it is programmed to provide addresses and options to all devices that require them. see “Programming the Internal Layer 2 Switch” on page 164. or if using a separate Voice VLAN in addition to the default VLAN. 1. System Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the default gateway to the Internet. Default is 192. FTP Password Password used to access the FTP server.168. enter the IP address of the CXi's Layer 2 Switch. If there are multiple subnets. program the following parameters: Parameter Value Required System IP Address Provides call control functionality and management access to the system. Default is 192.1. (Page 1 of 2) 159 . or the IP address of the APC (if installed). In all cases. FTP Server IP address of the FTP server used to install software in the controller or to upload Maintenance logs and database backups/restores. Hostname System hostname. enter the IP address of the router connected to the local subnet.1. Program its IP address as the System Gateway IP on the CXi. designate it as the default gateway to other networks.0.255.168. FTP Username Name used to access the FTP server. which is required for e-mail notification.Advanced Installation and Programming • Router If a router is connected to the local internal network. IP Network Configuration Procedures Updating the System IP Information • In Form 47 (IP Networking). DHCP server option 3 should be the same as the System Gateway IP to ensure that all DHCP clients use the proper default gateway. Default is 192. If there is only one subnetwork on the LAN.255. Subform 01 (System IP).1. System Netmask Network mask of the management IP address. It must be a valid domain name that has been registered in your DNS or listed in your e-mail server's Hosts file. Default is 255.2.1. L2 Switch IP Address IP address of the Layer 2 switch on the LAN interface of the CXi.168. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Parameter Value Required DiffServe Code Point The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) enables the switch to give precedence to traffic originating on the Voice VLAN. The default Voice VLAN ID is 1. L2 Switch IP. 2. 4. This value should match the Voice VLAN ID programmed on external L2 switches as well as the value programmed for DHCP Option 132.64. IP configuration settings (IP addresses and FTP server address) return to their defaults when an initial software installation is performed. The System IP. The default Voice VLAN priority is 6. Voice VLAN Priority Enter the Voice VLAN priority (0-7) for traffic that belongs to the Voice VLAN (voice packets from Mitel IP Phones). (Page 2 of 2) Notes: 1. If you program a new System IP Address. The System IP and L2 Switch IP addresses must not be in the subnet range specified in Form 47. Enter a numeric value from 1 . This value should match the Voice VLAN priority programmed on external L2 switches as well as the value programmed for DHCP Option 133. 5.0 or later. or System Gateway IP. and 44 if upgrading from R2. IP configuration data is retained when moving the internal media (CompactFlash or hard drive) and System ID or i-Button from one controller to another.2 or earlier to R3. 3. 160 . IP Phones receive the DSCP with DHCP option 134. The default is 46 for new installations. System Netmask. DHCP Parameters. Voice VLAN ID Enter the Voice VLAN ID (1-4093) of the embedded L2 switch ports. Reset the system after changing System IP Address. and System Gateway IP addresses must be on the same internal subnet. use it to access the system over Ethernet. Select the new DHCP subnet. IP ADDRESS IP address of the subnet served by the DHCP server. or months. In Form 47 (IP Networking). 2. “Internal DHCP Server Defaults. press ADD and program the following parameters: Parameter Value Required SUBNET NAME Name of the DHCP subnet. Subform 02 (DHCP Server). Select NEW RANGE or NEW STATIC. weeks. Once programmed. Add the DHCP address range or static IP address 1.” on page 154. Name Name of this DHCP client IP address IP address. No) Lease Time (minimum 30 minutes) Lease time in minutes. IP phones and PCs located on the same LAN subnet as the controller will obtain IP addresses from its DHCP server. STATIC IP ADDRESS RANGE 3. Range Start Starting IP address. 161 . address ranges and static IP addresses. The internal DHCP server is enabled by default with options that apply to all DHCP subnets.Advanced Installation and Programming Using the Local DHCP Server Use this procedure to program the LAN interface on the controller with DHCP addresses. see Table 26. then press the EXPAND softkey. and program the following parameters: Parameter Value Required Name Name of the DHCP address range. hours. Do not enter both values. BIT MASK the Bit Mask (subnet mask) of the subnet served by the DHCP server. days. MAC Address or Client ID MAC address or Client ID of this DHCP client. Range End Ending IP address Clients Class ID must match name Yes or No (Default. For a list of default settings. For a new network. 132-VLAN ID 1 133-VLAN Priority 6 134-DiffServ Code Point 44 (upgrade installation) 46 (new installation) . Subform 02 (DHCP Server). encompasses previous Options 128 . • In Form 47 (IP Networking). which will resolve names in the Internet DNS system provided that the WAN port is enabled. 6-Domain Name Server For an existing network that already has DNS server(s). enter the L2 Switch IP Address of the CXi. press the COMMON OPT softkey and program the following options: Option Value Required 3-Router Enter the IP address of the default gateway to the Internet.0 162 128-IP Phone TFTP Server System IP Address of the controller 129-IP Phone service provider System IP Address of the controller 130-Mitel Identifier MITEL IP PHONE (all caps). enter their IP addresses (use a comma or space to separate multiple entries). or other vendors' use of these options.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Program the DHCP common (global) options DHCP options 128-133 used to configure Mitel IP endpoints have been reclassified as public options by the Internet Engineering Task Force (see RFC 2133 and RFC 3925). After the upgrade. the old options may be removed to prevent future conflicts with standard use. (The embedded server supports both options with 125 as the default. which can either be the CXi itself (L2 Switch IP). To comply with the change. a router on the LAN. Mitel uses options 125 or 43 depending on the server's ability to support them and on administrator preference. 125-Vendor Specific All Mitel-specific configuration information.133 DHCP options prior to Release 4.) The old options can still be used to provide backward compatibility with IP sets that have yet to be upgraded with firmware that supports the new options. or the Application Procesor Card (if installed). Subform 01 (System IP). enter values that match the Voice VLAN ID and Priority programmed in Form 47. RANGE OPTions for an address range. Options 132 and 133 control VLAN tagging for voice packets (packets from Mitel IP phones). or STATIC OPTions for a static IP address.0. For Release 4. the default values can be used. In addition to programming COMMON OPTions that apply to all DHCP subnets. 2. If only one VLAN is required. you can also program SUBNET OPTions for a subnet. But if a separate Voice VLAN is required.0 and later. and are required for voice and data implementations. For releases prior to Rel 4. VLAN tagging is controlled in Option 125 (or Option 43) data string using the “vlan” and “l2p” tags 163 .Advanced Installation and Programming Notes: 1. Speed Sets port speed . When disabled. Port 17 (labeled 10/100/1G LAN) does not support PoE. Note: The user should fully understand RSTP before updating this parameter. For details refer to the Engineering Guidelines. Subform 03 (L2 Switch). Power over Ethernet 164 The PoE mode. Default is Disabled IGMP Snooping When IGMP Snooping is enabled (the default). In Form 47 (IP Networking). Update the Layer 2 switch port settings as required by pressing ETHER PORTS. DISABLE FLOW (disables flow control for the port). The default value is 15 (61440). 10. Flow Control AUTO FLOW (default. Default is Disabled.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Programming the Internal Layer 2 Switch 1. . either AUTO (automatically negotiated) or disabled. The switch with the lowest value has the highest priority and is the root. multicast frames are sent only to devices that request them. Note that PoE can be left enabled even if the connected device does not require PoE support. and programming the following parameters: Parameter Function/Values State Enables/disables the port. packets that do not already belong to the Voice Trunk Port (17) VLAN (non-default VLAN) will be tagged with VLAN ID 1 and priority 0. HALF DUPLEX (transmits in one direction at a time).AUTO (default). program the following parameters: Parameter Function/Values Tag VLAN 1 on If enabled. Enable only if a VLAN-capable switch is connected to the port. FULL DUPLEX (allows simultaneous transmission in both directions). 2. ENABLE FLOW (forces the port to use flow control). multicast frames are sent to all devices. STP Bridge Priority [0-15] (*4096) Use this parameter to identify the root of the spanning tree. 100. Duplex Mode AUTO DUPLEX (default. or 1000 (port 17 only) Mbps. Ports 1 to 16 default to AUTO. mode negotiated between the two endpoints). flow control negotiated between the two endpoints). Rapid Enable RTSP if multiple Ethernet connections are being Spanning Tree used to connect the internal L2 switch to external IP (RSTP) device. if a router is connected to the the local internal network. designate it as the default gateway to other local area networks. This process enables the hosts to dynamically discover the CXi and other routers on the network. Program its IP address as the system gateway IP address on the CXi. 2. disable the Router Discovery Protocol on the CXi. For port 17 (the 1G port). Do not connect a Layer 2 switch to the 10/100 802.Advanced Installation and Programming Notes: 1. Use AUTO for Speed. it may also be necessary to configure the CXi with a Network List containing routes to destination networks on the LAN.3af ports of the CXi. program manual settings only if auto-negotiation fails. and Flow Control. or AUTO (1000 Mbps is always auto-negotiated). and to switch to a backup router in the event of a network failure. • In Form 47 (IP Networking). Programming Router Controls If the LAN is divided into multiple segments. 3. the CXi can be programmed as an ICMP router discovery server. Speed can be set to 10. 165 . it exchanges "ICMP Router Discovery" messages with hosts on the network. If an external router is present on the LAN. or 100. Subform 04 (Routing) - Enable or disable ICMP ROUTER DISCOVER SERVER. - Add or remove routes in the Network List as required. Alternately. In addition to enabling the ICMP router discovery server. In this role. There is a slight delay (10 to 15 seconds) before configuration changes take effect. Duplex. Doing so may cause a loop because these ports do not support the spanning tree algorithm. 125 Vendor Specific ASCII string All Mitel-specific configuration information. Global 129 IP Phone service provider IP Address Enter the IP address of the L2 Switch on the controller. Global 6 Domain Name Server For an existing network that already has DNS server(s). Subform 02 (DHCP Server): - Disable the internal DHCP server. Windows NT or Windows 2000 server) to support a DHCP address range. enter their IP addresses (use a comma or space to separate multiple entries). a router on LAN. 43 Vendor Specific (NEW for Release 4. encompasses previous Options 128 .0) ASCII string All non Mitel-specific (and Mitel-specific that must be manually entered) configuration information. N/A 130 DHCP Server Identifier ASCII MITEL IP PHONE (all caps) Global 132 VLAN Identifier Hex Long 1 Global 133 VLAN Priority Hex Long 6 Global 134 DiffServ Code Point Numeric 44 (upgrade installation) 46 (new installation) Global 166 . encompasses previous Options 128 . In Form 47 (IP Networking). - Add the following options to the external DHCP server: ID Name Format Value Scope 3 Router IP Address Enter the default gateway IP address: the L2 Switch IP of CXi. For a new network. Once programmed. enter the L2 Switch IP Address of the CXi. 1. 128 TFTP Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the L2 Switch on the controller.133.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Using a Remote DHCP Server Use this procedure to program an external DHCP server (for example.133. which will resolve names in the Internet DNS system provided that the WAN port is enabled. IP phones and PCs will obtain IP addresses from the external DHCP server rather than the CXi controller. or the APC. Delete Options 128 . Note: IP sets require a firmware upgrade to support the new DHCP options introduced in Release 4. Options 132 and 133 control VLAN tagging for voice packets (packets from Mitel IP phones). Subform 05 (Internet Gateway) - Enable WAN State. After the sets have booted. DHCP options 128 . In Form 47 (IP Networking). the default values can be used. DHCP_CFG.sw_tftp=<IP address>. Vendor Specific Information (an ASCII string that contains Mitel. OR - 125.0.133. For Release 4.133 may be removed to avoid future conflicts with standard use or with other vendors’ use. But if a separate Voice VLAN is required.vlan=<N>. For the sets to boot initially. Programming the Internet Gateway (WAN interface) • In Form 04 (System Options/System Timers) - • Enable System Option 83 (Internet Gateway). and are required for voice and data implementations.l2p=<n> 3. Subform 01 (System IP). STATIC IP. All three WAN IP Methods can be programmed. enter values that match the Voice VLAN ID and Priority programmed in Form 47.133 must be present in the DHCP server. DHCP CLIENT. or.mitel.dscp=<N>. Note: Prior to Release 4. VLAN tagging for voice packets is controlled in the Option 125 (or Option 43) data string using the “vlan” and “l2p” tags. - Program a WAN IP Method by selecting the PPPoE_CFG. select APC. Program your DHCP server with the following new DHCP options: - 43. Vendor Specific Information (an ASCII string that contains Mitel-specific options that you will enter using a form).0. but only one WAN IP Method can be enabled. and later.0. if the controller contains an Application Processor Card.and non MItel-specific options that you will enter manually). - Select a WAN IP Method — PPPoE. Data string format for the new options is as follows: id:ipphone. Options 128 . 167 . If only one VLAN is required.call_srv=<IP address>.com.Advanced Installation and Programming 2. or STATIC_CFG softkey. otherwise the sets will fail to boot. or through any other interface that performs NAT. Subform 06 (Firewall). Programming the Firewall on the Internet Gateway • In Form 47 (IP Networking). (Page 1 of 2) 168 . Program the Internet connectivity settings (static IP. then enable it again. If the CXi contains the optional APC (Managed Application Server). IP trunking is not supported through the WAN interface. 2. it may be necessary to renew the DHCP lease to obtain an IP address. program the following parameters: Parameter Function/Settings Logging State Enable/disable logging of unknown packets PPTP Pass-through Enable/disable outbound PPTP VPN tunnels to pass through the firewall. To do this.STATIC DHCP PPPoE SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Parameter Function / Value Required PPPoE Service Enables/disables PPPoE service User name PPPoE user name (provided by ISP) Password PPPoE user name (provided by ISP) Client name Client name Client ID / Ethernet Address Client ID or Ethernet (MAC) address specified by your ISP Password Authentication method: Ethernet or Client ID IP Address Static IP address of WAN interface Subnet Mask Subnet mask of WAN interface Default Gateway External default gateway address Notes: 1. 3. or DHCP client) on the MAS. enable the WAN State and select APC as the WAN IP Method. If the WAN interface is programmed as a DHCP client. disable the WAN State for the Internet Gateway. PPPoE. End Port Specify the end of the port number range on the LAN interface. press the FIREWALLTBLE softkey and program the following parameters: Parameter Function/Values Protocol Select the WAN interface protocol by pressing the TCP or UDP softkey. REJECT: Discards unknown packets and sends an “ICMP port unreachable“ error message to the sender. End Port Specify the end of the port number range on the WAN interface. • In Form 47 (IP Networking). Each entry must be for a unique protocol/port number combination on the internal Gateway (WAN interface). Start Port Specify the start of the port number range on the LAN interface. Internal IP Enter the IP address on the internal network to which the external packets are sent. Int. UDP do not log ports: User-defined list of UDP ports that not generate logs when they receive packets. (Page 2 of 2) Programming Port Forwarding on the Internet Gateway The firewall forwarding table can contain up to 40 entries. TCP do not log ports: User-defined list of TCP ports that do not generate logs when they receive packets. Start Port Specify the start of the port number range on the WAN interface. Subform 06 (Firewall). Int. Action for Unknown Packets DROP: Discards unknown packets without sending a reply to the sender.Advanced Installation and Programming Parameter Function/Settings IPSEC Enable/disable outbound IPSec VPN tunnels to pass through the firewall. 169 . 1 and the System IP is 192. punctuation. 5212. 5215.2. System Options/System Timers - Enable System Option 131.1.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Programming PPTP Remote Access Use this procedure to program the Internet Gateway as a PPTP server for a remote client on the Internet. - Dial In Username: Username that the server uses to authenticate the remote client. . and numbers (for example.1. 2. COS Define - 170 Enable Option 280. Make sure that this address is not assigned to any other devices on the LAN. if the Layer 2 Switch IP is 192. - PPTP State: Enables / Disables the PPTP server. Enabling the (2nd) Port on IP Phones The dual-port IP Phones (5010. Disabled by default. PC (2nd) Port on IP Phone.3 to the PPTP client. The characters '. ". 1.1. The characters '. and ` are invalid. - Dial In Password: Password that the server uses to authenticate the remote client. ".168. For example.168. 5220 and 5224) provide an inexpensive way to network a small number of PCs. then assign 192. PC (2nd) Port on IP Phone. IMPORTANT: To ensure optimum network performance. - PPTP LAN Client IP Address: IP address that the remote PPTP client uses on the LAN. • In Form 47 (IP Networking).168. luv2sk!). Subform 07 (PPTP Remote Access). and ` are invalid. Form 04. Form 03. DO NOT connect servers to the 2nd port on IP phones. 5020. Use a combination of upper and lower case letters. The SX-200 ICP supports end-node functionality. managed links to the Internet and is intended for larger implementations. Do not use the WAN interface of the CXi controller. For smaller implementations. which means that it can be connected to only one other node in the network. for IP trunking. The SX-200 ICP CXi supports up to 16 IP trunks on a single “virtual” IP Trunk card programmed in Bay 1. The IP trunks carry voice and signal messages through the Layer 2 switch to the WAN. 2. or any other NAT-enabled interface. Slot 6.Advanced Installation and Programming Networking Mitel IP-PBXs IP trunks allow you to interconnect multiple Mitel SX-200 ICP. 3. This configuration requires dedicated. Figure 18: IP Trunking Example 171 . The Mitel 6042 Managed VPN is recommended. Notes: 1. cable or DSL links can be used if the IP trunks are carried within IPSec VPN tunnels with traffic shaping features. SX-200 IP Nodes and 3300 ICP systems in a Wide Area Network (WAN). Voice Networking - Enter the IP Node Number and IP Address of each IP-PBX and specify the maximum number of calls allowed to each.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook SX-200 ICP Programming 1. no calls are allowed to the node. Each IP-PBX in the network must be assigned a unique IP Node Number. If you want to capture incoming SMDR.255. 2. ANI/DNI/CLASS Trunk It is also recommended that you enable COS option 702 to prevent calls from being denied access to trunks when the SMDR output is stopped. Note: COS number 7 has the default IP Trunk settings. The example below shows the Form 48 programming for a network of three IP-PBXs. the other sites have no Bay association. The local site is always Bay 1. Form 48. MAX CALLS must be greater than zero (the default). Notes: 1. which can be any number in the range 1 . Limited Wait For Dial Tone - 811. Form 03. 2. otherwise. Each IP-PBX (node) has a unique IP Node number that all the other IP-PBXs must have in their programming. COS Define - - Enable the following COS options - 801. 172 . Incoming Trunk Call Rotary - 802. enable COS options 806 and 814. In Form 13. ARS: Modified Digit Table. Program another entry with CPN disabled for internal network calls. Dial-in Trunks - In the CDN field. program the following Forms: - Form 26. Trunk Groups - All IP Trunks must be programmed in the same group. 8. 4. program a modified digit entry with CPN enabled for external calls (calls destined to the PSTN through the embedded PRI). If selecting another descriptor. 173 . If the connection to the PSTN is through embedded PRI (Dual T1/E1 Framer or T1/E1 Combo module). Calling Party Number Form 19. Form 16. System Options/System Timers. - Form 22. 7. for all SX-200 ICP controllers in the network. Route Definition - Program route definitions - In the Show IP subform. To avoid collisions with incoming IP trunk calls. program Calling Party Number (CPN) substitution in the following Forms - Form 54. specify the routes of IP Trunk Groups. Form 23. Form 15.Advanced Installation and Programming 3. enter the descriptor number that defines the T1 E&M trunk specified in Form 13. 5. Descriptor 7 in the default database has the correct settings for IP trunks. enter the trunks into the group in the opposite order that the far end has them entered. ARS: Digit Strings. set options to the default values. Trunk Circuit Descriptors - Set a descriptor to T1 E&M in the Options subform. If you have not already done so. to allow Calling Name and Number to be transmitted over IP trunks.QSIG. PRI Card . Call Rerouting Table Form 22. 9. ARS: Modified Digit Table Note: In Form 22. except: set Incoming Start Type to WINK set Outgoing Start Type to WINK set QSIG Supplementary Services to YES set DTMF to NO. 6. enable option 86. In Form 04. On each node. you can configure the nodes in your network with a uniform numbering plan. 1. Feature Access Codes - Program the Node ID (Feature 34). For example.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Uniform Numbering Plan Optionally. Form 13. Trunk Circuit Descriptors - Set Present Node ID over IP Trunking to YES in the Options subform. and C to share extensions 1000 to 1999. 3. 2. you can program nodes A. 174 . This eliminates the need for users to insert digits when they return external calls from other nodes. Form 02. B. program ARS leading digits containing node numbers for all other nodes in the network. Chapter 5 Routine Maintenance . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 176 . Routine Maintenance Is the system healthy? System health checklist LEDs on controller and expansion units are the correct color Internal and external calls can be made from IP phones and ONS sets Voice mailboxes are accessible Users have user guides for their phones Database is backed up 177 . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Checking the System 1. Ensure that remote system access is set up if you plan to perform remote programming. 2. Call into the system on all line types and ensure that incoming calls ring (if programmed) the correct destination. Check the controller and expansion units. 6. Review voice mail programming. Ensure the external call forwarding permissions are set correctly. See “Performing Backups” on page 185. Make calls to phones and check that they forward to voice mail. 3. See “Checking the Status LEDs” on page 217. Ensure that all LEDs indications are correct. Make internal and external calls from the IP phones and analog sets. See “Secure Telnet Connection to the Controller” on page 71. 178 . 7. Ensure that you have made recent backups. 5. 4. • Conductive packages (antistatic packaging) should be grounded prior to opening them to remove the contents. Handle PCB cards only by the edges and avoid contact with any exposed electrical connections. These cards are identified with appropriate warnings on their faceplates. Place suspected faulty cards in conductive packages to prevent further possible damage to the cards. To power it up or down. Cards that are not correctly packed in antistatic packaging when returned will not be covered by any warranty. prior to removing the card and inserting it into the equipment. particularly when handling PCB cards or using test equipment to measure voltages. Precautions Observe the following precautions when working on the system. Powering the Controller Up or Down The controller does not have a power switch. 179 . Or switch power to the outlet on or off. Power must be OFF when inserting or removing cards. • Always wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling printed circuit cards. but maintain the ground connections to the equipment. connect or disconnect the power cord from controller or the wall outlet. and similarly grounded prior to placing a card in the package. Use proper fitting Phillips screwdrivers (#1 or #2) to prevent damaging components and fasteners. When removing a new card from its package. • When installing or replacing PCB cards turn power off.Routine Maintenance Installing FRUs Only persons who have successfully completed a Mitel Installation and Maintenance training course for the SX-200 ICP should perform removal and replacement procedures. touch the package to the cabinet frame first to release any static voltage buildup. WARNING:INSTRUCTIONS MUST BE FOLLOWED EXPLICITLY WHEN THEY INVOLVE WORK WITH AND CHANGES TO THE PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY OF THE UNIT. or press the Reset button. unplug the power cord. To return the system to service: • 180 Unplug it and plug it in again. it stops all call processing activity. Shutdown terminates all calls (except calls between IP phones or calls carried on IP trunks) and disables the serial and IP interfaces.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook System Reset The controller can be reset by: • pressing the Reset button on the front panel • using the RESTART_SYSTEM command from the Maintenance terminal • powering the controller down then back up When the system is reset. System Shutdown A System Shutdown is required before moving the controller or replacing hardware in it. . 2. It also reloads software from the external CompactFlash card if it detects that the card was removed." Then. CAUTION: Resetting the system drops all calls in progress. and then reinserted. CAUTION: The following procedure takes the system out of service. wait for this message to display: "System shutdown complete. do it during periods of low or no call traffic. runs initialization tests. Log into the Maintenance Terminal (serial connection only) and begin a Maintenance session. To shut down the system: 1. Press the following softkeys: RE_START SHUTDOWN ENTER After entering the command. If a reset is required. Use an FTP server to download the software and database to the controller. see “Upgrading by FTP” on page 191. or previously backed up database. For instructions. For instructions. see “Installing Controller Software Using an External CompactFlash Card (Optional Initial Install)” on page 48. from the external CompactFlash card.Routine Maintenance Re-initializing the Controller Re-initializing the controller re-installs the system software and database. You can re-initialize the controller two ways: 1. Perform a re-initialization to recover from a failed attempt to upgrade the system software or to return an unstable system to a known state. 181 . 2. IMPORTANT: Re-initializing a working system with a database that has different IP addressing information than the database it is replacing will force the IP Phones to reboot. The phones take 10 to 15 minutes to return to service once the system is re-initialized. Re-install the software and a new. then slide the bracket forward and remove it. If replacing the CompactFlash card. perform an Initial (CompactFlash Card) installation from the software CD. 182 . see page 48 for instructions. If replacing the system hard drive or the CompactFlash card (not the APC hard drive). select Custom to install a backup of the original database (if available). 5. and then skip to step 6. Remove the cover.” Note: Use Mitel-provided CompactFlash cards and hard drives only. (If the bracket was removed. Unplug the power cord from the controller. If replacing the hard drive. 1. see page 30 for instructions. 6. Remove the screws connecting the bracket to the back of the controller. Replace the cover. those obtained elsewhere are not supported. d. remove it. 8. install the new one. 3. “Installing an optional system hard drive. To upgrade from a CompactFlash card to a hard drive in a working system. Note: When prompted for a database. re-install it and secure it to the back of the controller). a. b.) c. (Removal is unnecessary if the drive is installed in the upper bracket position. Connect the ribbon cable and power cable to the new hard drive.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Replacing the Hard Drive or CompactFlash Use these procedures to replace faulty internal media. 4. 2. Unplug the ribbon cable and the power cable from the old hard drive. follow the procedure on page 39. Remove the external CompactFlash card. 7. Restore power to the controller. Replace the drive with the new one and secure it to the bracket. Note: Ensure that the jumpers on the new drive are set to the Master setting. if inserted. Ignore this connector when connecting AMB version 3 to CX controller. Reconnect the cables. 3. Remove the cover. 1. Remove the screw that secures the faceplate to the back panel of the controller. first loosen the connector as shown in the illustrations on page 32. 4. 183 . Insert the new board. Disconnect the cables on the Analog Option Board (if installed) and Analog Main Board. 7. 5. Slide the Analog Main Board out of the controller. 8. Replace the Analog Option Board (if previously removed). 6. Unplug the power cord from the controller. Note: AMB version 3 has an extra connector on the back of the board. 2.Routine Maintenance Replacing the Analog Main Board (AMB) Note: The AMB and AOB must be the same version. To disconnect the flex cable. see page 35 • T1/E1 Combo Card. see page 47 184 . Replace faceplate screw. Other FRUs To replace the following. 10. Replace the top cover. see page 36 • Quad CIM Module. see page 38 • Stratum Clock Module. follow the installation procedure provided on the page indicated. • Analog Option Board.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 9. see page 32 • DSP Module. To back up the database: 1. If the largest remaining memory fragment is more than 500KB but less than 1MB. see “Sending Logs and other System Files to an E-mail Address or FTP Server” on page 209 for more information. and the system resets immediately. install an optional internal hard drive. For information on setting up an FTP server. and user messages) and one for IP networking settings. Note: If voicemail storage is full. not read-only).e. All databases are maintained in flash memory (or on the hard drive. greetings. If the largest memory fragment is less than 500KB. Press SYSTEM DATABASE BACKUP FTP_SERVER FULL or MEDIUM CONFIRM (enter a a file name) CONFIRM 185 . Log in to the Maintenance Terminal (direct. ensure that the FTP destination directory is writable (i. one for CDE data. Also. Mitel Technical Support may request these files if you call for assistance. An FTP server is required to back up the databases. see page 65. a critical log is generated. and password in Form 47 are correct. check that the FTP server IP address. To increase voice mail capacity on flash-based systems. one for voice mail data (includes configuration.. a major log is generated and a major alarm is raised. a critical alarm is raised. Note: Database backups do NOT include log files and trap files. or SX-200 ICP Web Interface) and begin a Maintenance session. username. if installed) inside the controller. It is recommended that you backup the database: • after the system is first installed and the database is set up • after changes have been made to the database • before any software upgrades. 2. secure Telnet. Before starting the backup.Routine Maintenance Performing Backups Backing up a database The controller has three databases. a backup can not be performed until at least some of the messages have been deleted. a major log is generated and a major alarm is raised.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook FULL backs up everything. Note: Voice mail is unavailable while the backup is progress. If the largest remaining memory fragment is more than 500KB but less than 1MB. After the database is restored. Note: If voicemail storage is full. To increase voice mail capacity on flash-based systems. Log in to the Maintenance Terminal (direct or Telnet) and begin a Maintenance session. and password in Form 47 are correct. 1. Enter the file name. The system creates a backup to the specified FTP home directory. install an optional internal hard drive. If the largest memory fragment is less than 500KB. Full backups are recommended. Before restoring. the system automatically reboots. a backup can not be performed until at least some of the messages have been deleted. the IP Phones will reboot. 186 . Press CONFIRM. 4. 3. check that the FTP server IP address. a critical alarm is raised. Press SYSTEM DATABASE RESTORE FTP_SERVER ENTER CONFIRM The system prompts you for the file name. username. a critical log is generated. Rebooting begins 10 to 15 minutes after the system resets (a reset is required following a database restore) and takes approximately two to three minutes to complete. MEDIUM excludes voice mail messages. Restoring a database IMPORTANT: If the IP addressing information in the old and new (restored) databases do not match. 2. and the system resets immediately. 187 . 2. For more information. The blank database on the CD has no programming except for the IP settings in Form 47. To install an alternate database either: • Re-install the system software and the required database to a CompactFlash card. and then use the card to re-initialize the controller. Follow the instructions on page 186 to restore the database to the controller.db file to the FTP server’s home directory. A database programmed with four-digit extension numbers is available on Mitel Online. Establish a connection between the FTP server and the controller either through the Layer 2 switch or by connecting directly to the LAN port on the controller. Copy the required . see “Installing Controller Software Using an External CompactFlash Card (Optional Initial Install)” on page 48. 3. Or • Download the database to the controller via an FTP server. Installing an alternate database via FTP Before beginning the installation.Routine Maintenance Installing an alternate database You can replace the factory default database with one of the alternates provided on the software CD or with one that was programmed on another system and saved to a file. 1. username. and password in Form 47 are correct. Check that the FTP server IP address. Note 2: If your voicemail storage is excessive.. The following table lists upgrade conditions: When upgrading to Release 4. If you are planning to use Mitel 53xx IP phones. Your current system: Rel 2 or 3 with internal hard drive .0 software WITHOUT 53xx support • FTP upgrade • Local upgrade OR • FTP upgrade (See Note 1) Rel 2 or 3 with 512MB Flash • Initial install OR Rel 2 or 3 with 256 MB Flash Not available • FTP upgrade • Local upgrade (See Note 2) • Initial install OR • Local install OR • FTP upgrade Note 1: The FTP upgrade must be done twice to deliver 53xx set support. The upgrade procedure provides a warning message in this case.this method will install Release 4. 188 .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Upgrading the System Software You can upgrade system software either from the external CompactFlash card or by FTP.0 software WITH 53xx support • Initial install OR .0. there may not be enough room to install the 53xx software..... your upgrade procedure may vary depending on your system configuration.this method will install Release 4.. Upgrading does not alter the currently installed database. Routine Maintenance Upgrading from the external CompactFlash card WARNING:THE UPGRADE PROCEDURE WILL INSTALL NEW SOFTWARE IN THE CONTROLLER. Installer's PC requirements • Windows NT/98/2000/ME/XP PC or laptop with an FTP server installed. • For serial connections, a VT100 terminal emulator (HyperTerminal) • For remote or LAN-based connections, a secure Telnet client that supports SSL/TLS (Mitel Telnet client recommended), or a web browser to access the SX-200 ICP Web Interface • A serial connection to the controller Maintenance port and/or a Network Interface Card (NIC) connected to the IP network • A CompactFlash Card Reader/Writer • CompactFlash card (use Mitel-supplied card only). • (Optional) System Option 109 - Remote Software Download in Form 04. You also need • The IP address of the controller (default 192.168.1.2) • The system software CD or access to the appropriate online resource. Note: A typical upgrade requires approximately five minutes to complete once the new software is installed and the system rebooted. Add five minutes more if installing additional voice mail language files and another 10 minutes if the upgrade includes a new load of software for the Analog Main Board. To upgrade the system from the CompactFlash card 1. Remove the external CompactFlash card from the controller (if installed). 2. Insert the CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash Reader/Writer. IMPORTANT: Use only Mitel-provided 256 MB CompactFlash cards. DO NOT partition the card and make sure that it is blank. 3. Insert the system software CD-ROM into the PC or access the file online. 189 SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 4. Run SX200ICP_SETUP.EXE from the CD. 5. Select Local Upgrade [Flash Card] Installation, then click Next. 6. Select languages for voice mail prompts if applicable. The default is English and is not selectable. 7. Select the CompactFlash Reader/Writer drive. 8. Select Format to format the CompactFlash card, then click Next. Note: When formatting the CompactFlash card, select FAT as the file system. 9. Click Finish when prompted. 10. Wait until the computer completes writing to the CompactFlash card before ejecting it. Note: To avoid ending the writing operation before it finishes, DO NOT click STOP prior to EJECT. 11. Remove the CompactFlash card from the Reader/Writer and insert it into the card slot on the front of the controller. 12. Log into the Maintenance Terminal and begin a Maintenance session. 13. Press SYSTEM RE_START RESET_SYSTEM The system boots from the CompactFlash card and installs the new software. Installation is complete when the phones are up and the LED next to the card slot turns green. 14. When prompted, log into the Maintenance Terminal in CDE mode and program all the purchased options from the MOSS sheet. (This step is not usually required for a software upgrade.) 15. Remove the external CompactFlash card when the LED adjacent to the card slot turns green. 190 Routine Maintenance Upgrading by FTP Before beginning the upgrade, check that Form 47 is programmed with the required FTP information (see “Setting up an FTP Server on a Maintenance PC” on page 65. Also, verify that the following additional requirements have been satisfied: • existing database is backed up to the PC • Remote Software Download option (System Option 109 in Form 04) has been purchased and enabled The upgrade takes about 3-4 minutes depending on the speed of the FTP connection. Double the time if installing a second language for voice mail. To upgrade the SX-200 ICP Controller software from an FTP server: 1. As a precaution, perform a full database backup; for instructions, see page 185. 2. Run SX200ICP_SETUP.EXE from the software CD or on-line source. 3. Select Remote Upgrade (FTP) Installation, and then click Next. 4. Select languages for voice mail prompts if applicable. 5. Select the FTP server home directory, then click Next twice to begin the installation. 6. Click Finish when prompted. 7. Log in to the Maintenance Terminal (direct, secure Telnet, or SX-200 ICP Web Interface) and begin a Maintenance session. 8. Press SYSTEM DATABASE UPGRADE_SW CONFIRM 9. When prompted, press ENTER to begin the upgrade. 10. If the upgrade failed, consult the Maintenance Logs for the cause. Note: If you are upgrading from a Release 2.0 or 3.0 system with internal hard drive, the FTP upgrade must be done twice to deliver 53xx set support. 191 SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Replacing IP Phones To replace a registered IP phone, you can • Replace it and retain all existing programming for that circuit, or • Replace it and re-program the circuit. Note: 5215 and 5201 IP phones will fail to register on a system that has a Default database because of the line appearances programmed on keys 8 and 10—keys that exist on the 5207 but not on the 5215 or 5201. To register these phones, first delete the line appearances in Form 09, or follow the phone replacement procedure on the next page to delete all key programming. To replace a registered IP phone and retain all programming for that circuit: • From the phone - • Dial the IP Set Replacement PIN (default ###) followed by the extension number of the phone. From the CDE terminal - Access Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments. - Select the circuit belonging to the IP phone that is to be replaced. - Press Show CESID. - Press Show MAC. - Delete the existing MAC address. - Disconnect the phone from the LAN and connect the new phone in its place. - Register the new phone by entering its MAC address in Form 09. Or Go to the phone and dial the IP Set Registration PIN (default ***) followed by the phone’s extension number. 192 Routine Maintenance To replace a registered IP phone and re-program the circuit: 1. Access Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments. 2. Delete the extension number of the IP phone that you want to replace. WARNING:IF YOU DELETE THE EXTENSION NUMBER OF A PHONE, ALL PROGRAMMED DATA FOR THAT CIRCUIT IS DELETED. 3. Assign a new extension number or reuse the old one. 4. Program the features for the IP phone. 5. Register the new phone by entering its MAC address in Form 09. Or Go to the phone and dial the IP Set Registration PIN (default ***) followed by the phone’s extension number. Restarting IP Phones Restarting the IP Phones causes them to renegotiate their DHCP settings. Restarts are automatic following a system software upgrade. IMPORTANT: Because it takes two or three minutes for the phones to return to service, limit restarts to after hours. To initiate a restart: 1. Log in to the Maintenance Terminal (direct, secure Telnet, or SX-200 ICP Web Interface) and begin a Maintenance session. 2. Press the following softkeys: RE_START IP_PHONES ENTER 193 SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Measuring LS Trunks The LS Measurement tool in Maintenance is used to test LS trunks before putting them into service. The test results determine the settings to program for optimum audio quality. Table 27: LS Measurement Tool Tests Test Line Quality Purpose Measures the loss level and impulse response of the trunk and recommends Length and Impedance settings to program in Form 13 (Audio Configuration Table subform). If Length and Impedance are set to AUTO in Form 13, the recommended settings are programmed automatically when the test is run. The test results are posted to the maintenance and software logs, and e-mailed to the address specified in Form 52 (Email). Line Length Settings: Short, Long, and Extra Long. The Extra Long setting is only valid with AMB/AOB LS trunks. It provides additional gain for signals transmitted from the CO to the ICP but not for signals transmitted from the ICP to the CO. Impedance Settings: 600 Ohm, Complex, DSL, and Impedance A. Impedance A can be used to match the controller to LS lines that have loading coils. Impedance B, C, and D are listed but not yet available for use. If selected, the system defaults to 600 Ohm. Distortion Measures distortion on the line and places the result in a file on the SX-200 ICP. Run this test only when instructed to do so by Mitel Product Support. Echo Measures the echo characteristics of the line. Run this test only when instructed to do so by Mitel Product Support. 194 Routine Maintenance Notes: 1. Run the test in VT100 mode, not TTY (line interface) mode. 2. The test can be run for a single trunk, or for all trunks (three minimum). 3. The test can be immediately, or scheduled for a later time in the week. Running the Line Quality Test To run the Line Quality test: 1. Form 13 (Trunk Circuit Descriptors) - Enter the milliwatt and silence tone numbers provided by the CO. Note: If the milliwatt tone number is unknown, program a second trunk to provide milliwatt tone in Form 13 (Audio Configuration Table subform). If the silence tone number is unknown, take no action; the tone will be generated automatically. 2. Switch to Maintenance mode. 3. Use the DIAGNOSTICS > BUSY-OUT function to take the trunk(s) out of service. 4. Press DIAGNOSTICS LS_MEASURE select LINE_QUALITY (for one trunk) or BATCH_QUAL (for all trunks) Respond to the prompts to run the test. If the test is successful, the results are sent to the logs and emailed to the address specified in Form 52 (Email). 5. Switch to CDE mode. 6. Form 13 (Audio Configuration Table subform) - Use the recommended settings from the logs to program Length and Impedance for the trunk(s). Note: If Length and Impedance are set to AUTO, the settings will be programmed automatically when the test is run. 7. Return the trunk(s) to service. 195 3. Running the Echo Test To run the Echo test: 1. 4. Run the Line Quality test and program Length and Impedance for the trunk in Form 13 (Audio Configuration Table subform) 2. Press DIAGNOSTICS LS_MEASURE select DISTORTION (for one trunk) or BATCH_DIST (for all trunks) Respond to the prompts to run the test. If the test is successful. Run the Line Quality test and program Length and Impedance for the trunk in Form 13 (Audio Configuration Table subform) 2. Forward the test results to Mitel Product Support. the results are sent to the logs and emailed to the address specified in Form 52 (Email). Use the DIAGNOSTICS > BUSY-OUT function to take the trunk out of service. the results are sent to the logs and emailed to the address specified in Form 52 (Email). Log in the Maintenance Terminal (direct or Telnet) and begin a Maintenance session. Use the DIAGNOSTICS > BUSY-OUT function to take the trunk out of service. 4. 5. 196 . If the test is successful. 5. Forward the test results to Mitel Product Support. 3.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Running the Distortion Test To run the Distortion test: 1. Press DIAGNOSTICS LS_MEASURE select ECHO_TEST (for one trunk) or BATCH_ECHO (for all trunks) Respond to the prompts to run the test. Log in the Maintenance Terminal (direct or Telnet) and begin a Maintenance session. 0. Select ENTER from the Show screen or Press ENTER at the keyboard. Start all maintenance sequences from the Maintenance screen. and then selecting another softkey from the subsequent menu. • Host name or IP address of SX-200 ICP controller. 3. or 9600 (default). Select TIME from the Show screen. Press the CANCEL softkey at any time to exit the current operation without committing (saving) any changes. both the SX-200 ICP controller and the PC must be connected to the network.0. Entering Command Sequences Maintenance commands are entered by selecting a softkey from a menu. 4. At the end of a command sequence. For example. when it is available. Baud rates: 300. Select SYSTEM from the Maintenance screen. 4800. or press the ENTER softkey. to commit changes or initiate an activity. Press the DELETE key to delete the most recently entered softkey or device number. Telnet Requirements • For remote access over a TCP/IP network such as the Internet or the LAN. 2. Select SHOW from the System screen.Routine Maintenance Maintenance Commands Maintenance Port Characteristics 8 bits/1 start/1 stop/no parity.1 or later recommended). 600. Remote connections require a secure Telnet client that supports SSL/TLS (Mitel Telnet client version 1. Maintenance commands do not require the ESC sequence used with CDE commands. 197 . to show time: 1. 1200. or a web browser (Internet Explorer 6 or Mozilla Firefox) to access the SX-200 ICP Web Interface. Connect to the controller through TCP port number 2000. press ENTER. 2400. SX-200 ICP Web Interface Connection: 1.’ 4.’ 4. 5. 6. Select a Terminal Type. Enter your username and password. Select 1 . and then follow the prompts. to open a connection from a Mitel Telnet client. Log in to the SX-200 ICP Web Interface with login name ‘installer’ and default password ‘1000. 6.2 2000 3. Select 1 . Select a Terminal Type.MAINTENANCE. 5. Log in to the application with your username and password. 2.33. 3. 5. and port 2000—for example. 2. Launch the terminal or terminal emulator.118:443 3.MAINTENANCE. Select a Terminal Type.63. enter: op 192.MAINTENANCE. Press RETURN four times within 1 second.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Logging In Serial Connection: 1. Enter https://<controller IP or hostname>:443 For example. Secure Telnet Connection: 1.168.1. Log in to SSL/TLS with login name ‘installer’ and default password ‘1000. Launch the web browser. 2. 4. Log in to the application with your username and password. Enter the hostname or IP address of the controller. 198 . Launch the secure Telnet client. Select 1 . https://10. Press QUIT (softkey 6). Displaying the Card Configuration From CDE mode: - View Form 01. press TO MTCE (requires correct access level) From the top level Maintenance screen. Switching between Maintenance and CDE You can switch between the Maintenance and CDE applications without having to exit and log in again. Press key 6 (or wait for logout timer to time out). From the top level CDE Form. System Configuration From Maintenance mode: - Press: REPORTS SHOW CONFIG ALL Showing the System Identity From Maintenance mode: - Press: SYSTEM SHOW IDENTITY ENTER 199 .Routine Maintenance Logging Out 1. press TO CDE. 2. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook System Commands Table 28: System Level Functions COMMAND 1-SET PARAMETER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER 1-DATE [dd/mm/yy] 2-TIME [hh:mm] 3-PASSWORD 1-ATTENDANT 2-SUPERVISOR 3-MAINT2 4-MAINT1 7-INSTALLER 4-SPEED 1-MAINT-PORT [speed] 8-RESET_TIME 1-AFTER_N_FLTS 8-PRINTER_PORT [speed] 2-DAY/TIME 1-MONDAY 1-TIME [hh:mm] 2-TUESDAY 1-TIME [hh:mm] 3-WEDNESDAY 1-TIME [hh:mm] 4-THURSDAY 1-TIME [hh:mm] 6-FRIDAY 1-TIME [hh:mm] 7-SATURDAY 1-TIME [hh:mm] 8-SUNDAY 1-TIME [hh:mm] 9-DAILY 1-TIME [hh:mm] 3-IMMEDIATELY 9-ALARM_THRESH 2-SHOW 1-LINES 1-SYSTEM 8-CONFIRM 2-BAY (enter Bay #) 8-CONFIRM 2-TRUNKS 1-SYSTEM 8-CONFIRM 2-BAY (enter Bay #) 8-CONFIRM 3-RECEIVERS 1-SYSTEM 8-CONFIRM 2-BAY (enter Bay #) 8-CONFIRM 1-DATE 2-TIME 4-DEVICE 1-MAINT-PORT 4-DATASTN_PLID 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT 3-EXT-NUM 8-PRINTER_PORT 7-LN_APP_COUNT (Page 1 of 3) 200 . Routine Maintenance Table 28: System Level Functions (continued) COMMAND PARAMETER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER 8-RESET-TIME 9-IDENTITY 3-DATABASE 1-BACKUP 1-KERMIT 3-FTP_SERVER 2-RESTORE 1-KERMIT 3-FTP_SERVER 4-SHOW_PARAM 6-TRAP_BACKUP* 7-UPGRADE_SW 8-LOGS_BACKUP 9-SET_PARAM 1-DEFAULT 2-RETRIES 3-BLOCK_CHECK 4-RECEIVE 1-EOL_CHAR 2-8_BIT_CHAR 3-CTRL_CHAR 4-REPEAT_CHAR 6-PAD_CHAR 7-PACKET_SIZE 8-RX_TIMEOUT 9-NUM_PAD_CHAR 6-START CHAR 7-SEND DELAY 4-MONITOR 1-SMDR 2-DATA_SMDR 7-LOGS 1-MAINT_PORT 2-SYS_PRINTERS 5-SUSPEND_PRTR 7-PRINTER_PLID 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT/SCT 3-EXT-NUM 8-PRINTER_PORT 6-QUIT 7-RESUME_PRTR 7-PRINTER_PLID 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT/SCT 3-EXT-NUM 8-PRINTER_PORT (Page 2 of 3) 201 . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 28: System Level Functions (continued) COMMAND 8-RE-START PARAMETER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER 2-RESET_SYSTEM 3-IP_PHONES 7-SHUTDOWN 9-STOP 7-LOGS 0 MORE_ KEYS 1-SET_FIRMWARE 1-STATUS 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT 2-SET_TYPE 1-SS4150 2-SS4025 3-EXT_NUM 4-ALL 2-DOWNLOAD 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT 2-SET_TYPE 1-SS4150 2-SS4025 3-SS4090 3-EXT_NUM 4-ALL 3 ABORT_DOWNLOAD 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT 2-SET_TYPE 1-SS4150 2-SS4025 3-SS4090 3-EXT_NUM 4-ALL 4-FORCE_DOWNLOAD 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT 2-SET_TYPE 1-SS4150 2-SS4025 3-SS4090 3-EXT_NUM 4-ALL 2-UPGRADE_BOOT 3-PING (Page 3 of 3) 202 . Routine Maintenance Report Commands Table 29: Report Level Functions COMMAND 2-SHOW PARAMETER 1-CONFIG QUALIFIER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT 3-EXT-NUM [number] 4-ALL 2-ALARMS 2-DEVICE TYPE 1-LINES 2-TRUNKS 3-RECEIVERS 4-BAY 3-STATUS 4-ALL 0-MORE 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT DEVICE STATUS See Note 2-SWID 1-SW_STATION See Note 2-SW_RECEIVER See Note 3-SW_CONSOLE See Note 4-SW_LINE See Note 6-SW_DTMF_GEN See Note 7-SW_SET See Note 9-SW_DATA_STN See Note 0-MORE_KEYS 1-SW_CO_TRUNK 2-SW_DID_TRUNK 3-SW_TIE_TRUNK 4-SW_DISA_TRUNK 6-SW_CAP 7-SW_TRUNK_GRP 8-SW_HUNT_GRP 0-MORE_KEYS 3-EXT-NUM [number] 4-ALL 1-CP_DWA 2-CP_DWA_MEM 3-LINK STATUS 6-MT_DWA (Page 1 of 2) 203 . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 29: Report Level Functions (continued) COMMAND PARAMETER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER 7-MT_DWA_MEM 8-UP_1_PAGE 9-DOWN_1_PAGE 7-POE STATUS 8-VOICEMAIL 9-IP_TRUNKS 6-CHANNEL-MAP 1-LOGICAL 1-CHANNEL NUM 2-PHYSICAL 1-BAY_NUM 2-DEVICE_TYPE 3-DIGITAL_SETS 2-LINK_NUMBER 7-ERRORS 4-HDLC 6-DATASETS 7-CONSOLE 9-T1_TRUNK 3-CLEAR 7-ERRORS 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT 2-DEVICE_TYPE 3-DIGITAL_SETS 4-HDLC 6-DATASETS 7-CONSOLE 9-T1_TRUNK 3-EXT-NUM 4-ALL 8-CONFIRM 6-QUIT (Page 2 of 2) Note: The following softkeys are presented when a SWID selection is made: 1-CP_DWA. 7-MT_DWA_MEM. 3-LINK_STATUS. 6-MT_DWA. 204 . 8-UP_1_PAGE. Press CP_DWA to view the device work area for the selected device. 2-CP_DWA_MEM. 9-DOWN_1_PAGE. PERIOD 2-OFF 3-DURATION 4-AUTOPRINT 1-ON 2-OFF 7-START_TIME 8-CONDENSED 1-ON 2-OFF 2-SHOW 3-STATUS 3-PRINT 4-READ 5-IP_MEAS 1-SET 1-SAMPLE 2-PERIOD 3-DURATION 4-MAX_DELAY 2-SHOW 3-STATUS 3-PRINT 4-READ 5-TRAFFIC_MEA 7-START 8-TO_SERVER 9-STOP 9-STOP 1-TRAFFIC_RPT 3-PRINT 205 .Routine Maintenance Traffic Measurement Commands Table 30: Traffic Measurement Level Functions COMMAND 1-SET PARAMETER 1-UNITS QUALIFIER 1-CSS 2-ERLANGS 2. 206 .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Log Commands Table 31: Log Level Functions COMMAND 1-SET PARAMETER 4-AUTOPRINT QUALIFIER 1-ON 2-OFF 2-READ 1-NEWEST [number] 2-OLDEST [number] 4-ALL 8-LOGS_TEXT* 9-TRACE_INFO* 3-PRINT 1-NEWEST [number] 2-OLDEST [number] 4-ALL 8-LOGS_TEXT* 4-DELETE 1-NEWEST [number] 2-OLDEST [number] 4-ALL 9-TRACE_INFO* 6-GET_SYS_LOGS 7-TO_EMAIL 8-STOP 9-TO SERVER 8-STOP * LOGS_TEXT and TRACE_INFO are diagnostic tools that only MITEL personnel should use. Routine Maintenance Diagnostic Function Commands Table 32: Diagnostic Function Commands COMMAND PARAMETER PARAMETER 1-RANGE_B_OUT 2-CLR_FEATURE QUALIFIER BAY/SLOT/CCT/SUBCCT 1-FORWARD 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT 3-EXT_NUM 2-DO_N_DISTURB 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT 3-EXT_NUM 3-CALL_BACK 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT 3-EXT_NUM 4-ALL 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT 3-EXT_NUM 3-BUSY_OUT 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT 3-EXT-NUM 4-LS_MEASURE 1-LOSS_LEVEL BAY/SLOT/CCT mW tone number 2-IMPULSE_RESP BAY/SLOT/CCT Silence test number 3-DISTORTION BAY/SLOT/CCT 4-ECHO_TEST BAY/SLOT/CCT 5-RANGE_RTS 8-RET-TO-SVC BAY/SLOT/CCT/SUBCCT 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT 3-EXT-NUM DISC_TRUNK 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT 207 . . Establish a connection (serial or secure Telnet) to the Maintenance Terminal and begin a Maintenance session. To back up log and trap files separately using Kermit: 1. because the maintenance log entries must be copied into a text file. a secure Telnet client that supports SSL/TLS and Kermit can be used for remote connections. C:\Trap_Oct08. You can use Kermit to back up the files one at a time. HyperTerminal can be used for serial connections. 208 . You can also send them to an FTP server or e-mail address (see page 209). you can download them along with other system files using Kermit (see page page 210).g. Mitel Technical Support may request backups of these files should you call for assistance.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Backing up Log and Trap Files using Kermit The Log file and Trap file are used for troubleshooting. Your communication package must support the Kermit protocol to perform a backup. Ensure that the Kermit session is set to text mode. Or.txt) CONFIRM ENTER The system then prompts you to exit to a local Kermit session. 2. Press. SYSTEM DATABASE TRAP_BACKUP or LOGS_BACKUP ENTER (Enter a file name — e. Use WinZip® or other compression utility to open the file. program the FTP server IP Address. Logs e-mailed or uploaded an to an FTP server are compressed in a .Routine Maintenance Sending Logs and other System Files to an E-mail Address or FTP Server To send logs and other system files to an e-mail address. the recipient’s e-mail address in Form 52. program the SMTP server IP address in Form 49.tar file. and Password in Form 47. Also. Subform 01. To e-mail logs: - Press: LOGS TO_EMAIL ENTER CONFIRM To send logs to an FTP server: - LOGS TO_SERVER ENTER CONFIRM 209 . Subform 01. Email Messaging must be enabled in Form 04. The estimated size of compressed file is no more than 1MB. or listed in your SMTP e-mail server's Hosts file. Username. and System Option 81 should be set to the time zone that the SX-200 ICP is in. and the system hostname in Form 47. System Option 126.) To send logs to an FTP server. (The system hostname must be a valid domain host name registered in your DNS. HyperTerminal can be used for serial connections. To download logs and other system files using Kermit: 1..tar. Use WinZip® or other compression utility to open the file. C:\Sys_Logs_Oct08.gz extension is mandatory.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Retrieving Logs and other System Files using Kermit Use this procedure to retrieve the logs and system files via a direct or modem connection to the Maintenance port. Press. 210 .g.tar. a secure Telnet client that supports SSL/TLS and Kermit can be used for remote connections. LOGS GET_SYS_LOGS ENTER (Enter a file name—e. Maintenance Tips • Keep regular backups.gz file. Establish a serial connection to the Maintenance Terminal and begin a Maintenance session. Your communication package must support the Kermit protocol to retrieve logs and system files. The system then prompts you to exit to a local Kermit session.tar.gz) CONFIRM ENTER The . • Ensure that you record your iButton number and your MOSS number. The files are compressed in a . 2. • Record all passwords. Chapter 6 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 212 . Mitel Product Support can help you isolate minor network problems. Note: The maintenance and troubleshooting of your LAN/WAN network maintenance is the responsibility of your network provider. Go through this chapter before calling Mitel Technical Support. for more complex network problems. Mitel Product Support will escalate to Professional Services to assist you (this is a billable service). including ones for troubleshooting SX-200 ICP systems installed in a converged voice and data network. More advanced procedures.Basic Troubleshooting and Repair About this Chapter This chapter provides standard procedures for troubleshooting the most common problems in a voice-only SX-200 ICP. 213 . IMPORTANT: Please see “Contacting Mitel” on page 6 before contacting Mitel Technical Support. are provided in the next chapter. Characterize. IP Phone with display. Debug. Advanced Network Analyzer 3rd Party Monitor. Basic FTP server Mitel On Line Database Backups SX-200 ICP database Basic and Advanced Phone Debug Option IP Phones with display. To provide overall status of unit. Data on customer network. IP Trunking. Autonegotiation is preferred.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Troubleshooting Tools The table below lists the tools available to help you troubleshoot a SX-200 ICP. Table 33: Troubleshooting Tools Level Tool Name Location Function Applies to Basic Logs SX-200 ICP Maintenance Provides a history of the software logs. • Hard code connection speed and duplex mode (reboot while pressing 9). SX-200 ICP software. Basic LEDs Front of each unit. and analyze the network for: • lost packets • runts IP Phones. SX-200 ICP hardware. 214 . Allows you to: • Monitor the phone settings • Program a static IP address (see page 248). Mitel Dealers” on page 7 for the number to call). Nature of the problem. please collect the required information listed in the applicable section(s) before calling Mitel Technical Support (see “Technical Support . IP and remote IP. Layer 2 switch configuration and settings. What you were doing when the problem occurred? Troubleshooting steps taken. Your network diagram. remote IP and TDM. Troubleshooting results. etc. Mitel Technical Support is entitled to ask that devices other than Mitel telephones be disconnected from the Layer 2 switch to allow network characterization. 215 . SX-200 ICP log and trap files Alarm log details. IMPORTANT: For voice-only SX-200 ICP systems supported by technicians with Basic I & M certification. Whether the problem is between IP and IP. DHCP server configuration and settings. You will also need the additional information below before calling Technical Support: Serial number(s) of your equipment and software.Basic Troubleshooting and Repair Before you Contact Technical Support If you cannot find the source of the problem in this chapter. Restore Defaults) - Version info (Main Load. Boot Load. (The display lights up if the phone is receiving power from the Layer 2 port). Edit 802. Edit LLDP Settings.1x Settings. 2. Identify and fix each alarm. and then release the Volume Down key. From the Maintenance Terminal. Modify Static Values) - Hardware Configuration (View Current Port Setting. View detail for the following categories: - Network Parameters (View Current Values. Modify Port Setting. Diagnostics. Verify the status of the LEDs on the controller. While still pressing the Volume Up key. review the Alarm details. try plugging it into the port of a working IP Phone (isolates problem directly to phone or programming if phone fails to boot) or directly into the SX-200 ICP (do this after hours since all other phones will be out of service. DHCP Trace. - Verify the status of the port link integrity LEDs at each end of the cable. Config Teleworker) - Tools and Features (Erase PIN. 3. - Verify that proper cabling is installed between the end devices. View Static Values. Press both volume keys. 2. 216 . If the IP phone still fails.) Using the Phone Debug Option To use the debug function on IP Phones that have displays: 1.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook General Troubleshooting Steps 1. Port Options. 3. Analog Line Config) - Phone Mode (Protocol. L2Boot Load) 4. - Verify that a crossover cable was not used to connect the IP Phone to the controller instead of a straight-though cable. Press Superkey to exit the debug menu. See “Checking the Status LEDs” on page 217. View DHCP Values. Video Configuration. enter cfg (234) on the telephone key pad. For IP Phone and physical network connectivity problems: - Verify that the phone has power. PING Test. - Verify that each device transmits a link integrity pulse (LINK LED on). on 2 seconds The unit is starting up properly (seen only during the boot process). RED .two successive flashes The unit is starting up properly (seen only during the boot process).Basic Troubleshooting and Repair Checking the Status LEDs Figure 19: Controller Status LEDs (CXi controller) Note: The CXi controller is shown in Figure 12. Status LEDs and their meaning are the same for the CX controller.on solid The unit has detected an error and is being held in reset mode until the problem is corrected. 217 .on solid Unit is plugged in and operating normally.blinking The unit has detected an error during the power-on process and will attempt to reset itself. RED . RED . RED . OFF Unit is not plugged in OR Unit is faulty. Table 34: Power LED LED Status Meaning GREEN . ON/OFF (blinking) When the System Reset Button is depressed. do not remove.blinking Flash card has not been properly formatted and the platform is having difficulty accessing it. GREEN . YELLOW When the System Reset Button is depressed.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 35: External CompactFlash Card LED LED Status Meaning ORANGE . Table 37: Alarm LED LED Status Meaning RED . ORANGE. ORANGE . OFF Normal Operation 218 .on solid Flash card in use. orange and yellow. OFF Internal hard disk or CompactFlash is inactive.blinking Minor Alarm Alternating RED.blinking Critical Alarm ORANGE .blinking Major Alarm YELLOW . OFF No Flash card detected Table 36: Media Access LED LED Status Meaning ON Internal hard disk or CompactFlash is being accessed.on solid Safe to remove card. the CompactFlash/Hard Drive LED will flash between red. the CompactFlash/Hard Drive LED will flash on and off. on Data transmission/reception is at 100 Mbps (the port speed for the 10/100/1GigE LAN Port can be up to 1 Gbps).blinking Port Error Note: The 10/100 802.Basic Troubleshooting and Repair Table 38: WAN/LAN Port LEDs LED Status Meaning (All LEDs) GREEN . YELLOW .off Link is inactive. GREEN .3af LAN port LEDs indicate Ethernet status.on Link is active. GREEN . not power status.blinking Link is active and transmitting or receiving. YELLOW . 219 . If you still can’t find the problem. Display stuck at DHCP Discovery or IP address (i. fails to advance to "Enter PIN") Phone cannot connect with the DHCP server. Check for the following: • Recycle the power to reboot the phone. COR restricted or ARS incorrectly programmed. then check the route used in ARS.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Troubleshooting Phones If you cannot solve the problem using the following table. Controller not fully initialized. Table 39: Phone Connection Problems Troubleshooting Symptoms Probable Causes Corrective Action All IP Phones are not receiving power. • If it still fails call Mitel Technical Support. (Page 1 of 3) 220 . Reset the controller. Can’t make calls externally (display phone may show call barred).. • If it still fails. plug the phone directly into the Ethernet port on the SX-200 ICP. Purchase more licences Failed to reset controller following installation of new system software. Wait for the controller to fully initialize. IP Phone Licences exceeded. call Mitel Technical Support. go through the steps on page 216. Identify the numbers dialed by the user. OR Modify ARS programming to allow call. • Verify that a crossover cable was not used to connect the IP Phone to the controller instead of a straight-though cable. IP Phone won’t boot. • Try another phone. The Power LED should be solid green. OR Change the COR group number in the route assignment form. Remove the COR number from COR group table in COR assignment used in the route.e. etc. System is sending the dialing digits too fast for Telco’s receiver on the LOOP trunk. If NONE of the sets are responding. Wrong wiring.There are no error logs . Non-DID is enabled in Station Service Assignment form. MDF.Basic Troubleshooting and Repair Table 39: Phone Connection Problems Troubleshooting (continued) Symptoms Probable Causes Corrective Action Cannot make call over analog loop trunk (intermittent problem).The database is backed up Sets cannot receive DID calls. then call drops).Desktop Device Assignments . Replace the handset cord. Problem with controller. Replace the set. Check the wiring between the phone jack and the Peripheral Cabinet.No alarms . Sets take 10-12 seconds to receive incoming calls. Disable the ANI/DNIS number delivery in the trunk’s COS. Tip: You can assigned an unused COS to verify if this is the problem. Check for NMX fields in Form 15 for Valid entries. Set is not programmed. Insert a one or two second delay in ARS: Modified Digit Table (Form 22) for the route used by analog loop trunk. Circuit is manbusy. Faulty handset wire. Dialing digit conflict. Disable non-DID in the set’s COS. In CDE. Check the following forms for any potential dialing conflict: . (Page 2 of 3) 221 . Use the Maintenance DIAGNOSTICS > RET-TO-SVC command Circuit is locked out. Replace the handset.Feature Access Code . program the extension accordingly. Call Mitel Technical Support IP to IP calls OK.The program reboot is scheduled .ACD Agent Groups Problem with controller.Miscellaneous System Ports . Check for the following: . No dial tone on set. but not IP to TDM calls (rings once. Verify the wiring between the phone and the patch panel. ANI/DNIS number delivery trunk option is enabled in T1 trunk’s COS. Check each line. Enable the correct options to restore phone service and clear the MOSS alarm. Remove and replace the suspect board. See 222 . If dial tone isn’t present on all lines contact your service provider. • Listen for dial tone. and a MOSS alarm appears in the CDE forms header. • Plug a standard analog phone or test phone directly into the service provider’s line jack. See “Programming Analog Trunks” on page 106. Faulty Analog Main Board or Analog Option Board Power down the controller. Faulty programming Verify that the trunks are programmed correctly. (Page 3 of 3) Troubleshooting Analog Trunks Basic Troubleshooting Table 40: Basic Analog Trunk Troubleshooting Symptoms Probable Causes Corrective Action Unable to make any external calls or frequently unable to access an external line Service provider has not connected line Try the following: • Unplug the cable that connects the trunk to the LS trunk port on the controller. A database from another system with different MOSS options has been installed in the controller.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 39: Phone Connection Problems Troubleshooting (continued) Symptoms Probable Causes Corrective Action Phone service is lost (IP Phones display SYSTEM BUSY when they go offhook). See “Enabling MOSS Options” on page 74. This acknowledgment occurs when the calling party expects a response (Dial Tone) or when the called party needs time to establish appropriate resources (DTMF receivers). can’t handle the pace) The called party generates a signal to indicate that digits are in risk of being lost. generation of SMDR reports. etc. Busy. Digits: (who to talk with) The calling party generates the rotary pulse or DTMF. Seize Acknowledgment: (ready to receive) The called party indicates that the call can commence. This signal is for billing purposes (Hotel/Motel). Receipt of Digits: (status of call) The called party generates audible tones to indicate the status of the call (for example. 223 . Answer Supervision: (called party has answered) The called party indicates that the call has been answered. Seize: (request to make a call) The calling party initiates the call by requesting service from the called party.Basic Troubleshooting and Repair Troubleshooting Signaling Problems The following section covers problems caused by faulty trunk signaling. The actual signaling mechanism will vary with the trunk type. Stop Dial: (slow down. General Signaling & Supervision Concepts All trunks share similar basic handshaking functions. Ringback. and Reorder). Disconnect Supervision: (release and go back to idle) Either party generates this signal to indicate the termination of a call and to return the trunk to the idle condition. Figure 20: Loop Start Line/Trunk 224 .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Loop Start Trunk The Loop Start Line/Trunk serves the standard domestic applications and small businesses that have key systems and PBX applications. • Some Key/PBX systems may be polarity sensitive. 225 . Ringback dependent upon digits dialed and called party condition — Signal Stop Dial Receipt of Digits Answer Supervision Some COs can reverse current flow Tip-Ring leads activated (shorted). • Verify near-end (PBX Loop Start) circuits by connecting to a local PBX ONS circuit. 18 mA DC minimum should be drawn from the CO (typical 25-40 mA).Basic Troubleshooting and Repair Table 41: Loop Start Line/Trunk Summary Loop Start Line PBX Outgoing Loop Start Line PBX Incoming Seize Tip-Ring leads activated (shorted). 4 sec off cadence Seize Acknowledgment Loop Current and/or dial tone generated — Digits Loop Current toggled (Rotary) or DTMF — — — Audible Tones . Reorder.end termination: PBX/ Telephone can break Loop Current Test/Verify (Loop Start) • Verify far-end (CO) circuits by using a standard telephone set in place of the Loop Start trunk circuit. • Check for appropriate voltages on Tip-Ring in each call state. Loop Current flows in line 90Vac is applied to Ring lead in 2 sec on. • During off-hook condition.Busy. reverse Tip-Ring to verify. Loop Current flows in line Disconnect Supervision Near.end termination: PBX/Telephone can break Loop Current Near. choose the order of preference of clocking sources in Form 44. Figure 21: TI Trunk Synchronization Synchronization The T1 trunk establishes and maintains a connection between the two systems. - The Master-Slave arrangement defines the leader and follower. synchronization and signaling are dealt with separately. the PBX will always be a slave. a Stratum 4 (PBX) clock synchronizes to a Stratum 3 (CO/ PBX/Channel Service Unit) clock.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Troubleshooting T1 Trunks (D4 DS-1) A T1 Trunk is a digital trunking standard that supports multiple users.The higher Stratum number synchronizes to the same or lower Stratum number. For example. the T-1 hardware signaling layer is independent of trunk usage. T1 Network Sync (always choose a connection as close as possible to the defined master source clock). if connecting to a Public Network T1. - When the PBX is connecting to more than one T-1 signal. Unlike analog trunks. - The Stratum clock levels define the accuracy of the clock and the ability to match with the incoming master clock signal. Sampling clocks of each partner must be synchronized. 226 . CSU. the T1 transmits and receives pairs that can be directly connected together to physically create a loopback condition. etc.). smart jacks. Loopback modes will typically have the effect of taking the input T1 stream and transmitting the stream back to the source. ISDN. the nodes thereby verify that portion of the link. Ground Start. (off-hook. Loopback Loopback is used to verify and locate the source of either a cable or a synchronization problem through the devices in a T1 transmission path. verify all hardware connections. and E&M trunks. 227 . The Channel Associated signaling supports Loop Start. Common Channel Signaling The Handshake signaling for the first 23 channels is managed by the 24th channel. The function of each channel is decided and programmed at each end. Channel bank. DID/ Loop. on-hook.Basic Troubleshooting and Repair Signaling Types Channel Associated Signaling T1 was originally designed to emulate 24 independent analog trunks. Verify that the incoming T1 signal is seen at both ends. Signaling protocol is defined by the type of service. The Common Channel signaling allows for transmission of digital information and more advanced digital trunk applications (MITEL’s MSDN. etc.) will generally have some type of loopback mode. etc. Test/Verify (T1) Synchronization Most T1 issues are a result of connectivity problems. All handshake signaling is done with bits (A&B) taken from the bit stream which are used to emulate the various analog trunk signals. In the absence of a loopback mode. Failure at either end indicates loss of an incoming synchronizing signal. Devices in the T1 transmission path (PBX. current reversal. Bell Canada’s Megalink.). ) in either Superframe or Extended Superframe (ESF) format. Table 42: A-B Signaling States (Tie/E&M) PBX Port Type CSU Type Tie Trunk (loop start) DPO Tx DPO Rx DID or Tie Trunk (loop start) DPT Tx DPT Rx TIE Trunk E&M Tx 4wire/2 wire E&M E&M Rx 228 PBX port condition to channel Transmit A Receive B A CSU condition to analog facility B loop open 0 0 x x x loop closure 1 1 x x x x x x 0 x normal battery x x x 1 x reverse battery normal battery 0 0 x x x reverse battery 1 1 x x x x x x 0 x loop open x x x 1 x loop closure M-lead grounded or open 0 0 x x x M-lead battery 1 1 x x x x x x 0 x E-lead open x x x 1 x E-lead grounded or open . disconnect supervision.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook A&B bits Taken from each of the 24 Channels to emulate the various analog trunk signalling conditions (off-hook. etc. on-hook. Basic Operation CO disconnects PBX disconnects 229 .Basic Operation Dial pulsing Completion of dialing Incoming call .Basic Troubleshooting and Repair Table 43: A-B Bit Signaling Example (T1/CO) Transmit Receive State A B A B Idle state 0 1 1 * PBX grounds ring (wait for dial tone) 0 0 1 * CO ground tip (dial tone applied) 0 0 0 * PBX closes loop and removes ring ground 1 1 0 * DP 1 0 * 1 1 0 * Idle state 0 1 1 * CO ground tip (interval between ringing) 0 1 0 1 CO ground tip (during ringing application) 0 1 0 0 PBX presents call 0 1 0 1 PBX answers call 1 1 0 * Talking state 1 1 0 * Talking state 1 1 0 * CO removes tip ground (far end hangs up) 1 1 1 * PBX opens loop (idle) 0 1 1 * Talking state 1 1 0 * PBX opens loop (near end hangs up) 0 1 0 * CO removes tip ground (idle) 0 1 1 * Outgoing call . Delete unused mailboxes and have subscribers clean out unnecessary saved messages. use the Maintenance terminal REPORTS function. (Page 1 of 2) 230 . the operator's telephone rings and never forwards to voice mail. Set Call Forward-Busy/No Answer on the Operator's phone to forward to voice mail. When outside callers reach the auto attendant and press 0. When recording greetings and names. Notification is not enabled at the system level (see Voice Mail Options Form 49) -orCO line access is restricted for voice mail port extension numbers. Too much silence before or after a greeting or mailbox name. Check that mailbox 0 is correctly associated with the operator's extension. Check the notification phone number and pager type in Form 50. Mailboxes.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Troubleshooting Voice Mail If voice mail is not working properly. Try dialing the number from a telephone to see what happens. refer to the chart below for suggestions on corrective action. call your dealer for assistance. The system is warning that the disk space is almost full. but don't seem to work. The date and time that a message was left is incorrect. To check the amount of disk space voice mail messages are using and the status of the voice mail ports. Check the SX-200 ICP system clock. start speaking immediately after the tone and press any key as soon as you are finished. Notification calls use the correct outside lines. but the pager never beeps. If you are experiencing symptoms that are not listed here. -orNotification call number incorrectly programmed. Table 44: Voice Mail Troubleshooting Symptom/Trouble Corrective Action Notification calls are configured for a mailbox. When outside callers reach the auto attendant and press 0. either no phones ring or the incorrect phone rings. No message light exists on the phone. Verify that you have the proper access code to turn the light on by dialing it from a phone Note: The ONS/CLASS circuits in the SX-200 ICP controller do not support Message Waiting lights. Bilingual prompts enabled (System Option 121) but only one language installed.Basic Troubleshooting and Repair Table 44: Voice Mail Troubleshooting (continued) Symptom/Trouble Corrective Action Internal callers occasionally reach the Operator (or other designated overflow point for the voice mail port hunt group) when calling the auto attendant. The voice mail system has the ability to automatically reset itself in the event of a critical error. All voice mail ports are busy. Install the missing language. The SX-200 ICP also automatically resets daily at 3:00 AM. Try again later. (Page 2 of 2) 231 . Try again later. See “Installing Controller Software Using an External CompactFlash Card (Optional Initial Install)” on page 48. The message lights do not work. Prompt to “please leave a message" heard when a a busy or unanswered extension is reached repeats. The voice mail system resets itself at times. All voice mail ports are busy. Set up message notification to ring the extension number whenever messages are received. Outside callers occasionally reach the Operator (or other designated overflow point for the voice mail port hunt group) instead of the voice mail system. the customer’s PMS computer will send a string of ASCII keyboard commands to the PMS interface. to light a message waiting lamp for guest room extension number 2129. Property Management System Messages A PMS message is a string of ASCII text characters. 232 . The PMS message sent is: ^B MW 1 2129^C When the PBX’s PMS interface receives and understands the message. it will send an ACKnowledge character back to the customer’s PMS computer. • Maid and room status • Guest check-in and check-out • Guest name • Auto wake-up and message waiting • PMS related maintenance logs. For example.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook SX-200 ICP Property Management System Interface The SX-200 ICP Property Management System (PMS) interface collects and sends the following Hotel/Motel information to a customer’s PMS computer through the LAN. as follows: ____________ function code MRspace status code nnnn (nnnn is a 4-byte peg count) station number nnnnn (with trailing spaces) SX-200 ICP and PMS 5-digit Extension Number Formats The extension number is sent between the SX-200 ICP and the PMS as a 5-digit number.extension number nnnnn with leading spaces. 233 . The PMS inserts leading space(s) to indicate that no number is present ^C End Transaction ETX The CTRL (^) C character signals the end of a PMS message Message Formats from PBX to PMS Maid in Room status Maid in Room status is sent as a 10-character message. ^B Start Transaction STX The CTRL (^) B character signals the start of a PMS message M W space 1 space Function Code Status Code The MW followed by a space indicates that the PMS requests a message waiting function 1 followed by a space turns on the message waiting lamp. Numbers that are fewer than 5 digits include spaces: ICP to PMS .Basic Troubleshooting and Repair The following is a PMS message format that enables a telephone’s message waiting lamp. as follows: __________ function code STS status code n space (n is assigned room status code) station number nnnnn (with trailing spaces) Message Registration of Outgoing Trunk Calls Message Registration of Outgoing Trunk Calls status is sent as a 12-character message. 0 turns the lamp off space 2 1 2 9 Station’s Extension (Room) Number Identifies the extension number of the telephone on which the message waiting lamp lights.extension number nnnnn with trailing spaces PMS to ICP. Only the first 10 characters of the name are displayed. Use a 24-hour clock. Set Wakeup ^BWKPTTTTXXXXX^C TTTT is the time in hours:minutes. 234 ^ = CTRL key XXXXX is the 5-digit extension number (use leading spaces). followed by a single space.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 45: PMS Keyboard Commands Commands PMS Keyboard Keys Comments Enquire (ENQ) ^E Acknowledged (ACK) ^F Not Acknowledged (NAK) ^U Start Transaction (STX) ^B End Transaction (ETX) ^C Check In ^BCHK1 XXXXX^C Check Out ^BCHK0 XXXXX^C Add Name ^BNAM1 a-z XXXXX^C Replace Name ^BNAM2 a-z XXXXX^C Delete Name ^BNAM3 a-z XXXXX^C Send Message ^BMW 1 XXXXX^C Insert a space before and after the digit 1. followed by the extension number. Delete Message ^BMW 0 XXXXX^C Insert a space before and after the digit 0. a-z is the extension name. . 20 characters in length (use trailing spaces). Connect a personal computer to the converter.Basic Troubleshooting and Repair SX-200 ICP and PMS Cannot Communicate If the SX-200 ICP PMS interface and the customer’s PMS computer cannot communicate. Test the SX-200 ICP PMS interface as follows: 1. verify that all the programming and the connections are correct. • RS232-to-IP serial port converter: Use a straight-through cable between the customer’s PMS computer and the converter. Testing the PMS Interface of the PBX PMS problems typically occur in these areas: • PMS Protocol settings: Ensure that the communication parameters between the systems match. Disconnect the customer’s PMS computer from Ethernet-to-Serial converter. Typically. 235 . the system will generate PMS related maintenance log messages. - Verify that you receive the ENQuire character from the SX-200 ICP PMS interface. PMS maintenance log messages will identify • Operating status of the PMS • Invalid start (STX) and end (ETX) of text message characters • Invalid function code message characters • Invalid status code message characters • Invalid room number message characters. If not. • PMS Programming: Verify that all the recommended PMS and Dataset programming is complete. 2. - Ensure that the communications parameters of the personal computer / terminal match those expected by the PBX’s PMS interface. check the PMS-related logs in Maintenance. Turning a telephone’s message waiting lamp on and off from a PC confirms that the SX-200 ICP PMS interface works correctly. If the lamp is not lit. check the maintenance logs for PMS related information. 236 . Note: For the PMS to light a lamp station the Dial 0 for that tenant must be a console. See the following example. identifying problems with the customer’s PMS hardware/software. and the Dial 0 must be the same for Night 1 and Night 2.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 3. ^C End Transaction ETX (CTRL C) 4. If problems continue when you reconnect the customer’s PMS computer. Type the PMS message required to turn off the telephone’s message waiting lamp. using CAPITAL letters only. Verify that the telephone’s message waiting lamp is lit. The logs will indicate which section of the PMS message is invalid. 6. Note: Faster PMS PCs may have to be forced to wait for a reply.Function Code action STX (CTRL B) 1 space x x x x x Status Code Station’s Extension (Room) 1 = ON Number 0 = OFF Enter the telephone’s extension number (5 digits with leading spaces). Type the PMS message required to light a telephone’s message waiting lamp. Verify that the telephone’s message waiting lamp is off. ^B M W space Start Trans. 5. Chapter 7 Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 238 . IMPORTANT: Please see “Contacting Mitel” on page 6 before contacting Mitel Technical Support. Mitel Product Support can help you isolate minor network problems. 239 . Mitel Product Support will escalate to Professional Services to assist you (this is a billable service).Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair About this Chapter This chapter provides advanced procedures to help you identify and troubleshoot common problems involving the following: • Network connectivity and performance • IP Phone registration • Audio quality • IP trunking Go through this chapter before calling Mitel Technical Support. for more complex network problems. Note: The maintenance and troubleshooting of your LAN/WAN network maintenance is the responsibility of your network provider. - Is your network Managed or Unmanaged? Managed Layer 2 switches allow you to set up VLANs which are recommended. DHCP on IP Phones or VLAN issue? - Does it work by programming static IP addresses to the IP Phone? To PCs? - Can you route to the internet? - Can you ping from PCs to all shared network devices (servers. The information provided here is only an overview of network troubleshooting. For more information. default VLAN. is this only a problem affecting IP Phones? 240 - Is the problem an IP configuration issue on the IP devices—i.e. servers.)? - Are PC file transfers extremely slow? ..SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook General Network Troubleshooting It is beyond the scope of this document to cover everything you need to know to diagnose and eliminate network faults. tagged..e. Check List Do you have a Network topology diagram? If not. - What is your Layer 2 port setup: untagged. and SX-200 ICP attached to? - Is the network configured in a tree structure? Are there any roadblocks? - Are your IP Phones distributed on all of the Layer 2 switches or one Layer 2 switch? - Is the 2nd Port on the IP Phones enabled for PC connection? What type of IP Phones are being used? Do the PCs perform adequately on the network—i. printers. it is essential to obtain one or create one for your records. DHCP on PCs. especially if you are experiencing problems with voice quality. see the SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation and the IP Technology Reference companion to the Advanced I & M Course. other VLAN setups? - How is the router configured: route from one VLAN to another? - Which Layer 2 switches are the routers. routers. etc. etc. network utilization. then disconnect voice from the LAN (if it’s a data problem) or the LAN from voice (if it’s a voice problem) and retry scenario. certain Layer 2 switches.Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair Where does the problem lie? Within the LAN infrastructure.? Isolate (if possible and after hours). one capture from destination). If the problem is reproducible. collisions. 241 . etc. routing between subnets (VLAN's). WAN infrastructure.? - Is the problem experienced on one part of the network or throughout? Don't assume only the person complaining has the problem (try different areas of the network. connection to the SX-200 ICP. certain ports on the Layer 2 switch. Do you have a Network Analyzer (including an Ethernet Tap) that will capture information such as broadcasts being received. - Make connections or calls to the problem area with the Network Analyzer attached and capturing information (one capture from source. runts. - Enter an IP address on the same subnet as the device you will be pinging (avoid conflicting addresses). press the “^” (volume up key) and start over. duplex mismatches or bad PC NIC. check for bad cables. For example: using a shared hub to allow the analyzer to “see” packets being delivered to a Layer 2 port will change connectivity to the port to 10 MB half-duplex. identify the path between two end devices (example: IP Phone and SX-200 ICP) by doing the following: • Execute a ping test from an IP Phone. . • if there are excessive runt frames. - Reconnect the phone WHILE pressing the Superkey button. The NIC card should be 100 MB full-duplex. 242 - Disconnect power from the phone by disconnecting it from the LAN.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Troubleshooting IP Phone Connectivity Using a network analyzer to debug If a network analyzer is required to debug an IP Phone it will be necessary to use an Ethernet tap to ensure that the port settings are not compromised or changed. - If a mistake is made. Note: This step is not to be confused with the section on Troubleshooting IP Phone Registration. Do this when the phone is unable to register with its DHCP server (either the one in SX-200 ICP or an external one if that is how the network is set up). Connectivity problems For IP Phone network connectivity problems. If the analyzer indicates there are excessive collisions: • check for duplex mismatch problems at the Ethernet port on SX-200 ICP. - Press the “v” (volume down key) until INPUT IP Address. The Layer 2 port attached to SX-200 ICP should be set to 100 Full and not auto. • check that for dual-port phones the NIC card of the attached PC to the IP set is not 10 MB half-duplex. • for CRC errors: check if there is a faulty NIC card or flow-control. and isolate network-related issues. we recommend that you program the IP Phone with a static IP Address in Form 47 or from the phone itself. - PING the following devices (in order): SX-200 ICP 3rd party DHCP if any Local gateway. SX-200 ICP: 192.255.Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair Note: All digits must be entered for the IP Address. Example. - The phone will have to be powered on and off in order to execute another ping or boot up normally.000 - Press “v” repeatedly until the INPUT GATEWAY appears.001. 192. - The phone will show: Pinging 1 to 5. example 192. 5 Pings Successful. - Enter the IP address of your Gateway—example. 243 . Troubleshooting IP Phone Registration To troubleshoot IP Phone Registration: 1.168.001.255.168. - At “INPUT DEST IP ADDRESS” enter the IP Address of the device that you are proving a connection for (see following step). 255. Record the error message on the IP Phone display. - Enter the same mask as set for your network— example. - Press “#” to indicate Yes.1.1 - Press “v” repeatedly until PERFORM PING TEST prompt appears. Remote gateway Remote IP. If you cannot solve the problem using the IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting Table. Note: To rule out DHCP problems.g. 0 Pings failed. 2. then go through IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting. and then show the results— e.168. see page 248 for instructions.011 - Press “v” repeatedly until the INPUT MASK prompt appears.002. go through the General Troubleshooting Steps on page 216.. 4. From a PC on the same subnet. 2. make sure that the option type is set to LONG. Check the IP address on the phone display. 0x00000002 for VLAN 2). (Page 1 of 5) 244 . Corrective Action 1. Duplicated IP Existing data device owns the IP address. Corrupted DHCP server. For a Cisco Router DHCP server. reboot the server. 1. On the suspected DHCP server. and padded with 0s (for example. 3. make sure that the option type is set to hex. If you still can’t find the problem. Identify the location of DHCP server and which DHCP server is assigned IP address for the corresponding subnet. If this is a Microsoft DHCP server.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 3. IMPORTANT: Make sure you have the following information on hand before calling: • Is the problem with the local or remote subnet? • DHCP server(s) settings • Layer 2 switch configuration and settings • Router configuration and settings • Network diagram • IP addressing scheme • VLAN configuration and settings Table 46: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting Error Message on Display Invalid VLAN ID Probable Cause DHCP Option not set correctly. For an external Microsoft DHCP server (NT server. Disconnect the IP Phone. For the controller internal DHCP server. 3. etc. set the option type to numeric. ping the suspected IP Phone. call Mitel Technical Support.). 2. disable then recreate the scope. and resolve the conflict. identify the data device. If there is a response. Verify that the vlan tag in the option 125 or 43 data string (option 132 prior to Release 4. reboot the server. L2 switch port is shut down or not configured properly. disable DHCP and rebuild the scope.Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair Table 46: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued) Error Message on Display DHCP discovery OR DHCP OFFER X REJ DHCP Discovery OR DHCP OFFER X REJ (VLAN) (after releasing the first IP from the native DHCP server) Probable Cause Corrective Action DHCP server does not have enough IP addresses. Identify if there is one DHCP server for both VLANs. One DHCP server for two VLANs network configuration: IP helper (sometimes called DHCP Relay) address on the router interface is not set up correctly.0) is set to assign to the proper VLAN ID. For one DHCP server per VLAN. and ensure that the port is not shut down. ensure VLAN ID is not that option 125/43 (option 130 prior to assigned properly. Ensure the second scope is created for the corresponding VLAN. Create a larger scope with more IP addresses on the DHCP server. etc.). or if there is one DHCP (DHCP Option 130 server per VLAN . Check the L2 switch. access the port for the same VLAN. (Page 2 of 5) 245 . -MITEL IP PHONE prior to Release 4.0) is not 2. For a Microsoft DHCP server. programmed up on the ensure that option 125/43 (option 130 second scope of the prior to Release 4. even though there are enough IP addresses. DHCP server is acting up and cannot assign IP addresses for the corresponding subnet. DHCP Option 125 or 43 1. On the router interface (in which DHCP is not residing).0) is defined in both DHCP servers properly. enter the IP helper address and specify the IP address of the DHCP server on the other side of the subnet (that is. For one DHCP server for both VLANs. For the controller internal DHCP server. OR 3. 4. Ensure that this port can access the DHCP server subnet (that is. with value of “MITEL IP PHONE”.0) is programmed in DHCP server (or on the the scope of Voice LAN as String type second DHCP server). Release 4. always set up IP helper address on the DHCP client side). For the controller internal DHCP server. On the router subinterface. disable DHCP and rebuild the scope. Identify if there are two physical interfaces to the router (one per VLAN).interfaces). If there is a physical interface on the router for each VLAN. ensure that this is a trunk port with Dot1q encapsulation. For an HP L2 switch. Ensure that the port(s) on both sides (L2 switch and router) are not shut down. ensure that Native Lan is untagged. The DHCP server does not have enough IP addresses. Create a larger scope with more IP addresses on the DHCP server. and that this trunk port allows both native and Voice LAN to pass through. reboot the server. make sure that the L2 switch is set to access port for the corresponding VLAN/ subnet correctly. or a router on a stick configuration (one physical with virtual sub. For a Microsoft DHCP server. (Page 3 of 5) 246 . OR If there is one physical interface on the router for multiple VLANs. ensure that this is a trunk port on the L2 switch. ensure that the proper VLAN is associated to the remote subinterface. and ensure that this trunk port allows both native and voice LAN to pass through.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 46: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued) Error Message on Display DHCP Discovery OR DHCP OFFER X REJ (VLAN) (after releasing the first IP from the native DHCP server) Probable Cause Corrective Action The DHCP server is acting up and cannot assign IP addresses for the corresponding subnet even though there are enough IP addresses. The L2 switch port for the phone interface is shut down or not configured properly. For a Cisco L2 switch. Check the L2 switch and ensure that the port is not shut down. and that Voice LAN is tagged The L2 switch port for the router interface is shut down or not configured properly. Turn off multicasting. and change the location of the power source. No network connectivity Confirm that the controller is connected to between the controller the network. and confirm that the sw_tftp tag in option 125/43 (option 128 prior to Release 4. Option 125/43 (Option 129 prior to Release 4.0 )to confirm that the IP address of the SX-200 ICP controller is correctly programmed.0) is not set up to point to the right TFTP server (Controller). Check the call_Srv tag in option 125/43 (Option 129 prior to Release 4. Verify that the firmware is in the sysro/tftp directory (particularly if the user has manually copied the firmware). There is electrical interference. For an HP L2 switch: verify that the L2 switch is untagged (Voice LAN). Depending on the NIC. The PC behind the IP Phone is changing speed 100/10. The Layer 2 switch port may be running spanning tree. Corrective Action Check the DHCP server. Confirm if TFTP on the controller is corrupted (this can be verified by connecting the IP Phone directly on the controller.0) is pointing to the right TFTP server (usually the SX-200 ICP system IP address). For a Cisco L2 switch: verify that the L2 switch is access port (Voice LAN). Turn port fast on or disable Spanning tree (whichever is possible).0) is not programmed correctly. If the router is involved. and the phone. (Page 4 of 5) 247 . IP phone fails to receive Verify if the network or the controller is Keepalive message in down. The application server is broadcasting or multicasting on IP Phone port or on PC behind the IP Phone. Verify the power source. 30 seconds.Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair Table 46: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued) Error Message on Display TFTP load failure Probable Cause Option 125/43 (Option 128 prior to Release 4. you may need to hardcode to 100 MB instead of auto negotiation. make sure that router’s MTU is set to 600 or more. Waiting for link Waiting for link OR Lost link to Server Firmware on controller is missing or corrupted. or by observing the behavior of other IP Phones). • Use the * key to move backwards within a field (to correct an error). and ensure this trunk port allows both native and voice LAN to pass through. Probable Cause Corrective Action The Layer 2 switch port for the phone interface is shut down or not configured properly. • Use the # key to insert a decimal character and move to the next IP address field. Check the Layer 2 switch and ensure that the port is not shut down. OR If this is a router on a switch. Verify that the gateway IP address is correct. If there is no VLAN or priority. VLAN ID. Delete and reprogram the static IP address. For a Cisco Layer 2 switch: verify that this is a trunk port with Dot1q encapsulation. For an HP Layer 2 switch: verify that Native Lan is untagged and Voice Lan is tagged. The Layer 2 switch port for router interface is shut down or not configured properly. verify that the proper VLAN is associated to the subinterface.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 46: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued) Error Message on Display TFTP Fail (Remote IP phone (statically programmed IP address) cannot access the SX-200 ICP across the WAN). make sure that the Layer 2 switch is set to access port for the corresponding VLAN/subnet correctly. On the router’s subinterface. and ensure this trunk port allows both native and voice LAN to pass through. gateway. Verify which configuration you have Ensure the port(s) on both sides (Layer 2 switch and router) are not shut down. Typo in IP address. (Page 5 of 5) Assigning Static IP Addresses to IP Phones To navigate through the set prompts: • Use the Volume Down key to move to the next field. verify that this is a trunk port on L2 switch. • Use the Volume Up key to go back to the previous field. 248 . don’t put 0 and leave them as blank. If there is physical interface on the router for each VLAN. enter the VLAN ID that will be inserted into packets sent by the phone. The INPUT PDA ADDRESS prompt appears. Note: If you see the INVALID IP ADDRESS message. Press the Volume Down key to move to the next field. 5.012.27. 249 . Press # to enter IP data. Enter the subnet mask and press the Volume Down key to move to the next field. Enter the customer-supplied static IP PDA address. Hold down the Volume Up key for 3 seconds and at the same time. press #. To begin entering static IP address information. Enter 6 if you are using priorities. enter nothing and press the Volume Down key.30. To revert back to DHCP from static parameters. 3. or leave the field blank. If you are using VLANS. The INPUT SUBNET MASK prompt appears. Wait a few seconds until the USE PRESENT SETTINGS prompt appears. The SET STATIC IP PARAM? prompt appears. Then press the Volume Down key to move to the next field. 6.191). 4.12. enter '10. press the Volume Up key to return to the field with the incorrect entry.67. plug the set Ethernet cable and power into the set to display the STATIC IP SETUP MODE.Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair To set static IP address on the IP telephones: 1. Ensure that the set you want to program is not connected to the network and there is no power supplied to the set.067.030. 2. If you are not using VLANS. The INPUT VLAN ID prompt appears. The INPUT PRIORITY prompt appears. The INPUT DEFAULT GATEWAY prompt appears. For example. 7.30' as '010. 8. Note: Enter two-digit portions of IP addresses as three-digit numbers with leading zeros. Press the Volume Down key to move to the next field. 9. Edit the entry. press *. The INPUT IP ADDRESS prompt appears. Enter the customer-supplied static IP address (for example: 10. The set reboots and applies the new static IP data. 250 . 14. 13. Enter the Proxy Port number and press the Volume Down key to move to the next field. The STORE IN NVRAM? prompt appears. 17. 12. The INPUT RTC ADDRESS prompt appears. 16. For more information about this address. The TECHNICIAN IP ADDR? prompt appears. If you do not want to enter this information. Press the Volume Down key to move to the next field. press #. The INPUT TFTP ADDRESS prompt appears. press # This ensures that your static settings will be used when the set is powered-up and when the FLASH software is upgraded. consult your Microsoft Windows documentation. Enter the Windows Internet Name Services (WINS) server IP address. Press the Volume Down key to move to the next field. Enter the IP address of the proxy server. The INPUT PROXY PORT prompt appears. The INPUT PROXY ADDRESS prompt appears. press *. Enter the IP address of the server that will be used during Web browsing to resolve host names into IP addresses. Press the Volume Down key to move to the next field.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 10. If you do not want to store the static settings in NVRAM. The INPUT DNS ADDRESS appears. The INPUT WINS ADDRESS prompt appears. To store parameters in non-volatile RAM. 15. Enter the IP address of the RTC and press the Volume Down key to move to the next field. 11. Press the Volume Down key to move to the next field. To enter the IP address of the debugging utility. enter the address and then press the Volume Down key to move to the next field. 18. press *. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server that is used to download the main-load and boot-load images. Enter the IP address of the Router and press the Volume Down key to move to the next field. 3. Open the Tools folder. refer to its Online Help. Enter the IP address of the IP phone. 2000 or XP and a connection on the same network as the SX-200 ICP. enter the one belonging to the PC that has the Analyzer installed on it. 3. select * = DISABLE to revert back to DHCP from static parameters. Insert the SX-200 ICP software CD-ROM in the PC’s CD drive. Enabling Tool Analysis From the IP Phone Analyzer Tool: 1. 2. Follow the prompts to complete the installation. IP Phone Analyzer The Mitel IP Phone Analyzer is a software tool for troubleshooting IP phones.Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair Removing Static IP Addresses on the IP Sets To return to using DHCP when static parameters were previously enabled: 1. For the IP address. Select Commands. It installs on a PC from the SX-200 ICP software CD. Double-click Setup. 4. 251 . Point to Programs. 2. Click Start on the Windows taskbar. Plug the set cable and power into the set while holding down the Volume Up key for 3 seconds to display the STATIC IP SETUP MODE. Click Mitel IP Phone Analyzer.exe. At the USE PRESENT SETTINGS screen. 2. For detailed information on using the IP Phone Analyzer. NT. The PC needs Windows 98. In Form 47 (DHCP Parameters). and then the IP Phone Analyzer folder. 2. add Option 131: IP Phone Debug Window IP to the list of Common Options. Launching the IP Phone Analyzer 1. Installing the IP Phone Analyzer 1. and then Register Set. From the IP phone: • 252 Restart the set to clear PC’s IP address from the phone. right-click. delete Option 131 to disable IP messaging to the Analyzer Tool. Disabling Tool Analysis From the PC hosting the Analyzer Tool: • Access the Status View window.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook From the IP phone: • Reboot the phone (by removing and restoring power) to add the IP address of the PC to the phone. The IP address will appear in the IP Phone Analyzer Status View window. From the CDE/Maintenance Terminal: • In Form 47 (DHCP Parameters). and then select Delete. . left-click on the IP address. The phone will be out of service while it resets. There will be a service outage while the phones reset. call Mitel Technical Support. etc. 253 . collision and duplex mismatch. IMPORTANT: Make sure you have the following information on hand before calling: • Setup scenario • Is there a common denominator (router. 2. If you still can’t find the problem. If you cannot solve the problem using the table. Go to the table below. etc. go through the steps on page 216.Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair Troubleshooting Phone Audio Quality To Troubleshoot Phone Audio Quality: 1. only one side of subnet.) • Layer 2 switch configuration and settings • Router configuration and settings • Network diagram • IP addressing scheme • VLAN configuration and settings • Layer 2 switch port statistics for FCS. IP to TDM.)? • Other call scenarios (IP to IP. 3. Identify the path between the two end points. 1. Check if far end is using handsfree. Handsfree mode is used. If this is the case. update the Options subform of Form 13 with matching settings. the input signal should be -15 dB. One way audio between Remote IP to TDM (VM) No gateway IP address programmed in the controller. 2. On a typical T1.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 47: Audio Quality Problems Troubleshooting Symptoms Probable Cause Corrective Action Excessive noise Faulty cabling Check for cabling problems. or lower the handsfree’s volume. Check with Telco to see if the trunk is within specs. Make sure that the gateway IP address is programmed properly. and verify if Trunk is always involved. check network jitter issue below. Echo Echo between LS trunks and IP phones. Measure the loss level and impedance for LS trunks connected to onboard ASUs (See “Diagnostic Function Commands” on page 207). Echo Canceller is beyond specifications. echo may result. If the problem only occurs between IP devices. Network jitter issue. If it is too high (-5 dB for example). (Page 1 of 2) 254 . 3. Switch to Handset mode to see if this corrects it. If necessary. keep an echo log to isolate the problem. 2. Compression enabled Compression will save bandwidth. Identify the speech path between the two end points. Physical port error (CRC. The network administrator may need to monitor the performance of the router. The network administrator needs to apply QOS/TOS to minimize jitter over slow speed interface (T1. Identify the speech path between the two end points. Turn off if possible. 1. Some handsfree phones only operate at half duplex. switch WAN in the audio stream. Layer 2 switch setting problem. If not sure. and give voice traffic priority over data. 2. 2. 1. Make sure that the IP Phone is not plugged into a HUB. 2. but may cause noticeable clipping. including router. The network administrator needs to apply QOS/TOS to give voice traffic priority over data. including router. faulty cable. Router’s CPU is exhausted or congested.). or faulty port. 3. Limited bandwidth and too many calls across router. Packet loss. switch WAN in the audio stream. Ensure that neither device is using Handsfree. Router may be running excessive filtering. Limit the number of calls to remote subnets. intermittent (IP trunks only) Echo between IP Phones Probable Cause Corrective Action Handsfree on the far end. etc. 1. 1. Verify that there is no duplex mismatch in each port settings and/or faulty cable.Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair Table 47: Audio Quality Problems Troubleshooting (continued) Symptoms Broken Audio. Frame Relay. (Page 2 of 2) 255 . Check the L2 switch for duplex mismatch and spanning tree. disable compression to see if it makes a difference. duplex mismatch. or combination data and voice. HUB). jitter via network. For more information. PRI Card: QSIG: Enabled.” CDE Check List Form 01. Maximum IP Trunks: 1-16 depending on traffic. such as poor voice quality and traffic congestion. - Option 115. - Option 132.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Troubleshooting IP Trunks The tools and techniques used to troubleshoot connectivity problems with IP Phones also apply to IP trunks. System Options/System Timers Ensure that IP trunk-related options are programmed as follows - Option 86. 256 . Form 03. For more detailed information. especially the section entitled “Maintaining Voice Quality of Service. see the SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation. Compression Resources: Compression is recommended with IP trunks to conserve bandwidth. Other problems with IP trunks. are often the result of incorrect CDE programming or insufficient bandwidth. The following sections summarize the programming requirements and provide guidance on addressing problems with connectivity and other quality of service concerns. Class of Service Ensure that the following options are enabled in COS 7: - 801 Incoming Trunk Call Rotary - 802 Limited Wait for Dial Tone - 811 ANIS/DNIS/Class Trunk - 702 SMDR Overwrite Buffer Form 04. System Configuration Ensure that the IP trunk card is programmed in Bay 1 Slot 6. see “DSP configurations” on page 11. - Option 120. DSP Configuration Option: Business 1. Does the DSP Configuration match the hardware installed and Compression Resources purchased? It may be necessary to purchase an additional DSP card(s) to satisfy DSP Configuration and Compression requirements. Remote Profile must be set to 1. the other sites have no Bay association. Voice Networking - Make sure that the correct IP Node is entered. - Enable QSIG Supplementary Services. Form 48. Dial In Trunk - Ensure that COS 7 is programmed for the IP Trunks along with the correct Circuit Descriptor (CDN) that was created in Form 13. Press the softkey to list all routes programmed for IP Trunks. M. Trunk Groups - Ensure there is a trunk group for the IP Trunks. Form 15.Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair Form 13. a softkey labelled SHOW IP will appear. Ensure that Concurrent Call. Verify other settings (COR. X) and add a Comment identifying the trunks as IP trunks for future reference. Remote Profile and IP Node are all programmed. Form 26. Ten. if there is a 3300 ICP and another SX-200 ICP in the network. ARS: Route Definition - Ensure that there is a route for every remote node networked using IP trunks. Form 23. The form lists the local site as Bay 1 with no IP address. Compression. no calls are allowed to the node. Note: MAX CALLS must be greater than zero (the default). For example. otherwise. N. Form 16. All IP trunks enabled should be programmed here and have a Comment identifying them as IP trunks for future reference. Each IP-PBX (node) has a unique IP Node number that all the other IP-PBXs must have in their programming. 257 . ARS: Digit Strings - Make sure there is a digit string programmed which will route calls (see Form 23 for the correct Route number) to the remote ICP systems. Trunk Circuit Descriptor - There should be a descriptor number with Trunk Type T1 E&M for the IP Trunks. If the far end is a 3300. Knowing the amount of traffic expected to each remote node will determine what the Max Calls field should be set at to avoid congestion. then there should be two routes. Comments should be entered with information such as the location and IP-PBX type. Note: When the cursor is on a route for an IP Trunk. If both routes will be used and traffic is assumed to be higher (e.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Considerations: a. - Is it ADSL? ADSL has fast download speeds but slow upload speeds. b. IP Check List Refer to “Maintaining Voice Quality of Service” in SX-200 ICP Documentation for more information on the subject matter discussed in this section. and if the far end node is down. - 258 Refer to SMDR to get information on what you are dialing and what is being dialed from the other end. will it use the other IP Trunking Route (assumes a three node network)? If so. Communicate with the engineer responsible for remote node(s) and gather information about the IP Trunk requirements.. Do I need Compression Options based on my findings (refer to the CDE Checklist at beginning of the section)? Gather the IP Addresses for the far end. then Max calls could be set to 24 on both routes since you will only use one route at any given time. get the far end to call you and you call them.g. Using ARS. Is one IP Trunk route the primary route used. Gather information about the “pipe” between your location and the far location. which affects the programming in CDE (SX-200 ICP must have a fixed IP Address that won't change at the far end IP Trunk connections). - What is the bandwidth? How much of the bandwidth will be used for data? Are there any times of the day when the bandwidth is utilized more than other times? Is the pipe ever removed for general maintenance or is it susceptible to weather or environmental impacts (anything that will affect your ability to provide proper service). then the Max calls would more likely be set to 12 or lower. plus it usually relies on DHCP to provide local addressing. eight calls per route at any given time). Ping from both ends to ensure there is a connection. . In most cases a system reboot is unnecessary because the incorrect boot parameters cause the system to be in constant reboot mode. If you make a mistake during entry.Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair Troubleshooting System Boot Failure During the setting of IP address or inadvertent system corruption. Correct information is essential for full functionality. (There is no backspace option. incorrect boot parameters may be entered and system operation is jeopardized. Note: All parameters must be entered in lowercase. 259 . halting the system during boot up and entering a "c" at the [VxWorks Boot]: will allow access to the required information. If you are uncertain about current boot parameters.) NOTE: The IP addresses used here are examples only and your network address should match your local environment. press enter for each paramater until you pass the last one. and then press “c” to start over. 22.2:ffffff00 inet on backplane (b) host inet (h) 192.168.168.vx inet on ethernet (e) 192.22.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook SX-200 ICP CX/CXi 9600 VT100 Terminal Emulation Table 48: SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Boot Parameters Parameter Setting boot device ata=auto (See Note 1) processor number 0 host name file name /partition1/Kts8250. 260 .168.20.1 user (u) ftp ftp password (pw) (blank = use rsh) @ flags (f) 0x0 target name (tn) startup script (s) other (o) motfcc Note 1: “ata=auto” means that the system will try to boot from the front flash card first.12 gateway inet (g) 192. “ata=no auto” means that the system will bypass the front flash card and boot from the internal flash card or hard drive only. Appendix A Default Database Values . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 262 . DTE Profile Device Interconnection Table System Abbreviated Dial Entry (Page 1 of 2) 263 .Default Database Values Default Database Table 49: CDE Forms FORM NUMBER 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 FORM NAME System Configuration Feature Access Codes COS Define System Options/System Timers Tenant Interconnection Table Tenant Night Switching Control Console Assignments Attendant LDN Assignments Desktop Device Assignments Pickup Groups Data Circuit Descriptor Data Assignment Trunk Circuit Descriptors Non-Dial-In Trunks Dial-In Trunks Trunk Groups Hunt Groups Miscellaneous System Ports Call Rerouting Table ARS: COR Group Definition ARS: Day Zone Definition ARS: Modified Digit Table ARS: Route Definition ARS: Route Lists ARS: Route Plans ARS: Digit Strings ARS: Maximum Dialed Digits Form Access Restriction Def'n. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 49: CDE Forms (continued) FORM NUMBER 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 FORM NAME CDE Data Print Account Code Entry Directed IO Global Find Access Code Modem Assignment Guest Rm SUPERSET Keys Template ACD Keys Template ACD Agent Groups ACD Supervisors ACD Paths T1 Link Descriptors T1 Link Assignment Network Synchronization Not Used Key System Toll Control IP Networking Voice Networking Voice mail Mailboxes Voice mail Distribution Lists Email Bay Location Assignment Calling Party Number Digit Translation Table (Page 2 of 2) 264 . Form 01 . the IP bay becomes bay number 8. Only forms with data in them are listed.Default Database Values Default Database Values This section lists the values in the default CDE database.System Configuration BAY SLT CCT PROGRAMMED 01 01 IP LINE CARD IP LINE CARD 01 02 IP LINE CARD IP LINE CARD 01 03 IP LINE CARD IP LINE CARD 01 04 IP LINE CARD IP LINE CARD 01 05 IP LINE CARD IP LINE CARD 01 06 IP TRUNK CARD IP TRUNK CARD 01 07 IP LINE CARD IP LINE CARD 01 08 01 09 IP LINE CARD --- 01 10 IP LINE CARD IP LINE CARD 01 11 VOICE MAIL CARD VOICE MAIL CARD COMMENTS --IP LINE CARD 01 12 VOICE MAIL CARD VOICE MAIL CARD 01 13 ONBOARD ASU ONBOARD ASU Form 02 . However.All Calls *03 04 Call Forwarding .External Only *05 06 Call Forwarding . The default bay number of the IP bay is bay 1.Internal Only *04 05 Call Forwarding .I'm Here *06 07 Call Forwarding . Note: The controller is identified as the “IP Bay” in some CDE forms.Feature Access Codes FEATURE FEATURE NAME ACCESS CODE 01 Account Code Access 02 Auto-Answer Activation *01 03 Call Forwarding . when an SX-200 EL/ML database is installed to migrate the system to an SX-200 ICP.Cancel I'm Here *07 08 Dial Call Pickup *08 09 Directed Call Pickup *09 10 Do Not Disturb *10 11 Extension General Attendant Access 0 (Page 1 of 3) 265 . Direct Paging *48 (Page 2 of 3) 266 .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook FEATURE FEATURE NAME ACCESS CODE 12 Paging Access To Default Zone(s) *12 13 Paging Access To Specific Zones *13 14 TAFAS .Local Tenant *15 16 Hold Pickup Access (Attendant Hold Slots) *16 17 Console Lockout Access Code 18 Maintenance Functions (Test Line) 19 Direct Inward System Access 20 Callback Busy <<single digit>> 21 Call Hold *21 22 Call Hold Retrieve (Local) *22 23 Call Hold Retrieve (Remote) *23 24 Abbreviated Dial Access *24 25 Clear All Features *25 26 SUPERSET Telephone Loopback Test 27 Tone Demonstration 28 ADL Call Setup 29 ADL Disconnect 30 Last Number Redial 31 Executive Busy Override <<single digit>> 32 Automatic Wake-up 33 Call Park 34 Node ID 35 Maid In Room 36 SUPERSET Room Status Display 37 Direct To ARS 38 UCD Agent Login/Logout 39 Analogue Network Accept Callers Extension 40 SUPERSET Maid In Room Status Display *30 *33 41 Send Message *41 42 Call Message Sender of Oldest Message *42 43 Callback .Any *14 15 TAFAS .No Answer 44 ACD Login/Logout 45 Silent Monitoring 46 Flash over Trunk 47 Program Feature Key 48 Key System . Direct CO Line Select 51 Key System .PA *64 65 Phonebook *65 66 Open Door *66 67 Digit Translation Table Access 68 Secure Hot swap/unswap 69 DID Number Display (Page 3 of 3) COS7 .Telephone *63 64 Call Park and Page .Class of Service 100 Attendant Bell Off 101 O/G Restriction/Room Status Setup 102 Attendant Display of System Alarms 103 Attendant DISA Code Setup 104 Attendant Flexible Night Service Setup 105 Guest Room Key (Page 1 of 10) 267 .IP SET OPTION NUMBER Form 03 .LS TRUNK COS2 .Default Database Values FEATURE ACCESS CODE FEATURE NAME 49 Key System .Retrieve Personal Speed Call *52 53 Double Flash over Trunk 54 Analog Network Accept Call Forward Data 55 Analog Network Accept Call Forward Reason *49 56 Headset Mode On/Off 57 Call Park Orbit Retrieve 58 IP Set Registration PIN *** 59 IP Set Replacement PIN ### *57 60 IP Set Language Selection 61 Disable Twin Phone 62 Call Park Remote *62 63 Call Park and Page .Meet Me Answer 50 Key System .VOICE MAIL COS5 .IP TRUNK COS6 .ONS COS OPTION / NAME COS1 .Group Page .Store Personal Speed Call *51 52 Key System . 240 s.LS TRUNK COS6 . 0=Disable 30 30 30 30 30 118 Attendant Call Forward .Long Distance Calls 202 Alarm Call 203 Broker’s Call 204 Call Block Applies (Room To Room) (Page 2 of 10) 268 .ONS COS5 . Forced Entry .IP TRUNK 115 Attendant-Timed Recall (No Ans) 5 -240 s.VOICE MAIL COS7 .IP SET SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook COS OPTION / NAME 106 Attendant New Call Tone 107 Attendant Automatic Call Forward . 0=Disable 30 30 30 30 30 116 Attendant-Timed Recall (Hold) 5 .240 s. Forced Entry .No Answer 108 Attendant Audible Alarm 109 Attendant Serial Call 110 Attendant Abbr.COS2 . Dial Confidential Number Display 111 Attendant Abbreviated Dial Programming 112 Attendant Station Busy-Out 113 Attendant Call Block Key 114 Attendant Trunk Busy-Out 120 Attendant Conference Disable 121 Station Do Not Disturb 122 Setup Time/Date 123 Call Forward Setup and Cancel 124 Attendant Hold Position Security 125 Attendant Multi-New Call Tone 126 Apply Key Line Conference Warning Tone 150 Sub-Attendant Station Setup Advisory Messages 151 RESERVED 152 RESERVED 153 RESERVED 200 Account Code. 0=Disable 30 30 30 30 30 117 Attendant-Timed Recall (Camp-On) 5 . 30 30 30 30 30 119 Attendant Tone Signaling X X X X X OPTION NUMBER COS1 .External Calls 201 Account Code.No Answer Timer 10 .240 s. Bell 232 Message Waiting Setup .X X X 208 Call Forwarding .External X X 209 Call Forwarding – Always X X COS7 .IP SET OPTION NUMBER Default Database Values 205 Flash For Waiting Call 210 Call Forwarding Inhibit on Dial-In Trunks X X 212 Can Flash If Talking to an Incoming Trunk 211 Call Hold and Retrieve Access X X 213 Can Flash If Talking to an Outgoing Trunk X X X 214 Cannot Dial a Trunk after Flashing 215 Cannot Dial a Trunk if Holding or in Conference with One 216 Data Security X 217 Direct To ARS 218 Directed Call Pickup X 219 Discriminating Dial Tone X X X 220 Do Not Disturb X X 221 Clear All Features 222 Call Forward Inhibit on Hold Timeout X 223 Flash Disable 224 Flash for Attendant 225 Hold Pickup (Attendant Paged Access) X 226 Inward Restriction (DID) 227 Lockout Alarm Applies 228 Manual Line (Dial 0 Hotline) 229 Voice Mail Port X X 230 Message Register Overflow Alarm 231 Message Waiting Setup .IP TRUNK X 207 Call Forwarding .ONS 206 Call Forwarding .No Answer COS6 .Lamp X 233 Never a Consultee 234 Never a Forwardee (Page 3 of 10) 269 .VOICE MAIL COS2 .Busy COS OPTION / NAME COS5 .LS TRUNK COS1 . Record Meter Pulses 248 TAFAS Any Access X 249 TAFAS Access Tenant X 250 TAFAS Access During Day Service X 251 Transfer Dial Tone X X 253 Call Forward .ONS COS OPTION / NAME COS1 .6 Rings) 3 3 3 264 Half Fwd NA timer for DID call with VM msg on (Page 4 of 10) 270 .50 Minutes) 0 0 0 0 0 258 Display Prime as Forwarder X X X X X 259 Message Sending X X X 3 3 252 Broker’s Call with Transfer 257 Flash Over Trunk 260 Internal / External Split Call Forwarding 261 ONS Voice Mail Port 262 Ignore Forward Busy with Free Appearance X 263 Delay Ring Timer (2 .6 Rings) 3 3 3 3 3 254 Call Hold Recall Timer (PBX Telephones) 0 .IP TRUNK COS6 .Don’t Answer Timer (2 .LS TRUNK COS2 .Extended Record 247 SMDR .VOICE MAIL COS5 .10 Minutes 1 1 1 1 1 255 Repeated Camp-On Beeps Timer (5 .15 Seconds) 10 10 10 10 10 256 UCD Music On Hold Timer (0 .IP SET OPTION NUMBER SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 235 Originate Only 236 Outgoing Trunk Callback 237 Outgoing Trunk Camp-On 238 Override Security X 239 Priority Dial 0 240 Line Privacy X X X X X X X X X X X 241 Receive Only 242 Repeated Camp-On Beep 243 Non-Busy Extension 244 Room Status Applies 245 Abbreviated Dialing Access 246 SMDR .COS7 . ONS COS OPTION / NAME COS1 .COS6 .LS TRUNK COS2 .IP TRUNK COS5 .VOICE MAIL COS7 .IP SET OPTION NUMBER Default Database Values X X 265 Voice Mail System Speed Dial Index (0-255) 266 Camp-on before Forward on Busy 267 Softkey Support for Voice Mail X 268 Record a Call in Voice Mail 269 Record a Call: Start Recording Automatically 270 Record a Call: Save Recording on Hangup 271 Privacy Released at Start of Call 272 Guest Suite Extension 273 Display Held Caller ID to ONS/CLASS 274 ONS Ring Group Member 275 Single Button Transfer to Voice mail 276 Twin Phone 277 Automatic Mailbox Creation X 278 Intercom Mode 279 Display Account codes on Phone X 280 PC (2nd) Port on IP Phone X 281 TAFAS Access During Day/Night Service 282 Headset Hard hold 300 Automatic Callback 301 Camp-On X 302 Flash-in Conference X X 303 Paging Zone 1 Access X X 304 Paging Zone 2 Access 305 Paging Zone 3 Access 306 Paging Zone 4 Access 307 Paging Zone 5 Access 308 Paging Zone 6 Access 309 Paging Zone 7 Access 310 Paging Zone 8 Access 311 Paging Zone 9 Access (Page 5 of 10) 271 . 2=beeps) 407 RESERVED 500 Override 501 Override Announce (Page 6 of 10) 272 .9) (0 Gives All Enabled Zones) COS2 . Forced Entry . Forced Entry .Data Long Distance Calls 329 RESERVED 330 RESERVED 331 RESERVED 400 Contact Monitor 401 Call Park 402 Long Loop (Off-Premise Extensions Only) 403 Trunk Recall Partial Inhibit 404 Recording Failure to Hangup Timer (1 . 1=no beep.VOICE MAIL COS7 .Data External Calls 328 Account Code.IP SET OPTION NUMBER SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 0 X X 30 0 313 CO Trunk to CO Trunk Connect 314 CO Trunk to TIE Trunk Connect 315 CO Trunk to DID Trunk Connect 316 TIE Trunk to TIE Trunk Connect 317 TIE Trunk to DID Trunk Connect 318 DID Trunk to DID Trunk Connect 319 Extension Non-CO Trunk to Trunk Connect 320 Transparent Multi-Console Operation 321 Ignore Call Forward After Transfer 322 Confirm Wakeup by Off-hook 323 RESERVED 324 RESERVED 325 RESERVED 326 Account Code. Forced Entry .COS5 .Data Internal Calls 327 Account Code.LS TRUNK COS6 .IP TRUNK 312 Paging Default (0 .255 Seconds) 405 Can Initiate Call Monitor 406 Allow To Be Monitored (0=dis.ONS COS OPTION / NAME 0 0 0 0 30 30 30 30 0 0 0 0 COS1 . Limited New Call Ring 0 0 0 0 612 Telephone .Headset Operation 613 Display ANI Information Only X 614 Telephone .Background Music 603 Telephone .Auto-Hold Disable 602 Telephone .Disconnect Alarm 604 Telephone .Automatic Outgoing Line 605 Telephone .IP TRUNK COS6 .Offhook Voice Announce X X 616 Alarm Monitor Point 617 Immediate Off Hook Alarm (Page 7 of 10) 273 .Auto-Answer 601 Telephone .IP SET OPTION NUMBER Default Database Values X 504 SUPERSET 420 Optional Class Display 505 ONS Stations Support CLASS X 506 ONS Positive Disconnect (0 = disabled) 0 0 0 0 0 507 Station/Set: Allow My Number to be Displayed X X X X X 508 Station/Set: Show Internal Numbers on My Phone 509 Display Caller ID for Non-Prime Lines X X 510 ONS Stations Support CLASS Visual Call Waiting 511 X COV Voice Mail Displays Calling 600 Telephone .Guest Room Template (0 .Associated Modem Line 608 Telephone .LS TRUNK COS2 .Enhanced Answering Position 607 Telephone .502 Display ANI/DNIS/CLASS Information X 503 Display CLASS Name X COS7 .3) (DN) 0 611 X Telephone .Room Status Display 609 Telephone .Message Program 606 Telephone .Handset Volume Saved X 615 Telephone .VOICE MAIL COS5 .ONS COS OPTION / NAME COS1 .Night Service Switching X 610 Telephone . Multiple CO/DTS 622 Ring Group .COS2 .Display Path Always 655 Allow Continuous Monitor 680 Key System .Day/Night1 Switching 692 Secure Hot Swapping 700 SMDR .ONS COS5 . 0 = Disable) 0 0 0 0 0 653 ACD . 0 = Disable) 0 0 0 0 0 652 ACD .Auto Answer .Max Call Logs Allowed <0-20> 621 Call Logging .3.3. 0 = Disable) 0 0 0 0 0 651 ACD .IP SET COS OPTION / NAME Ringer OPTION NUMBER SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 0 0 0 0 0 619 Direct Speak@Ease Access 620 SUPERSET Telephone .Agent Template (0 .Call Hold Notify Timer (0 -600 s) 682 Key System .Direct CO Access 681 Key Set/Sub Att.Does Not Apply 701 No Dial Tone X (Page 8 of 10) 274 .IP TRUNK Ringer Ringer Ringer Ringer 618 Alarm Audio Level for Sets COS1 .LS TRUNK COS6 . .VOICE MAIL COS7 .Internal Calls (For SUPERSET 3DN and 4DN only) 683 Key System .Agent Always Auto-Answer 654 ACD .Call Logging 623 Automatic DID Number Assignment 624 Wakeup Alarm Notification 650 ACD .3.Supervisor Template (0 .Direct Paging Handsfree Answerback X 684 Can Make All Set Page X 685 Can Receive All Set Page X 686 Group Page Includes Overhead Paging 687 All Set Page Includes Overhead Paging 688 IP Set Requires Compression 689 DTS/CO Line Transfer Call Handling 690 Hold And Page 691 Telephone .Senior Supervisor Template (0 . Record Incoming Calls 807 SMDR .COS5 .Display Private Speedcall 808 Special DISA 809 Standard Ring Applies 810 DISA During Night Service Only 811 ANI/DNIS Trunk X 812 Loop Start Trunk to ACD Path Connect 813 Delay ONS Ring .. 11. 0 = disable) X 0 0 0 X 0 0 804 SMDR .IP TRUNK 702 SMDR ..LS TRUNK COS6 .ONS COS OPTION / NAME COS1 .Wait for Network Name (0-6 s) 814 SMDR .Overwrite Buffer COS2 .VOICE MAIL COS7 .Record ANI/DNIS/CLASS 0 0 0 0 0 X 815 DTS/CO LINE KEY Honors Forwarding 816 CENTREX Flash over Trunk 900 Data Station Queuing 901 DTRX Herald 902 DTRX Message Code 903 DTRX Message Code Text (Page 9 of 10) 275 .IP SET OPTION NUMBER Default Database Values X X X X X 703 Message Register Applies 704 Incoming / Internal Modem Pooling Access 705 Automatic Overflow From Attendant 706 RESERVED 707 RESERVED 708 RESERVED 709 Follow External Call Forward 710 RESERVED 800 ANI Applies 801 Incoming Trunk Call Rotary X 802 Limited Wait for Dial Tone 803 SMDR .Drop Incomplete Outgoing Calls 805 Trunk No Dial Tone Alarm 806 SMDR .Drop Calls < n Digits (0. Overwrite Buffer (Page 10 of 10) 276 .VOICE MAIL COS7 .Does Not Apply 907 DATA SMDR .Extended Record 908 DATA SMDR .ONS COS5 .LS TRUNK COS6 .4) 906 DATA SMDR .IP TRUNK COS OPTION / NAME COS1 .IP SET OPTION NUMBER SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 1 1 1 1 1 904 DTRX Complete Message Text 905 DTRX Herald Text Select (1.COS2 . 4:00. 4:00a) 12HR AM 02 Message Lamp Test Enable DISABLED 03 Single Paging Amplifier DISABLED 04 Message Waiting & Message Register Clear Print DISABLED 05 Verified Account Codes DISABLED 06 Analogue Networking SMDR DISABLED 07 Cancel 24-hour Message Waiting DISABLED 08 Five Digit SMDR DISABLED 09 Attendant Call Block DISABLED 10 Attendant Conference Beep DISABLED 11 Automatic Wake-up DISABLED 12 Automatic Wake-up Alarm DISABLED 13 Automatic Wake-up Print DISABLED 14 Automatic Wake-up Music DISABLED 15 Data Demultiplexer DISABLED 16 IP Set Voice Encryption ENABLED 17 Discriminating Ringing ENABLED 18 Discriminating Ringing Always DISABLED 19 DID Server Application DISABLED 20 Holiday Messages DISABLED 21 Incoming to Outgoing Call Forward DISABLED 22 Last Party Clear . Count Additional Supervisions DISABLED 24 Message Register Audit DISABLED 25 Message Register Zero After Audit DISABLED 26 No Overlap Outpulsing ENABLED 27 Room Status Audit DISABLED 28 SMDR Indicate Long Calls DISABLED 29 Telephone Last Number Redial ENABLED 31 Satellite PBX DISABLED 32 Outgoing Call Restriction DISABLED 33 Room Status DISABLED 34 Auto Room Status Conversion/Auto Wake-up Print DISABLED 35 DSS/BLF Call Pickup DISABLED 36 End of Dial Character ( # ) DISABLED 37 Calibrated Flash DISABLED 38 Switch-Hook Flash ENABLED 39 DATA SMDR Indicate Long Calls DISABLED 40 Message Register Follows Talker DISABLED 42 Silent Monitoring DISABLED 43 ACD Silent Monitoring Beeps DISABLED (Page 1 of 3) 277 .Default Database Values Form 04 .System Options OPTION NUMBER SYSTEM OPTIONS STATUS 01 Clock Format (example 16:00.Dial Tone DISABLED 23 Message Reg. 5) 3 69 DTMF ON Timer 5-15 ( in 10 ms inc ) 9 70 DTMF OFF Timer 5-15 ( in 10 ms inc ) 9 71 Slot 10 FIM Capacity (2 or 3 Bays) 2 72 Slot 11 FIM Capacity (2 or 3 Bays) 2 73 Advance to Daylight Savings Time ( mm:dd:hh ) 00:01:00 76 Go Back to Standard Time 00:01:00 79 Daylight .50 in increments of 5) 0 89 Class Functionality for ONS Sets DISABLED 90 ACD Real Time Events DISABLED 91 PRI Card: NFAS DISABLED 92 PRI Card: D Channel Backup DISABLED ( mm:dd:hh ) (Page 2 of 3) 278 ..5) 3 67 Class Receivers in Spine Bay #7 (0.5) 3 62 Class Receivers in Spine Bay #2 (0.Standard Time difference (30-240min) 60 81 Enter offset from GMT (+/-hh:mm) -05:00 82 Use DSP Echo Canceller DISABLED 83 Internet Gateway DISABLED 84 Multiple Guest Suite Phones DISABLED 85 Speak@Ease Integration DISABLED 86 PRI Card: Q....SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook OPTION NUMBER SYSTEM OPTIONS STATUS 44 ACD Reports DISABLED 45 Disable PMS Logs ENABLED 46 Rotary Digit Translation Plan 47 ARS Unknown Digit Length Time-out 2-60 seconds 5 48 Limited Wait For Dial Tone 5 49 Pseudo Answer Supervision Timer 10-60 seconds 50 Dialing Conflict Timer 2-10 seconds 5 51 Final Ring Time-out 1-30 minutes 1 0-3 1-15 seconds 0 20 52 Minimum Flash Timer 20-50 ms ( 10 ms inc ) 20 53 Maximum Flash Timer 20-150 ms ( 10 ms inc ) 100 54 DISA Answer Timer 55 Account Code Length Variable or 2-12 digits 1-8 seconds 6 8 56 Auto Room Stat Conver/Wakeup Print timer(HH:MM) 00:00 57 Vacant/Reserved Room Default Call Restriction INTERNAL 58 Occupied Room Default Call Restriction INTERNAL 59 Receivers Reserved For Non-Auto-Attendant Use UNKNOWN 60 Tone Plan NA 61 Class Receivers in Spine Bay #1 (0.5) 3 64 Class Receivers in Spine Bay #4 (0.5) 3 65 Class Receivers in Spine Bay #5 (0.sig DISABLED 87 Record a Call DISABLED 88 TAPI Desktop (0...5) 3 63 Class Receivers in Spine Bay #3 (0...5) 3 66 Class Receivers in Spine Bay #6 (0. 40) 0 111 Maximum BONS Cards (0.99) 0 103 Maximum Devices 32 104 Maximum ACD Agents 0 105 Mitel Application Interface DISABLED 106 Automated Attendant ENABLED 107 Lodging DISABLED 108 Property Management System DISABLED 109 Remote Software Download ENABLED 110 Maximum BNIC Cards (0....Default Database Values OPTION NUMBER SYSTEM OPTIONS STATUS 93 PRI Card: Remote LAN Access DISABLED 94 PRI Card: Min/Max DISABLED 95 PRI Card: Auto Min/Max DISABLED 96 Number of Links (0-8) 0 97 Support Softkey Access to Voicemail DISABLED 98 Support 3DN.40) 0 112 SS4000 Series Sets ENABLED 113 Centralized Attendant/VoiceMail DISABLED 114 Maximum IP Sets 16 115 Maximum IP Trunks 0 120 Number of Compression Resources (0-24) 0 121 Voicemail License for Bilingual Prompts DISABLED 122 Voicemail License for Personal Contact Numbers DISABLED 123 Voicemail License for DID Server DISABLED 124 Voicemail Property Management System DISABLED 125 Licensed Embedded Voicemail Boxes (0-748) 16 126 Email Messaging DISABLED 127 Autoselect Park Orbits ENABLED 128 Phonebook DISABLED 129 Attendant Park and Page Key DISABLED 130 Paging Tone ENABLED 131 PC (2nd) Port on IP Phone DISABLED 132 DSP Configuration Option BUSINESS1 133 TDM Bays (0-2) 0 134 Voicemail Recorded Announcement Device DISABLED 135 Voicemail Control of MWI by DTMF Tones DISABLED 136 Dual Function Key Timer (1-5) 2 137 Mark SMTP Forwarded Voicemails as Read ENABLED 138 Country Variant For Disconnect Tone Control DISABLED (Page 3 of 3) 279 . 4DN and 400 series Set Types DISABLED 99 Fax Tone Detection DISABLED 100 Mitel Options Password 18642413 101 System Identity Code 17591 102 Feature Level (0. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Form 05 .Tenant Interconnection Table 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 01 O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 02 * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 03 * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 04 * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 05 * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 06 * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 07 * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 08 * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 09 * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 10 * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 11 * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 12 * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * 13 * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * 14 * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * 15 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * 16 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * 17 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * 18 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * 19 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * 20 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * 21 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * 22 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * 23 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * 24 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * 25 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O 280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04 . . . . . . . 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O Form 07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Desktop Devices Definition B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS COR TYPE PAGE 1/01/01 1 100 1 1 5220 01 1/01/02 1 101 1 1 5220 01 1/01/03 1 102 1 1 5220 01 1/01/04 1 103 1 1 5220 01 1/01/05 1 104 1 1 5220 01 NAME ASSOC COMMENTS /CESID/MAC (Page 1 of 7) 281 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . .Tenant Night Switching Table 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 01 O . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . 06 . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . O .Console Assignments ****** CDE DATA PRINT OPTION 07 FORM IS EMPTY ****** Form 09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . 05 . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . O . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . 21 . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . O . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . 08 . . . . . . . . . . . .Default Database Values Form 06 . . . O . . 13 . . . . . O . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . 07 . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS COR TYPE 1/01/06 1 105 1 1 5220 01 1/01/07 1 106 1 1 5220 01 1/01/08 1 107 1 1 5220 01 1/01/09 1 108 1 1 5220 01 1/01/10 1 109 1 1 5220 01 1/01/11 1 110 1 1 5220 01 1/01/12 1 111 1 1 5220 01 1/01/13 1 112 1 1 5220 01 1/01/14 1 113 1 1 5220 01 1/01/15 1 114 1 1 5220 01 1/01/16 1 115 1 1 5220 01 1/01/17 5220 1/01/18 5220 1/01/19 5220 1/01/20 5220 1/01/21 5220 1/01/22 5220 1/01/23 5220 1/01/24 5220 1/02/01 5220 1/02/02 5220 1/02/03 5220 1/02/04 5220 1/02/05 5220 1/02/06 5220 1/02/07 5220 1/02/08 5220 1/02/09 5020 1/02/10 5020 1/02/11 5020 1/02/12 5020 1/02/13 5220 1/02/14 5220 1/02/15 5220 1/02/16 5220 1/02/17 5220 1/02/18 5220 PAGE NAME ASSOC COMMENTS /CESID/MAC (Page 2 of 7) 282 . Default Database Values B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS COR TYPE 1/02/19 5220 1/02/20 5220 1/02/21 5220 1/02/22 5220 1/02/23 5220 1/02/24 5220 1/03/01 5020 1/03/02 5020 1/03/03 5020 1/03/04 5020 1/03/05 5020 1/03/06 5020 1/03/07 5020 1/03/08 5020 1/03/09 5020 1/03/10 5020 1/03/11 5020 1/03/12 5020 1/03/13 5020 1/03/14 5020 1/03/15 5020 1/03/16 5020 1/03/17 5020 1/03/18 5020 1/03/19 5020 1/03/20 5020 1/03/21 5020 1/03/22 5020 1/03/23 5020 1/03/24 5020 1/04/01 5020 1/04/02 5020 1/04/03 5020 1/04/04 5020 1/04/05 5020 1/04/06 5020 1/04/07 5020 PAGE NAME ASSOC COMMENTS /CESID/MAC (Page 3 of 7) 283 . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS COR TYPE 1/04/08 5020 1/04/09 5020 1/04/10 5020 1/04/11 5020 1/04/12 5020 1/04/13 5020 1/04/14 5020 1/04/15 5020 1/04/16 5020 1/04/17 5020 1/04/18 5020 1/04/19 5020 1/04/20 5020 1/04/21 5020 1/04/22 5020 1/04/23 5020 1/04/24 5020 1/05/01 5020 1/05/02 5020 1/05/03 5020 1/05/04 5020 1/05/05 5020 1/05/06 5020 1/05/07 5020 1/05/08 5020 1/05/09 5020 1/05/10 5020 1/05/11 5020 1/05/12 5020 1/05/13 5020 1/05/14 5020 1/05/15 5020 1/05/16 5020 1/05/17 5020 1/05/18 5020 1/05/19 5020 1/05/20 5020 PAGE NAME ASSOC COMMENTS /CESID/MAC (Page 4 of 7) 284 . Default Database Values B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS COR TYPE 1/05/21 5020 1/05/22 5020 1/05/23 5020 1/05/24 5020 1/07/01 5020 1/07/02 5020 1/07/03 5020 1/07/04 5020 1/07/05 5020 1/07/06 5020 1/07/07 5020 1/07/08 5020 1/07/09 5020 1/07/10 5020 1/07/11 5020 1/07/12 5020 1/07/13 5020 1/07/14 5020 1/07/15 5020 1/07/16 5020 1/07/17 5020 1/07/18 5020 1/07/19 5020 1/07/20 5020 1/07/21 5020 1/07/22 5020 1/07/23 5020 1/07/24 5020 1/09/01 5020 1/09/02 5020 1/09/03 5020 1/09/04 5020 1/09/05 5020 1/09/06 5020 1/09/07 5020 1/09/08 5020 1/09/09 5020 PAGE NAME ASSOC COMMENTS /CESID/MAC (Page 5 of 7) 285 . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS 1/09/10 COR TYPE PAGE NAME ASSOC COMMENTS /CESID/MAC 5020 1/09/11 5020 1/09/12 5020 1/09/13 5020 1/09/14 5020 1/09/15 5020 1/09/16 5020 1/09/17 5020 1/09/18 5020 1/09/19 5020 1/09/20 5020 1/09/21 5020 1/09/22 5020 1/09/23 5020 1/09/24 5020 1/10/01 5020 1/10/02 5020 1/10/03 5020 1/10/04 5020 1/10/05 5020 1/10/06 5020 1/10/07 5020 1/10/08 5020 1/10/09 5020 1/10/10 5020 1/10/11 5020 1/10/12 5020 1/10/13 5020 1/10/14 5020 1/10/15 5020 1/10/16 5020 1/10/17 5020 1/10/18 5020 1/10/19 5020 1/10/20 5020 1/10/21 5020 1/10/22 5020 (Page 6 of 7) 286 . Default Database Values B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS COR 1/10/23 TYPE PAGE NAME ASSOC COMMENTS /CESID/MAC 5020 1/10/24 5020 1/11/01 1 301 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 1 1/11/02 1 302 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 2 1/11/03 1 303 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 3 1/11/04 1 304 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 4 1/11/05 1 305 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 5 1/11/06 1 306 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 6 1/11/07 1 307 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 7 1/11/08 1 308 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 8 1/11/09 1 309 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 9 1/11/10 1 310 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 10 1/11/11 1 311 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 11 1/11/12 1 312 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 12 1/12/01 1 313 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 13 1/12/02 1 314 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 14 1/12/03 1 315 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 15 1/12/04 1 316 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 16 1/12/05 1 317 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 17 1/12/06 1 318 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 18 1/12/07 1 319 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 19 1/12/08 1 320 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 20 1/12/09 1 321 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 21 1/12/10 1 322 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 22 1/12/11 1 323 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 23 VMAIL 24 1/12/12 1 324 6 1 VMAIL 1/13/03 1 200 2 1 Stn 1/13/04 1 201 2 1 Stn 1/13/05 1 202 2 1 Stn 1/13/06 1 203 2 1 1/13/19 1 Stn 1/13/20 1 Stn 1/13/21 1 Stn 1/13/22 1 Stn Stn (Page 7 of 7) 287 . Desktop Line Appearance Definition KEY TYPE DIR RING SEC DSS EXT NUM TRK NUM LABEL R# *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 100 1 9 04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9 06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9 08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9 10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9 12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9 04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9 06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9 08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9 10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9 12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9 04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9 06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9 08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9 10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9 12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9 04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9 06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9 08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9 10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9 12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9 04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9 06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9 08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 101 102 103 104 9 (Page 1 of 4) 288 .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Form 09 . Default Database Values KEY TYPE DIR RING SEC DSS EXT NUM TRK NUM LABEL R# 10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9 12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9 04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9 06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9 08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9 10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9 12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9 04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9 06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9 08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9 10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9 12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9 04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9 06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9 08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9 10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9 12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9 04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9 06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9 08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9 10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9 12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9 04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9 06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9 08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 105 106 107 108 109 9 (Page 2 of 4) 289 . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook KEY TYPE DIR RING SEC DSS EXT NUM TRK NUM LABEL R# 10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9 12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9 04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9 06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9 08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9 10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9 12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9 04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9 06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9 08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9 10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9 12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9 04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9 06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9 08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9 10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9 12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9 04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9 06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9 08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9 10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9 12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9 04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9 06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9 08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 110 111 112 113 114 9 (Page 3 of 4) 290 . Default Database Values KEY TYPE DIR RING SEC DSS EXT NUM TRK NUM LABEL R# 10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9 12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9 04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9 06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9 08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9 10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9 12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 301 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 302 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 303 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 304 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 305 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 306 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 307 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 308 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 309 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 310 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 311 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 312 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 313 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 314 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 315 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 316 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 317 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 318 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 319 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 320 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 321 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 322 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 323 *01 Prime In/Out Immed No 324 115 (Page 4 of 4) 291 . 99 seconds Minimum Baud Rate 110 Default Baud Rate 9600 Maximum Baud Rate 19200 Always Use Default Baud Rate When Called NO DTR Off Disconnect Timer 0 .9900 msec ( 100 msec inc ) DTR Forced High NO RTS Forced High NO DSR Is Held High When Device Is Idle YES CTS Is Held High When Device Is Idle YES Originate A DTRX Call With A Low->High Transition of DTR NO Action Taken If The Idle DTE Has DTR Low ( Auto Answer ) REFUSE Pooled Modem Communication Established Indicator DCD First Modem Tone ( 2025 Hz.Pickup Groups ****** CDE DATA PRINT OPTION 10 FORM IS EMPTY ****** Form 11 . 2100 Hz. 2225 Hz ) 2225Hz ASYNC: Keyboard Origination Allowed ( Auto Baud ) YES ASYNC: ADL Auto Baud NO (Page 1 of 2) 292 .Paging Groups [PAGING GROUP: 01] [ ] EXTN BAY SLT CCT 100 01 01 01 101 01 01 02 102 01 01 03 103 01 01 04 104 01 01 05 105 01 01 06 106 01 01 07 107 01 01 08 108 01 01 09 109 01 01 10 COMMENTS Form 10 . 2225 Hz ) 2025Hz Second Modem Tone ( 2025 Hz.Data Circuit Descriptor [DESCRIPTOR NUMBER : 1] PARAMETER VALUE Session Inactivity Disconnect Timer 0 .255 minutes 0 Guard Timer 2 0 . 2100 Hz.99 seconds 5 DTR To CTS Delay Timer 100 0 .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Form 09 . TX & RX EXT ) INTERNAL (Page 2 of 2) Form 11 . SYSTEM.127 ) 0 ASYNC: Delay Between Autobaud Characters 0-1270 msec (10msec inc) 100 DS2100: Operating Mode ASYNC.127. TX EXT.127. ( ASYNC. 8 bits implies no parity ) 7 ASYNC: Number of Stop Bits ( 1 . decimal value of ASCII code ) 19 ASYNC: Break Key Function SYSATT ASYNC: PBX Attention Character ( 0 .2 ) 1 ASYNC: Autobaud To Host Character 1 ( 0 .Data Circuit Descriptor Review ****** CDE DATA PRINT OPTION 11* FORM IS EMPTY ****** 22 1 13 23 1 13 24 1 13 25 1 13 26 1 13 27 1 13 28 SOCKET 1 328 1 1 1 AVL 13 DTE 21 1 CDN 13 COR 20 1 COS 19 13 NUM CCT 13 1 EXT SLT 1 TYPE TEN BAY Form 12 .Data Assignment Table HOTLINE COMMENTS 293 .127 ) 13 ASYNC: Autobaud To Host Character 2 ( 0 .8 .Default Database Values [DESCRIPTOR NUMBER : 1] PARAMETER VALUE ASYNC: Flow Control XON/OFF ASYNC: XON Character ( 0 .127 ) 8 ASYNC: Parity ODD ASYNC: Character Length ( 7 .31 ) MiNET SYNC: Clock Source ( INTERNAL. X. decimal value of ASCII code ) 17 ASYNC: XOFF Character ( 0 . SYNC ) SYNC: Rate Adaptation Scheme ( MiNET. 150 ms ( 10 ms inc ) 100 (Page 1 of 2) 294 .60 s ( 10 s inc ) 60 Flash timer 200 .12 seconds 6 Seize timer 10 .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Form 13 .700 ms ( 100 ms inc ) 300 Flash over trunk NO Direct access on CO Line Keys: bypass Key System Toll Control NO [ T1 E&M TRUNK: 7 ] OPTION NAME STATUS Reverse to Idle NO Far-end gives answer supervision NO Inhibit automatic supervision NO No seize alarm NO No release alarm NO Line Length LONG DTMF NO Save Busy-Out Status Disconnect timer YES 150 -900 ms 300 Release acknowledge timer 2 .Trunk Circuit Descriptor [ AMB TRUNK: 1 ] OPTION NAME [SUPERVISION PARAMETER] STATUS Reverse to Idle NO Far-end gives answer supervision NO Inhibit automatic supervision NO No seize alarm NO No release alarm NO Line length LONG Save Busy-Out Status YES Impedance COMPLEX Calling party disconnect timer 1 .3000 ms ( 100 ms inc ) 800 6 .9900 ms ( 100 ms inc ) 500 0 .240 s ( 2 s inc ) 40 Guard timer 200 .10 seconds 6 Ignore remote disconnect NO Disconnect timer Supervision direction: incoming trunk calls also NO Guard timer Class trunk YES Ring cycle timer Ignore line reversal during seizure YES Ringing expected YES Ringing debounce timer 5 .1000 ms ( 100 ms inc ) Incoming start type Debounce timer 800 WINK 20 .12 minutes 5 100 . 700 ms ( 100 ms inc ) 300 Flash type LOOP FSH Flash over trunk NO Interdigit timer 300 .300 ms ( 50 ms inc ) 200 Outgoing start type WINK Digit outpulsing ratio 60/40 Outpulse delay timer 100 .800 ms ( 100 ms inc ) 800 Wait for delay timer 300 .5000 ms ( 100 ms inc ) 5000 Remote end is a satellite NO Remote end is a satellite with OPS lines NO Direct access on CO Line Keys: bypass Key System Toll Control NO Release Link Trunk NO QSIG Supplementary Services YES Present Node ID over IP Trunking NO (Page 2 of 2) Form 13 .Audio Configuration Table TRK LENGTH IMPEDANCE 1 BAY SLT CCT AUTO AUTO 2 AUTO AUTO 3 AUTO AUTO 4 AUTO AUTO 5 AUTO AUTO 6 AUTO AUTO TEL NO MWT COMMENTS Form 13 .2000 ms ( 100 ms inc ) 800 Flash timer 200 .Default Database Values [ T1 E&M TRUNK: 7 ] OPTION NAME Wink timer STATUS 150 .Trunk Circuit Descriptor Review [ AMB TRUNK: 1] TRK NUM BAY SLT CCT 1 1 13 7 2 1 13 8 3 1 13 9 4 1 13 10 5 1 13 11 6 1 13 12 COMMENTS 295 . Non Dial-In Trunks BAY SLT CCT COS TEN DAY N1 N2 CDN TK NUM TK NAME COMMENTS 1 06 01 1 06 02 1 06 03 1 06 04 1 06 05 1 06 06 1 06 07 1 06 08 1 06 09 1 06 10 1 06 11 1 06 12 1 06 13 1 06 14 1 06 15 1 06 16 1 06 17 1 06 18 1 06 19 1 06 20 1 06 21 1 06 22 1 06 23 1 06 24 1 06 25 1 06 26 1 06 27 1 06 28 1 06 29 1 06 30 1 13 07 5 1 1 1 LINE 1 1 13 08 5 1 1 2 LINE 2 1 13 09 5 1 1 3 LINE 3 1 13 10 5 1 1 4 LINE 4 1 13 11 5 1 1 5 LINE 5 1 13 12 5 1 1 6 LINE 6 1 13 13 1 13 14 1 13 15 1 13 16 1 13 17 1 13 18 296 .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Form 14 . Dial-In Trunks BAY SLT CCT COS COR TEN 1 06 01 1 06 02 1 06 03 1 06 04 1 06 05 1 06 06 1 06 07 1 06 08 1 06 09 1 06 10 1 06 11 1 06 12 1 06 13 1 06 14 1 06 15 1 06 16 1 06 17 1 06 18 1 06 19 1 06 20 1 06 21 1 06 22 1 06 23 1 06 24 1 06 25 1 06 26 1 06 27 1 06 28 1 06 29 1 06 30 1 13 13 1 13 14 1 13 15 1 13 16 1 13 17 1 13 18 N M X CDN TK TK COMMENTS NUM NAME 297 .Default Database Values Form 15 . Trunk Groups [GRP:01-LOCAL ] [SMDR ][TERM] TK BAY SLT CCT NUM 6 01 13 12 5 01 13 11 4 01 13 10 3 01 13 09 2 01 13 08 1 01 13 07 COMMENTS Form 17 .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Form 16 .Hunt Group Options [GRP 01:300 ] [TERM ] STN/SET ] OPTIONS Name VMail Overflow Record-a-Call: Maximum Port Usage (1-20) 0 System Greeting (1-8) 1 Form 18 .Hunt Groups [GRP 01:300 ] [TERM ]STN/SET ] EXT BAY NUM SLT CCT 301 01 11 01 302 01 11 02 303 01 11 03 304 01 11 04 COMMENTS Form 17 .Miscellaneous System Ports ENTRY DESCRIPTION BAY SLT CCT SCT 01 Music On Hold 01 13 29 01 02 Pager 1 01 13 30 02 03 Pager 2 04 Pager 3 05 Pager 4 06 Pager 5 07 Pager 6 08 Pager 7 09 Pager 8 10 Pager 9 11 Minor Alarm 12 Major Alarm DIR PAGER EXT # 1 (Page 1 of 2) 298 . Default Database Values ENTRY 13 DESCRIPTION BAY SLT CCT SCT DIR PAGER EXT # Critical Alarm 14 Night Bell 01 15 Night Bell 02 16 Night Bell 03 17 Night Bell 04 18 Night Bell 05 19 Night Bell 06 20 Night Bell 07 21 Night Bell 08 22 Night Bell 09 23 Night Bell 10 24 Night Bell 11 25 Night Bell 12 26 Night Bell 13 27 Night Bell 14 28 Night Bell 15 29 Night Bell 16 30 Night Bell 17 31 Night Bell 18 32 Night Bell 19 33 Night Bell 20 34 Night Bell 21 35 Night Bell 22 36 Night Bell 23 37 Night Bell 24 38 Night Bell 25 39 Door Relay 1 40 Door Relay 2 41 Door Relay 3 42 Door Relay 4 01 13 30 04 340 (Page 2 of 2) 299 . ARS COR Group Definition COR GROUP COR GROUP MEMBERS (SEPARATE WITH SPACES) 01 1 300 COMMENTS .Call Rerouting Table [TENANT : 01] TYPE OF CALL DAY N1 N2 Station Dial 0 Routing 100 100 100 Priority Dial 0 Routing 100 100 100 ----- ----- 300 300 300 Call Forward Busy Number For This Tenant 300 300 300 Call Forward No Answer Number For This Tenant 300 300 300 DID Recall Points On Busy DID Recall Points On No Answer DID Routing For Calls Into This Tenant DID Illegal # Intercept For This Tenant DID Vacant Number Routing For This Tenant DID Attendant Access Night Points ----- Non-Dial-In Trunks Alternate Recall Points Dial-In Tie Recall Points On Busy Dial-In Tie Recall Points On No Answer Dial-In Tie Routing For Calls Into This Tenant Dial-In Tie Illegal # Intercept For This Tenant Dial-In Tie Vacant Number Routing For This Tenant Dial-In Tie Attendant Access Night Point ----- DND Intercept Routing For This Tenant Automatic Wake-up Routing For This Tenant Personal Wake-up Routing For This Tenant UCD/Attendant Recording For This Tenant UCD On Hold Time-Out For This Tenant DISA Day Service Routing For This Tenant Station Vacant Number Routing For This Tenant CO Line Routing Points On No Answer Music Sources For This Tenant Record a Call Voicemail Destination For This Tenant Station Illegal Number Routing For This Tenant Speak@Ease Number For This Tenant Voicemail Number For This Tenant ONS Notification Number For 911 Calls and Lockouts Phonebook Number for This Tenant Message Key Routing For This Tenant Form 20 .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Form 19 . * 02 03 Form 27.Default Database Values Form 21 . * WED. * TUE. * SAT. * MON.ARS Maximum Number of Dialed Digits COR MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIALED DIGITS 1 Unlimited 2 Unlimited 3 Unlimited 4 Unlimited 5 Unlimited 6 Unlimited 7 Unlimited 8 Unlimited 9 Unlimited 10 Unlimited 11 Unlimited 12 Unlimited 13 Unlimited 14 Unlimited 15 Unlimited 16 Unlimited 17 Unlimited 18 Unlimited 19 Unlimited 20 Unlimited 21 Unlimited 22 Unlimited 23 Unlimited 24 Unlimited 25 Unlimited 301 .ARS Day Zone Definition DAY ZONE 01 SUN. * FRI. * THU. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Form 28.Form Access Restriction FORM NAME 01 = SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INST R/W MAINT1 MAINT2 R/W none none SUPER none ATT none 02 = FEATURE ACCESS CODES R/W R/W none none 03 = COS DEFINE R/W R/W none none none 04 = SYS OPTIONS/SYS TIMERS R/W R/W none none none 05 = TENANT INTERCONNECTION R/W R/W none none none 06 = TENANT NIGHT SWITCHING R/W R/W none none none 07 = CONSOLE ASSIGNMENTS R/W R/W none none none 08 = ATTENDANT LDN ASGN R/W R/W none none none 09 = DESKTOP DEVICE ASSIGNMENTS R/W R/W none none none 10 = PICKUP GROUPS R/W R/W none none none 11 = DATA CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR R/W R/W none none none 12 = DATA ASSIGNMENT R/W R/W none none none 13 = TRUNK CIRCUIT DESC R/W R/W none none none 14 = NON-DIAL-IN TRUNKS R/W R/W none none none 15 = DIAL-IN TRUNKS R/W R/W none none none 16 = TRUNK GROUPS R/W R/W none none none 17 = HUNT GROUPS R/W R/W none none none 18 = MISC SYSTEM PORTS R/W R/W none none none 19 = CALL REROUTING TABLE R/W R/W none none none 20 = ARS: COR GRP DEFINITION R/W R/W none none none 21 = ARS: DAY ZONE DEFINITION R/W R/W none none none 22 = ARS: MODIFIED DGT TABLE R/W R/W none none none 23 = ARS: ROUTE DEFINITION R/W R/W none none none 24 = ARS: ROUTE LISTS R/W R/W none none none 25 = ARS: ROUTE PLANS R/W R/W none none none 26 = ARS: DIGIT STRINGS R/W R/W none none none 27 = ARS: MAXIMUM DIALED DIGITS R/W R/W none none none 28 = FORM ACCESS RESTRICTION R/W R/W none none none 29 = DTE PROFILE R/W R/W none none none 30 = DEVICE INTERCON TABLE R/W R/W none none none 31 = SYSTEM ABBREV DIAL ENTRY R/W R/W none none none 32 = CDE DATA PRINT R/W R/W none none none 33 = ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY R/W R/W none none none 34 = DIRECTED IO R/W R/W none none none 35 = GLOBAL FIND ACCESS CODE R/W R/W none none none 36 = MODEM ASSIGNMENT R/W R/W none none none 37 = GUEST RM SUPERSET KEYS TEM R/W R/W none none none (Page 1 of 2) 302 . Default Database Values FORM NAME INST MAINT1 MAINT2 SUPER ATT 38 = ACD KEYS TEMPLATE R/W R/W none none none 39 = ACD AGENT GROUPS R/W R/W none none none 40 = ACD SUPERVISORS R/W R/W none none none 41 = ACD PATHS R/W R/W none none none 42 = T1 LINK DESCRIPTORS R/W R/W none none none 43 = T1 LINK ASSIGNMENT R/W R/W none none none 44 = NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION R/W R/W none none none 45 = BRI TRUNK ASSIGNMENTS R/W R/W none none none 46 = KEY SYSTEM TOLL CONTROL R/W R/W none none none 47 = IP and DHCP PARAMETERS R/W R/W none none none 48 = VOICE NETWORKING R/W R/W none none none 49 = VOICEMAIL OPTIONS R/W R/W none none none 50 = MAILBOXES R/W R/W none none none 51 = VOICEMAIL DISTRIBUTION LIS R/W R/W none none none 52 = EMAIL R/W R/W none none none 53 = BAY LOCATION ASSIGNMENT R/W R/W none none none (Page 2 of 2) Form 29 .127.127.7) 0 DTRX Inactivity Timer 10 1 . Decimal value of ASCII code) Inject <LF> after <CR> ALWAYS Number of pads after <CR> (0 . Decimal value of ASCII code) 0 Editing line display 0 (0 .7) 0 Number of pads after <LF> (0 .DTE Profile Table [ PROFILE NUMBER : 1 ] DTE OPTION VALUE Terminal type VIDEO TERM Language ENGLISH DTRX Echoplex DISABLED Editing DISABLED Editing character delete (0 .60 seconds 303 . Device Interconnection Table 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 01 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 02 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 03 * * . . * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 06 * * . . . . . * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 04 * * . . . . . . .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Form 30 . . . . . . * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 09 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 10 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 11 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 12 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 13 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 14 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 15 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 16 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 17 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 18 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 19 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 20 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 21 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 22 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 23 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 24 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 25 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 304 * . . . . . . * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 08 * * . * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 07 * * . . . * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 05 * * . . . . . . . . Directed IO Table EXT NUM PRINTOUT PRINTOUT TYPE GUARANTEED Printer Port SMDR Autoprint NO Printer Port CDE Data Print Directed NO 305 .Device Interconnection Translation Table ENTRY NUM DEVICE TYPE DESCRIPTION 01 Station/Set INTERCONNECT NUM 1 02 Console 2 03 Loop Start Trunk 3 04 Ground Start Trunk 4 05 DID/Tie Trunk 5 06 E&M Trunk ( 2-Wire or 4-Wire ) 6 07 RESERVED 7 08 RESERVED 8 09 RESERVED 9 10 RESERVED 10 11 RESERVED 11 12 RESERVED 12 13 RESERVED 13 14 RESERVED 14 15 RESERVED 15 16 RESERVED 16 17 RESERVED 17 18 RESERVED 18 19 RESERVED 19 20 RESERVED 20 21 RESERVED 21 22 RESERVED 22 23 RESERVED 23 24 RESERVED 24 25 RESERVED 25 Form 34 .Default Database Values Form 30 . 0 Feature Access Code 100 SUPERSET 1 01 01 1 N/A N/A 101 SUPERSET 1 01 02 1 N/A 102 SUPERSET 1 01 03 1 N/A 103 SUPERSET 1 01 04 1 N/A 104 SUPERSET 1 01 05 1 N/A 105 SUPERSET 1 01 06 1 N/A 106 SUPERSET 1 01 07 1 N/A 107 SUPERSET 1 01 08 1 N/A 108 SUPERSET 1 01 09 1 N/A 109 SUPERSET 1 01 10 1 N/A 110 SUPERSET 1 01 11 1 N/A 111 SUPERSET 1 01 12 1 N/A 112 SUPERSET 1 02 01 1 N/A 113 SUPERSET 1 02 02 1 N/A 114 SUPERSET 1 02 03 1 N/A 115 SUPERSET 1 02 04 1 200 Station 1 13 03 N/A 201 Station 1 13 04 N/A 202 Station 1 13 05 N/A 203 Station 1 13 06 N/A 300 Hunt Group # 1 301 SUPERSET 1 11 01 1 N/A 302 SUPERSET 1 11 02 1 N/A 303 SUPERSET 1 11 03 1 N/A 304 SUPERSET 1 11 04 1 N/A 305 SUPERSET 1 11 05 1 N/A 306 SUPERSET 1 11 06 1 N/A 307 SUPERSET 1 11 07 1 N/A 308 SUPERSET 1 11 08 1 N/A 309 SUPERSET 1 11 09 1 N/A 310 SUPERSET 1 11 10 1 N/A 311 SUPERSET 1 11 11 1 N/A 312 SUPERSET 1 11 12 1 N/A 313 SUPERSET 1 12 01 1 N/A 314 SUPERSET 1 12 02 1 N/A 315 SUPERSET 1 12 03 1 N/A 316 SUPERSET 1 12 04 1 N/A 317 SUPERSET 1 12 05 1 N/A N/A N/A (Page 1 of 3) 306 .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Form 35 .Global Find Access Code Table ACCESS CODE DEFINED BAY SLT CCT SCT MULTIPLE APP. 318 SUPERSET 1 12 06 1 N/A 319 SUPERSET 1 12 07 1 N/A 320 SUPERSET 1 12 08 1 N/A 321 SUPERSET 1 12 09 1 N/A 322 SUPERSET 1 12 10 1 N/A 323 SUPERSET 1 12 11 1 N/A 324 SUPERSET 1 12 12 1 N/A 328 Data Station 1 13 28 2 N/A 340 Night Bell 1 13 30 4 N/A 502 Data Station 1 13 27 2 *01 Feature Access Code N/A *03 Feature Access Code N/A *04 Feature Access Code N/A *05 Feature Access Code N/A *06 Feature Access Code N/A *07 Feature Access Code N/A *08 Feature Access Code N/A *09 Feature Access Code N/A *10 Feature Access Code N/A *12 Feature Access Code N/A *13 Feature Access Code N/A *14 Feature Access Code N/A *15 Feature Access Code N/A *16 Feature Access Code N/A *21 Feature Access Code N/A *22 Feature Access Code N/A *23 Feature Access Code N/A *24 Feature Access Code N/A *25 Feature Access Code N/A *30 Feature Access Code N/A *33 Feature Access Code N/A *41 Feature Access Code N/A *42 Feature Access Code N/A *48 Feature Access Code N/A *49 Feature Access Code N/A *51 Feature Access Code N/A *52 Feature Access Code N/A *57 Feature Access Code N/A *62 Feature Access Code N/A *63 Feature Access Code N/A *64 Feature Access Code N/A N/A (Page 2 of 3) 307 .Default Database Values ACCESS CODE DEFINED BAY SLT CCT SCT MULTIPLE APP. 6 )) / hour 3 Framing losses . -7.300 sec ) 10 Termination mode ( LT or NT ) NT Protocol (DMS250.255 min ) 30 RTS timer .net slip limit exceeded ( 1 . None) None Network/User (Network. n = ( 3.maintenance limit ( 10**-n .5.9000 ) /24 hrs 255 Framing losses .9000 ) /24 hrs 9000 RTS timer .5. *65 Feature Access Code N/A *66 Feature Access Code N/A *** Feature Access Code N/A ### Feature Access Code N/A 000 ARS Leading Digit N/A (Page 3 of 3) Form 36 .service limit ( 0 . 398.6 )) / hour 4 BER . 4ESS. 265.5. NI2. Allow) Allow Invert D Channel (Yes. Disabled) Disabled Bearer Capability Voice (Per-Call.9000 ) /24 hrs 7 BER . No) No 308 . 533 or 655) 266-398 Framing ( D4 or ESF ) D4 Slip rate . NI2-5Ess.Modem Assignment Table BAY SLT CCT CDN BAY SLT CCT EXTN TEN DTE COS COR MODE DIAL COMMENTS 1 13 05 1 13 06 Form 42 .service limit exceeded ( 1 .maintenance limit ( 0 .255 min ) 30 RTS timer . DMS100) DMS100 Protocol Variant (NI2-Bellcore.maintenance limit ( 0 . B8ZS) 2500 AMI&ZCS Line Build Out ( 0.T1 Link Descriptors [LINK DESCRIPTOR NUMBER : 1] IN / OUT GOING VALUE Alarm debounce timer ( 300 .9000 ) /24 hrs 7000 Slip rate .1 kHz.network sync limit ( 0 .5 DB) 0 DB Line Length ( max 132. and NI2-GTD5.service limit ( 0 .4.9000 ) /24 hrs 255 Slip rate . Restrict.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook ACCESS CODE DEFINED BAY SLT CCT SCT MULTIPLE APP. 3. Speech) Speech CLIR Voice (Per-Call. -22. AMI&ZCS.after alarm ( 0 . n = ( 3. -15.service limit ( 10**-n .4. User) User Unknown Numbering Plan (Enabled.3200 ms ) Line Coding ( AMI. 168.System IP SYSTEM IP VALUE System IP Address 192.xyz.000 System Gateway IP 192.1.1.Default Database Values Form 44 .DHCP Server SUBNET NAME [BAY 1-DHCP SERVER ENABLED] 192_168_1_subnet SUBNET IP 192.255.168.255.2 System Netmask 255.255.com FTP Server 192.000 BIT MASK 255.168.1 L2 Switch IP Address 192.1.001.1 Hostname sx200icp.168.1.255.Network Synchronization DESCRIPTION BAY SLOT CCT COMMENTS First clock source Second clock source Third clock source Fourth clock source Fifth clock source Sixth clock source Seventh clock source Eighth clock source Form 46 .Key System Toll Control DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED QTY TO FOLLOW DESIGNA T TERM TYPE AND NUM COR GROUP 011 Unknown LOCAL GROUP 1 1 1 Unknown LOCAL GROUP 1 1 976 4 LOCAL GROUP 1 1 Form 47 Subform 01 .9 FTP Username ftp FTP Password @ DiffServ Code Point 44 (upgrades) 46 (new installations) Voice VLAN ID 1 Voice VLAN Priority 6 Form 47 Subform 02 .000 309 .168. L2 Switch L2 GLOBAL CONFIGURATION VALUE Tag VLAN 1 on Trunk Port(17) Disabled IGMP Snooping Enabled Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP) Disabled STP Bridge Priority [0-15] (*4096) 15 (61440) Form 47 Subform 03 .010 Range End 192.1 128-IP Phone TFTP Server IP ADDRESS 192.2 130-DHCP Server Identifier ASCII MITEL IP PHONE 132-802.Ethernet Ports PORT # 1 2 3 4 5 6 STATUS Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled SPEED AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO DUPLEX MODE AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO FLOW CONTROL AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO POWER OVER ETHERNET Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled (Page 1 of 2) 310 .001.1.DHCP Ranges RANGE IP [192_168_1_subnet] VALUE [BAY 1] Name 192_168_1_range Range Start 192.250 08 HOURS Form 47 Subform 02 .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Form 47 Subform 02 .010 .168.168.2 129-ICP Ip Address IP ADDRESS 192.1Q/p Priority NUMERIC 6 134-DiffServ Code Point NUMERIC 44 Form 47 Subform 02 .168.1.168.168.192.1.001.001.001.168.DHCP Options OPTIONS [COMMON] FORMAT VALUE [BAY 1] 3-Router IP ADDRESS 192.250 Protocol DHCP Clients class ID must match name NO Lease Time (minimum 5 minutes) 08 HOURS Form 47 Subform 03 .168.Expand DHCP Subnet NAME [BAY 1] IP RANGE [192_168_1_subnet] 192_168_1_range LEASE TIME 192.1Q VLAN ID NUMERIC 1 133-802. Routing ROUTER CONTROL ICMP Router Discovery Server VALUE Enabled Form 47 Subform 04 .001.000.000.000 255.240.000.000.000.001] BIT MASK 172.520 311 .000 192.000 Form 47 Subform 05 .168.000 010.000 255.Network List NETWORK [GATEWAY 192.137-139 UDP do not log ports 137-139.000 255.016.Default Database Values PORT # STATUS 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled SPEED AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO DUPLEX MODE AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO FLOW CONTROL AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO POWER OVER ETHERNET Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled (Page 2 of 2) Form 47 Subform 04 .168.Internet Gateway INTERNET GATEWAY VALUE WAN State Disabled WAN IP Method DHCP IP Address Subnet Mask External Default Gateway Form 47 Subform 06 .000.Firewall FIREWALL GLOBAL CONFIG Logging State VALUE Enabled PPTP Pass Through Enabled IPSEC Pass Through Enabled Action for Unknown Packet DROP TCP do not log ports 135.000.000.255. Sat) 00:00 09:00 09:00 09:00 09:00 09:00 00:00 Close Time (HH:MM)(Sun..SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Form 47 Subform 07 .Voice Mail Options VOICEMAIL OPTION VALUE Default Language ENGLISH Alternate Language ENGLISH Bilingual Option DISABLED Language Change Number 8 FAX Destination Number Send Notification Calls DISABLED Digital Pager Callback Number Auto Att Xfer to any Extn DISABLED Auto Att Xfer Restrictions Directory Voice Prompt FIRST NAME Automatic Route Select Code RESERVED Generate Account Codes in SMDR DISABLED Personal Contact Numbers DISABLED DID Server RESERVED Automatic DID Number Assignment RESERVED Synchronization of Greetings SYSTEM DAY/NIGHT Open Time (HH:MM)(Sun..Sat) 00:00 18:00 18:00 18:00 18:00 18:00 00:00 Length of Mailbox Numbers (2-5) 3 Length of Passwords (3-6) 4 PMS Protocol HYATT ENCORE SMTP Server Address SMTP Server Username SMTP Server Password IMAP Server 312 .PPTP Remote Access PPTP REMOTE ACCESS VALUE Dial in Username Dial in Password PPTP LAN Client IP Address PPTP State Disabled Form 49 . Notification MBOX# NOTIFICATION NUMBER NOTIF TYP N SCHED U ACC 0 EXTENSION OFF N 100 EXTENSION OFF N 101 EXTENSION OFF N 102 EXTENSION OFF N 103 EXTENSION OFF N 104 EXTENSION OFF N 105 EXTENSION OFF N 106 EXTENSION OFF N 107 EXTENSION OFF N 108 EXTENSION OFF N RESERVED (Page 1 of 2) 313 .Mailboxes MBOX# TYPE EXTENSION OPERATOR LANG ENV MAX DEL 0 EXTEN 0 SYST Y 10 15 100 EXTEN 100 SYST Y 10 15 101 EXTEN 101 SYST Y 10 15 102 EXTEN 102 SYST Y 10 15 103 EXTEN 103 SYST Y 10 15 104 EXTEN 104 SYST Y 10 15 105 EXTEN 105 SYST Y 10 15 106 EXTEN 106 SYST Y 10 15 107 EXTEN 107 SYST Y 10 15 108 EXTEN 108 SYST Y 10 15 109 EXTEN 109 SYST Y 10 15 110 EXTEN 110 SYST Y 10 15 111 EXTEN 111 SYST Y 10 15 112 EXTEN 112 SYST Y 10 15 113 EXTEN 113 SYST Y 10 15 114 EXTEN 114 SYST Y 10 15 115 EXTEN 115 SYST Y 10 15 116 EXTEN 116 SYST Y 10 15 117 EXTEN 117 SYST Y 10 15 118 EXTEN 118 SYST Y 10 15 119 EXTEN 119 SYST Y 10 15 999 ADMIN NEW OLD Form 50 Subform .Default Database Values Form 50 . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook NOTIFICATION NUMBER MBOX# NOTIF TYP N SCHED U ACC 109 EXTENSION OFF N 110 EXTENSION OFF N 111 EXTENSION OFF N 112 EXTENSION OFF N 113 EXTENSION OFF N 114 EXTENSION OFF N 115 EXTENSION OFF N 116 EXTENSION OFF N 117 EXTENSION OFF N 118 EXTENSION OFF N 119 EXTENSION OFF N RESERVED 999 (Page 2 of 2) Form 50 Subform .EMAIL MBOX# FWD 0 NO 100 NO 101 NO 102 NO 103 NO 104 NO 105 NO 106 NO 107 NO 108 NO 109 NO 110 NO 111 NO 112 NO 113 NO 114 NO 115 NO 116 NO 117 NO 118 NO 119 NO 314 EMAIL ADDRESS FOR SMTP FORWARD OF VOICEMAIL . 000] E911 E911 E911 Alarms Alarms Alarms Logs Form 53 .000.Bay Location Assignment BAY 01 IP BAY CIM 1 CIM 2 MMC 1 (xxx) MMC 2 (xxx) PHANTOM * 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Form 54 Calling Party Number EXT NUMBER DEFINED 100 SUPERSET 101 SUPERSET 102 SUPERSET 103 SUPERSET 104 SUPERSET 105 SUPERSET 106 SUPERSET 107 SUPERSET CALLING PARTY NUMBER (Page 1 of 2) 315 .EMAIL OWNER EMAIL ADDRESS [SMTP SERVER: 000.000.Default Database Values Form 52 . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook EXT NUMBER DEFINED 108 SUPERSET 109 SUPERSET 110 SUPERSET 111 SUPERSET 112 SUPERSET 113 SUPERSET 114 SUPERSET 115 SUPERSET 200 Station 201 Station 202 Station 203 Station 301 SUPERSET 302 SUPERSET 303 SUPERSET 304 SUPERSET 305 SUPERSET 306 SUPERSET 307 SUPERSET 308 SUPERSET 309 SUPERSET 310 SUPERSET 311 SUPERSET 312 SUPERSET 313 SUPERSET 314 SUPERSET 315 SUPERSET 316 SUPERSET 317 SUPERSET 318 SUPERSET 319 SUPERSET 320 SUPERSET 321 SUPERSET 322 SUPERSET 323 SUPERSET 324 SUPERSET CALLING PARTY NUMBER (Page 2 of 2) 316 . Default Database Values Form 55 Incoming Digits INCOMING DIGITS DID PREFIX DAY N1 N2 TENANT 317 . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 318 . Appendix B Part Numbers . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 320 . 3. (See ”Install the Analog Option Board (AOB)”on page 32. a DSP. )The AOB version 2 kit includes a new power cable. Ignore this connector when connecting AMB version 3 to the controller. Note: AMB version 3 has an extra connector on the back of the board.0 and higher Note: The AMB and AOB must be compatible. 321 .0 and higher Analog Main Board (Version 3) 56008157 Use AOB v2 or higher Analog Option Board (Version 1) 50004401 Use AOB v1 only Analog Option Board (Version 2) 50004871 Rel. Stratum 3 Clock Module 50003726 T1/E1 Combo MMC 50004402 Application Processor Card (APC) 51010725 Provides a T1 link.Part Numbers Table 50: Hardware (Options. 3. Spares and FRUs) Description Part Number Notes SX-200 ICP CX Controller 50005382 With internal 512 MB Flash SX-200 ICP CXi Controller 50005381 With internal 512 MB Flash SX-200 ASU II 50005105 Analog Service Unit (ASU) with up to 32 ONS Ports 16-port ONS Card 50005103 ASU II option card 4 + 12 ONS/LS Combo Card 50005104 ASU II option card Analog Main Board (Version 1) 50004403 Use AOB v1 only Analog Main Board (Version 2) 50004870 Rel. and a Stratum 4 clock. Spares and FRUs) Description Part Number APC Solution (Hard Drive + MAS CD) 50005413 Dual DSP MMC 50003728 Quad CIM MMC 50004451 24VAC Power Adapter for 5215 IP and 5220 IP Phones 50000690 -48V Power Brick for 5200 series IP Phones 50002070 PowerDsine 24PT In-line Power Unit or 5200 series IP Phones PD-6024/AC CompactFlash Memory Interface MMC 50003727 System Hard Drive 50004151 CompactFlash .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 50: Hardware (Options.256MB 50004154 CompactFlash .512 MB 57008923 322 Notes Includes MAS software CD Unformatted . Part Numbers Table 51: Software Description Rel.0 CD-ROM Part Number Notes 50005463 Table 52: Software Options Description Part Number ACD Agents (11-15) 9109-531-015-NA ACD Agents (1-5) 9109-531-005-NA ACD Agents (16-25) 9109-531-025-NA ACD Agents (6-10) 9109-531-010-NA ACD Real Time Events 9109-532-013-NA Auto-Attendant 9109-532-001-NA Centralized Voice Mail & Attendant S/W 9109-532-006-NA CLASS Sets 9109-532-022-NA Compression Resources (2) 54000925 Compression Resources (8) 54000890 DID Server Application 54002761 Email (SMTP) Client 54000931 Fax Tone Detect 9109-532-010-NA Feature Level 6 54001230 Guest Suites 54000131 Hospitality 54001134 Internet Gateway 54001231 IP Network Channel (12) 54001152 IP Network Channel 54000661 IP Network Channel (2) 54001151 IP Set (1) 54000660 IP Set (4) 54000923 Max ONS Line Cards 9109-533-101-NA Notes (Page 1 of 2) 323 . 4. 0 324 Part Number 51009228 .SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 52: Software Options (continued) Description Part Number Notes MiTAI 9109-532-002-NA PC (2nd) Port on IP Sets 54000929 Phonebook 54000928 Record a Call 9109-532-021-NA Recorded Announcement Device 54000927 Remote S/W Download 9109-532-005-NA Speak@Ease 54000050 Standard Unified Messaging 54001353 Support Softkey Access to Voicemail 9109-532-011-NA Voice Mail Bilingual Prompts 54000950 Voice Mail Box (1) 54000921 Voice Mail Boxes (4) 54000922 Voice Mail Personal Contacts 54000951 Voice Mail PMS 54000930 Your Assistant Starter Kit 54001761 Software and single user license Your Assistant Upgrade Kit 54002200 Single user Your Assistant Lite 54002202 Single user Your Assistant Softphone 54002201 Single user (Page 2 of 2) Table 53: Documentation Description SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician's Handbook Rel. 4. Dk Grey. Purchased separately (Page 1 of 3) 325 . Silver.Part Numbers Table 54: Peripherals Description Part Number Notes 5201 IP Phone 50002815 (Discontinued) 5207 IP Phone 50003812 (Discontinued) 5212 IP Phone 50004890 Dual Port Dark Gray 5215 IP Phone 50002817 Dual Port Dark Gray 5220 IP Phone 50002818 Dual Port Dark Gray 5220 IP Phone 50002819 Dual Port Red 5224 IP Phone 50004894 Dual Port Dark Gray 5224 IP Phone 50004895 Dual Port Red 5330 IP Phone 50005070 Dual Port Dark Gray 5340 IP Phone 50005071 Dual Port Dark Gray 5412 PKM 50002821 PKM Kit (12 Key) Dark Gray (with SIM module) 5412 PKM 50002822 PKM FRU (12 Key) Dark Gray 5448 PKM 50002823 PKM Kit (48 Key) Dark Gray (with SIM module) 5448 PKM 50002824 PKM FRU (48 Key) Dark Gray 5422 PKM Interface Module 50002825 Mitel 5303 Conference 50001900 Phone Black Mitel 5303 Conference 50001903 Phone Silver Mitel 5310/5310R 50001542 Remote Control Mouse for IP Conf Unit Wired remote control unit. Purchased separately 50001543 Mitel 5310/5310R Remote Control Mouse for IP Conf Unit Wired remote control unit. Mitel 5310 IP Conference Unit Side Control for 5220/5224 For use on 5220 IP Phone. 50000687 or 50000690) sold separately. Dark Grey (50004459). 24V Power Adapters (50000685. 50004460 Mitel 5310 IP Conference Saucer -Silver -requires separate Side Control (below) For use with: 5310 IP Conference Side Control (5220/5224) (50004461) or 5310 IP Conference Unit Module for 5330/5340 (50005321).SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 54: Peripherals (continued) Description Part Number Notes Mitel 5310 IP 50004459 Conference Saucer -Dark Grey -requires separate Side Control (below) For use with: 5310 IP Conference Side Control (5220/5224) (50004461) or 5310 IP Conference Unit Module for 5330/5340 (50005321). 24VDC Power Adapter required to power 5310 IP Conference Side Control for 5220 IP Phone. Silver (50004460) & 5310 IP Conference Saucer. Supports 5310 IP Conference Saucer. Used to connect 5310 IP Conference Saucer to 5220 IP Phone. 50004461 (Page 2 of 3) 326 . 327 . Supports Power Over Ethernet from the 5330 and 5340 IP Phones. P101N and Supra NC headsets are the ONLY headsets approved by Mitel for use with the 5207 IP Phone through the Plantronics M12 Vista. The amplifier plugs into the handset port on the underside of the phone. Mitel Gigabit Ethernet (GigE) Phone Stand 51009841 Ethernet phone stand for 5200 series Dual Mode phones. Separate Power Adapter not required to power 5310 Conference Module for 5330 and 5340. Dark Grey (50004459). Plantronics models P51. P81. Used to connect 5310 IP Conference Saucer to IP Phone. Silver (50004460) & 5310 IP Conference Saucer. 50001754 5485 IP Paging Unit Plantronics Headsets See the Plantronics web site for available headsets (Page 3 of 3) Note: Mitel 5207 IP Phones DO NOT support the direct connection of a headset. Mitel Wireless LAN (WLAN) Phone Stand 51009840 Wireless phone stand with WiFi technology built in. Use of a headset with this phone requires a Plantronics M12 Vista Universal Amplifier.Part Numbers Table 54: Peripherals (continued) Description Part Number Notes Mitel 5310 IP Conference Module (5300 Series) 50005321 For use on 5330. and 5340 IP Phones. Supports 5310 IP Conference Saucer. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 328 . Appendix C System Cabling . SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook 330 . G/V NC LS Ring/Tip 3 49/24 V/BR. O/Y NC NC 43/18 Y/G. BL/V NC LS Ring/Tip 1 47/22 V/O. S/R ONS Tip Ring ONS Tip Ring 36/11 BK/BL.System Cabling Table 55: ASU II Connector Pinout Pin Color Code 16 Port ONS 4 + 12 Port Combo 26/1 W/BL. BL/W ONS Tip Ring 1 ONS Tip Ring 1 27/2 W/O. S/W ONS Tip Ring ONS Tip Ring 31/6 R/BL. G/R ONS Tip Ring ONS Tip Ring 34/9 R/BR. BL/R ONS Tip Ring ONS Tip Ring 32/7 R/O. S/Y NC NC 46/21 V/BL. O/R ONS Tip Ring ONS Tip Ring 33/8 R/G. O/W ONS Tip Ring ONS Tip Ring 28/3 W/G. G/Y NC NC 44/19 Y/BR. G/W ONS Tip Ring ONS Tip Ring 29/4 W/BR. BR/BK ONS Tip Ring NC 40/15 BK/S. O/V NC LS Ring/Tip 2 48/23 V/G. BL/Y ONS Tip Ring NC 42/17 Y/O. G/BK ONS Tip Ring NC 39/14 BK/BR. S/BK ONS Tip Ring NC 41/16 Y/BL. BR/V NC LS Ring/Tip 4 50/25 V/S. S/V NC NC 331 . BR/Y NC NC 45/20 Y/S. O/BK ONS Tip Ring ONS Tip Ring 38/13 BK/G. BR/W ONS Tip Ring ONS Tip Ring 30/5 W/S. BL/BK ONS Tip Ring ONS Tip Ring 37/12 BK/O. BR/R ONS Tip Ring ONS Tip Ring 35/10 R/S. SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 56: CIM Port Allocation Pin Number Signal 1 RX+ 2 RX- 3 TX+ 4 - 5 - 6 TX- 7 - 8 - Table 57: Analog Main Board Pinouts Port Music on Hold Pager Relay Bay/Slot/ Circuit 1/13/29/1 1/13/30/2 Pins Signal 1 Common 2 MOH IN 1 3 MOH IN 2 1 Normally closed 2 Common 3 Ring 4 Tip 5 Normally open 6 Generic Relay 1 Generic Relay 2 1/13/30/3 1/13/30/4 (see Note 3) 1 Relay 2 normally closed 2 Relay 2 common 3 Relay 1 Common 4 Relay 1 Normally open (Page 1 of 2) 332 . They connect to ONS phones located at 1/13/3 and 1/13/4 respectively.System Cabling Table 57: Analog Main Board Pinouts (continued) Port Bay/Slot/ Circuit Pins Signal 5 Relay 2 Normally open 6 Relay 1 Normally closed ONS 1 1/13/3 3/4 Ring/Tip ONS 2 1/13/4 3/4 Ring/Tip ONS 3 1/13/5 3/4 Ring/Tip ONS 4 1/13/6 3/4 Ring/Tip LS 1 (See Note) 1/13/7 3/4 Ring/Tip LS 2 (See Note) 1/13/8 3/4 Ring/Tip LS 3 1/13/9 3/4 Ring/Tip LS 4 1/13/10 3/4 Ring/Tip LS 5 1/13/11 3/4 Ring/Tip LS 6 1/13/12 3/4 Ring/Tip Notes: 1. Music on Hold signal pins (IN 1 and IN 2) connect to the left and right channels of a 3. 2. 3. (Page 2 of 2) Table 58: Analog Option Board Pinouts Port Pager Relay Bay/Slot/ Circuit 1/13/31/2 Pins Signal 1 Normally closed 2 Common 3 Ring 4 Tip 5 Normally Open (Page 1 of 2) 333 .5 mm stereo jack. LS/CLASS trunks at locations 1/13/7 and 1/13/8 are the System Fail Transfer trunks. PLID 1/13/30/4 is programmed for Night Bell use in the default database. (Page 2 of 2) 334 .They connect to ONS phones located at 1/13/19 and 1/13/20 respectively.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook Table 58: Analog Option Board Pinouts (continued) Port Bay/Slot/ Circuit Pins Signal 6 Generic Relay 3 Generic Relay 4 1/13/31/3 1/13/31/4 1 Relay 4 Normally closed 2 Relay 4 Common 3 Relay 3 Common 4 Relay 3 Normally Open 5 Relay 4 Normally Open 6 Relay 3 Normally Closed ONS 1 1/13/19 3/4 Ring / Tip ONS 2 1/13/20 3/4 Ring / Tip ONS 3 1/13/21 3/4 Ring / Tip ONS 4 1/13/22 3/4 Ring / Tip LS 1 (See Note) 1/13/13 3/4 Ring / Tip LS 2 (See Note) 1/13/14 3/4 Ring / Tip LS 3 1/13/15 3/4 Ring / Tip LS4 1/13/16 3/4 Ring / Tip LS 5 1/13/17 3/4 Ring / Tip LS 6 1/13/18 3/4 Ring / Tip Note: LS/CLASS trunks at locations 1/13/13 and 1/13/14 are the System Fail Transfer trunks. Appendix D Folio Views (E-Docs) Tips . SX-200 ICP CX Technician’s Handbook 336 . 3. the infobase viewer. Click the Print Document tab. CAUTION: Do not click all or you will print the entire infobase. or export segments to word processing files.Folio Views (E-Docs) Tips About Folio Views The documentation CD-ROM contains all of the technical information in an electronic file called an “infobase”. Click OK. How do I print a procedure from the infobase? 1. 337 . click Print. Click Section. print sections. On the File menu. 2. select the check box of the section that you want to print. 5. has powerful search capabilities that let you find information quickly and easily. Once you've found the information that you need. 4. you can read it online. In the Table of Contents. Folio Views. 3. . 6. In the Query For box. select Checked Branches. select the save location. 4. 3. type a name. 2. . 7. click Previous Hit 338 . On the File menu. click Next Hit To view the previous hit. In the Save as type list. In the Table of Contents. 2. Click Advanced Query . Click Export.SX-200 ICP CX Technician’s Handbook How do I export a section of the infobase to a word processing file? 1. To view the next hit. How do I search the entire infobase? 1. In the Save In list. 5. In the File name box. Click OK. select a file type. click Export. In the Export Range list. select the check box of the section that you want to export. type your search criteria. 5. click Next Hit .Folio Views (E-Docs) Tips How do I search a section of the infobase? 1. select the check box of the section that you want to search. type your search criteria. Ensure that the Checked branches check box is selected. Click OK. 2. Click Advanced Query . To view the next hit. click Previous Hit . 339 . In the Query For box. 3. In the Table of Contents. to view the previous hit. 4. SX-200 ICP CX Technician’s Handbook 340 . 179 APC 24 Application Processor Card 24 installing 42 loading software on 50 ASU II 53 Attendant console deleting 97 Audio quality. programming on incoming trunks 110 antistatic wrist strap 29. entering 197 Commands. displaying 199 CDE forms checklist 256 database backup 185 default database configuration 14 default database values 265 list of 263 switching to Maintenance 199 Channel associated signaling 227 Checking LEDs 217 maintenance logs 206 system 178 system LEDs 213. networking with 171 A About advanced troubleshooting 239 About the SX-200 ICP 8 ACD. programming for Hotel/Motel 115 CLASS trunks. programming 113 Clock Module See Stratum Clock Command sequences. enabling 140. 239 Checklist CDE forms 256 installation 24 IP 258 system health 177 Circuit descriptor. 152 Basic troubleshooting 213 Blank database 187 Browser requirements 25 Business Package 8 C Cables. required 25 Call Forward. connecting 64 Analog Option Card 23 installing 32 replacing 183 Analog trunks general signaling and supervision concepts 222 programming 106 troubleshooting 222 ANI/DNIS. 170 3300 ICP. troubleshooting 253 Auto program sets 95 B backing up to FTP 209 Backups 185 CDE database 185 creating directories 185 DHCP server data 185 performing 185 voice mail 185 when to back up 185 Basic controller 23 Basic maintenance commands 200 Basic PC networking 137.Index Numerics 2nd port on IP Phones. programming External 128 Card configuration. programming datasets 115 Administrator passcode 88 Administrator’s mailbox See System Administrator’s mailbox Advanced installation overview 137 Alarm devices. maintenance report 203 system 200 traffic measurement 205 Common channel signaling 227 CompactFlash card 24 341 . 152 configuring for connection 57 configuring Windows 2000 DHCP server 147. 70 Connecting phones and lines 57 Connectivity. 149 controller settings 146 defaults 154 one DHCP server for multiple VLANS 146 one server for two VLANs 144 one server per VLAN 141 router on a stick 146 DHCP Server programming remote server 166 . 36 system hard drive 39 system identity 199 system reset 180 T1/E1 Combo Module 23. 32. 29 Quad CIM 38 rack mounting 52 rear panel 22 remote upgrade 191 removing top cover 30 342 Stratum 3 Clock 23. programming 70 D D4 DS-1 See T1 trunk Database default configuration 14 default values 265 installing an alternate database 187 programming 70 Debug option. phone 216 Default database values 263 Default database values 265 Deleting devices 97 DHCP backing up server 185 configuring Windows 2000 server 147. 184 Telnet connection 71 wall mounting 51 Web Interface connection 72 COS options Hotel/Motel 121 PRI 102 Record a Call 87 Cover. 47. 36. 184 Dual DSP MMC 23 Dual FIM Module 184 front panel 21 hard drive 181 hardware 21 installing 28 IP address 146 LEDs 217 maintenance port 197 optional hardware 23. removing 30 Customer data. 183 APC 42 APC hard drive 24. 45 Application Processor Card 24 ASU II 53 basic configuration 23 CompactFlash card 24 components 22 connecting to computer 70 DHCP settings 146 displaying card configuration 199 DSP Module 35. IP phones troubleshooting 242 Connectors controller 21 required 25 Contacting Mitel 6 Controller Analog Option Card 23. 149 connecting to Maintenance port 70 requirements 25. 184 Stratum 4 Clock 23.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook loading software on 48 Computer basic networking 137. for backups 185 Directory voice prompt 93 DISA trunks. 179 Hard drive 24 installing 39 replacing 181 Hardware Analog Option Card 32 APC 42 APC hard drive 45 343 . four-digits 187 External Call Forward. 5 documents on CD-ROM 4 Folio Views 338 helpful websites 6 printed documents 4 Release Notes 4 Technical Bulletins 5 technical training material 4 Door phone/Door opener 61 DSP Configuration Options 11 DSP MMC 23 DSP Module installing 35 replacing 184 Dual FIM Module replacing 184 E emailing 209 Embedded voice mail See Voice mail enabling PC port 140. 117 Ethernet See Layer 2 switch Exporting Folio Views sections 338 Extension number.Index DHCP Server. programming 108 Distortion. programming 107 Directories. measuring on LS lines 194 DNIS 110 Documentation set 4. 170 Ether232 115. programming internal server 161 Diagnostic Function Commands 207 Dial-in trunks. programming 128 F FAC See Feature Access Codes Feature Access Codes Phonebook 93 Send Message 87 Features Phonebook 93 programming phone features 76 Record a Call 87 Firewall programming 168 Folio Views about 338 exporting sections 338 printing sections 337 searching 338 Forms checklist 256 database backup 185 default database configuration 14 default database values 265 list of 263 FRUs installing FTP backing up to remote server 185 setting up server 65 G General network troubleshooting 240 General signalling and supervision concepts 222 General troubleshooting steps 216 Greetings assigning RAD greetings to ports 86 recording RAD greetings 85 Grounding stud 28 H Handling PCB cards 29. description 213. system health checklist 177 Hostname changing 159 Hotel/Motel COS options 121 PMS messages 232 programming circuit descriptor 115 troubleshooting 232 Hunt group assigning voice mail ports 86 naming 86 Phonebook 93 I I & M Course 3 ICMP router discovery 165 Indicators.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook ASU II 53 computer 25 computer requirements 70 controller 21 DSP Module 35 Music on Hold 61 optional hardware 29 overview 21 paging/door opener 61 ports and connectors 21 Quad CIM 38 rack mounting controller/NSU 52 Stratum 3 Clock 47 system hard drive 39 T1/E1 Combo Module 36 wall mounting controller 51 Health. static assigning to IP phones 248 removing from IP phone 251 IP checklist 258 IP networking 140 IP networking. troubleshooting 256 iPocket232 115. 117 . 239 initialize system 181 Installation Advanced installation overview 137 alternate database 187 Analog Option Card 32 APC 42 APC hard drive 45 ASU II 53 before you start 19 checklist 24 344 DSP Module 35 FTP server 65 handling PCB cards 29. configuration questions 139 IP Phone Analyzer 251 IP phones See Phones IP ports. 179 IP Phones 57 Music on Hold 61 ONS/CLASS phones and lines 59 overview 27 paging/door phone/dooropener 61 phones and lines 57 PKM 60 Quad CIM 38 quick installation 19 quick installation tool 57 requirements 24 setting up a customer LAN 19 Stratum 3 Clock 47 Stratum 4 Clock 36 system hard drive 39 T1/E1 Combo Module 36 tools 24 verifying installation 66 Installing 187 Internet Gateway programming 167 IP address controller defaults 152 programming controller’s 146 requirements 26 updating system 159 IP address. used by controller 73 IP trunks programming 172 IP trunks. 194 connecting 57 installing 57 loop start 224 requirements 25 List of forms 263 Loading software on APC 50 Loading software on CompactFlash card 48 Local Area Network See LAN Logging in 198 Logging out 199 Logs 209 commands 200 emailing 209 maintenance logs 206 Loop start line/trunk. 210 traffic measurement commands 205 upgrading system software 188 Manager passcode 88 Manual Maker. naming 93 Maintenance backups 185 checking the system 178 Diagnostic Function commands 207 displaying card configuration 199 entering commands 197 installing an alternate database 187 log commands 206 logging in 198 logging out 199 logs commands 200 maintenance commands 197 maintenance port 197 replacing IP phones 192 report commands 203 switching to CDE 199 system commands 200 system health checklist 177 system identity 199 Telnet requirements 197 tips 209. measuring on LS lines 194 LS Measurement Tool 194 LS/CLASS phones and lines 59 M Mailboxes. 239 LIGHTWARE certification 3 Line expansion 55 Lines 114. troubleshooting 224 Loss levels. controller front panel 213. creating user guides 6 345 .Index IP-PBX networking 171 K Kermit using for backups 185 using to back up log and trap files 208. 239 Light bulb symbol 7 Lights. 210 Knowledge Base 5 L LAN guidelines 19 one DHCP server for multiple VLANS 146 one DHCP server for two VLANs 144 one DHCP server per VLAN 141 requirements 26 router on a stick 146 setting up a customer LAN 19 virtual LANs (VLANs) 141 Layer 2 switch installing external 55 PoE guidelines 57 LEDs checking 217 controller 217 meaning 213. 149 connecting computer to controller 70 346 Paging 61 Panel indicators 213. 170 PC See Computer . 194 measuring LS 114. 194 Message length timer 86 Mitel contacting 6 Mitel Knowledge Base 5 Mitel Networks Order Desk 6 Repair Department 6 Return of Merchandise Authorization (RMA) 6 subscription service 191 Technical Support 7 Mitel Online accessing 5 downloading a document 5 Manual Maker 6 Mitel Options Password 6 product and technical documentation 5 registered user 5 viewing a document 5 Mitel Options Code 74 Mitel Options Password 6 MOC 74 Mode. 239 Part numbers 319 Passcode Administrator’s passcode 88 default passcodes 88 Manager passcode 88 Password See Passcode PC port enabling on IP Phones 140. 152 checklist 240 configuration questions 139 configuring Windows 2000 DHCP server 147. programming 106 NSU rack mounting 52 O ONS/CLASS installing phones and lines ports 59 Option modules 28 Order Desk 6 59 P N NAT Redirect programming 169 Network basic PC networking 137. key system or PBX 66 MOH See Music on Hold MOSS options enabling 74 Multi-line sets See Phones Music on Hold 61 source 26 helpful websites 6 IP-PBXs 171 line requirements 25 one DHCP server for multiple VLANS 146 one DHCP server for two VLANs 144 one DHCP server per VLAN 141 requirements 26 router on a stick 146 setting up FTP server 65 Telnet connection to controller 71 Telnet requirements 197 troubleshooting 240 virtual LANs (VLANs) 141 Web Interface connection to controller 72 Network analyzer 242 Night Bells 64 Non dial-in trunks.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook measuring loop start 114. programming ports 94 Printing Folio views sections 337 Product and technical documentation 5 Programmable Key Module See PKM Programmable keys. guidelines 57 PPTP Remote Access 170 Precidia Technologies 115. 170 assigning static IP addresses 248 audio quality 253 auto program 95 connecting 57 debug option 216 default database configuration 14 deleting 97 four-digits extension number 187 installing 57 network analyzer 242 PKM 60 programmable keys 78. handling 29.Index PCB cards. phones 78. 179 PDF documents. 117 PRI COS options 102 Printed Circuit Board See PCB cards Printed documents 4 Printer. downloading 5 Peripherals. 79 Programmable keys. troubleshooting 220 Phonebook directory voice prompt 93 Feature Access Code 93 naming mailboxes 93 programming 93 voice mail hunt group 93 Phones 140. 79 programming features 76 programming multi-line sets 99 registration 243 removing static IP address 251 replacing IP phones 192 restarting 193 troubleshooting 220 troubleshooting IP phone connectivity 242 PKM installing 60 programmable keys 80 PMS 5-digit extension number 233 can’t communicate with PBX 235 message 232 message format 233 programming interface 117 testing PBX interface 235 troubleshooting 232 PoE See Power over Ethernet Port expansion 55 Ports connecting computer to controller 70 controller 21 LS/CLASS 59 maintenance port 197 ONS/CLASS 59 programming printer ports 94 serial port converter 117 used by controller 73 Power LED meaning 213. 239 powering up system 179 Power Fail Transfer 59 Power over Ethernet. PKMs 80 Programming ACD dataset 115 analog trunks 106 ANI/DNIS On Incoming Trunks 110 auto program sets 95 CLASS trunks 113 computer requirements 70 customer data 70 deleting device 97 dial-in trunks 107 DISA trunks 108 enabling MOSS options 74 External Call Forward 128 347 . IP phones 248 T1/E1 Combo Module 100 Telnet connection to controller 71 voice mail 82 Web Interface connection to controller 72 Windows 2000 DHCP server 147. 7 Searching Folio Views 338 Serial port converter 117 Server one DHCP server for multiple VLANS 146 . 117 S Safety Instructions 4.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook FTP server 65 Hotel/Motel circuit descriptor 115 multi-line set 99 Music on Hold 61 non dial-in trunks 106 paging/door phone/door opener 61 phone features 76 Phonebook 93 PMS Interface 117 printer ports 94 RAD 85 Record a Call 87 single line voice station 98 Spectralink Wireless Telephones 123 static address. 149 Property Management System See PMS Q Quad CIM 38 Questions. network planning 139 Quick installation 19 running tool 57 R RAC See Record a Call Rack mounting controller/NSU 52 ventilation 52 RAD assign greetings to ports 86 enabling 85 message length timer 86 naming hunt groups 86 348 programming 85 record greetings 85 Radio See Music on Hold Range programming deleting 97 dial-in trunks 108 non dial-in trunks 106 Record a Call assigning voice mail ports 87 COS options 87 Feature Access Code 87 programming 87 Record RAD greetings 85 Recorded Announcement Device See RAD Registered user 5 Registration. troubleshooting IP phone 243 Release Notes 4 Repair Department 6 Repairs See Troubleshooting Replacing Analog Option Card 183 DSP Module 184 Dual FIM 184 hard drive 181 IP phones 192 Stratum Clock 184 T1/E1 Combo Module 184 requirements for 140 Reset system 180 Restarting IP Phones 193 Return of Merchandise Authorization (RMA) 6 RS-232-to-serial converter 115. meaning of 7 System about the system 8 backups 185 checking 178 checking LEDs 217 commands 200 configuration 8. grounding 28 Subattendant set deleting 97 Subscription service 191 SX-200 ICP See System Symbols.Index one DHCP server for two VLANs 144 one DHCP server per VLAN 141 router on a stick 146 setting up FTP server 65 Shutdown. general concepts 222 Single Line Voice Station. 23 controller 28 default database configuration 15 displaying card configuration 199 forms default database values 265 four-digits extension number 187 general signaling and supervision concepts 222 hardware 21 initialization 181 installation overview 27 list of forms 263 maintenance commands 200. 239 Stop symbol 7 Stratum 3 Clock 23 installing 47 replacing 184 Stratum 4 Clock 23 installing 36 Stud. ambient temperature 52 Spectralink Wireless Telephones programming 123 Starting the system 179 States of LEDs 213. 88 accessing 89 default passcodes 88 menu 90 passcodes 88 System Fail Transfer 59 349 . system 180 Signaling channel associated 227 common channel 227 Signaling and supervision. 205 maintenance tips 210 optional components 23 packages 8 phones and lines 57 powering up 179 remote upgrade 191 shutdown 180 system identity 199 system reset 180 upgrading 179 upgrading software 188 verifying installation 66 System Administrator’s mailbox 85. 203. 239 Status LEDs 213. programming 98 Software computer 25 computer requirements 70 enabling MOSS options 74 loading on APC 50 loading on CompactFlash card 48 log commands 206 phone features 76 upgrading system software 188 voice mail 82 Software upgrade before starting 4 Mitel Options Password 6 Speak@Ease 93 Specifications. helpful websites 6 Technical training material 4 Technician. maintenance 209 Tools installation 24 running quick installation tool 57 troubleshooting 214 Trap files 209 backing up to FTP 209 350 backing up using Kermit 208 Troubleshooting about advanced troubleshooting 239 about basic troubleshooting 213 analog trunks 222 checking LEDs 217 general steps 216 Hotel/Motel 232 IP phone connectivity 242 IP phone registration 243 IP trunks 256 loop start line/trunk 224 network 240 phone audio quality 253 phone debug option 216 phones and peripherals 220 PMS 232 sniffer 242 T1 trunk 226 Technical Support 7 testing voice mail operation 92 tools 214 voice mail 230 Trunks 114. maximum 52 Templates for mounting units 28 Testing PBX-PMS interface 235 voice mail operation 92 Tips.SX-200 ICP CX/CXi Technician’s Handbook System health checklist 177 T T1 trunk A&B bits 228 A-B signaling states 228 loopback 227 signaling types 227 synchronization 226 troubleshooting 226 T1/E1 Combo Module 23 installing 36 programming 100 replacing 184 Tape player See Music on Hold TB See Technical Bulletins Technical Bulletins 5 Technical Documentation 4 Technical Support 7 before you call 215 Technical terms. 222 ANI/DNIS 110 CLASS trunks 113 default database configuration 15 dial-in trunks 107 DISA trunks 108 general signaling and supervision concepts 222 IP trunks 256 loop start 224 non dial-in trunks 106 signaling 223 T1 trunk 226 U Upgrading remotely 191 system 179 . requirements 3 Technician’s Handbook about 3 audience 3 safety instructions 7 symbols used in 7 Telnet connecting to controller 71 requirements 197 Temperature in rack mount. 194 analog trunks 106. creating using Manual Maker 6 V Verifying system installation 66 Viewing or downloading a document 5 Virtual LAN (VLAN) See LAN 141 Virtual Private Network (VPN) See Networking Voice and Data Network configuration requirements 158 Voice and Data Network.Index system hard drive 39 User Guides. implementing 156 Voice-only system 3 W Wall mounting controller 51 WAN interface programming 167 Web Interface connecting to controller 72 Websites. helpful 6 Wireless Telephones See Spectralink Wireless Telephones Y Yield symbol 7 351 . implementing 157 Voice mail Administrator’s mailbox 88 assigning ports to hunt groups 86 assigning RAC ports 87 backups 185 default database configuration 15 default passcodes 88 passcodes 88 Phonebook hunt group 93 programming 82 System Administrator’s mailbox menu 90 testing operation 92 troubleshooting 230 Voice station. programming 98 Voice-only network. ™ Trademark of Mitel Networks Corporation © Copyright 2006. Mitel Networks Corporation All rights reserved .®.
Copyright © 2024 DOKUMEN.SITE Inc.